Online User's Guide MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW

Brother MFCL5800DW User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for MFCL5800DW by Brother which is a product in the Multifunctionals category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

Brother SC-2000USB Manual

Brother 2340CV Manual

Brother 3034D Manual

Brother PT-H105 Manual

Brother MFC-J200 Manual

Brother MFC-L8850CDW Manual

Online User's Guide

MFC-L6750DW

MFC-L6900DW

Table of Contents

Before You Use Your Brother Machine ............................................................................................... 1

Applicable Models .......................................................................................................................................... 2

Definitions of Notes ........................................................................................................................................ 3

Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties (USA and Canada) ................................................................................... 4

Trademarks .................................................................................................................................................... 5

Important Note ............................................................................................................................................... 6

Introduction to Your Brother Machine................................................................................................. 7

Before Using Your Machine ........................................................................................................................... 8

Control Panel Overview ................................................................................................................................. 9

Touchscreen LCD Overview......................................................................................................................... 11

How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD ....................................................................................................... 15

Settings Screen Overview............................................................................................................................ 17

Setting the Home Screen ............................................................................................................................. 18

Access Brother Utilities (Windows) .............................................................................................................. 19

Uninstall the Brother Software and Drivers (Windows) ...................................................................... 21

Paper Handling.................................................................................................................................... 22

Load Paper................................................................................................................................................... 23

Load and Print Using the Paper Tray ................................................................................................. 24

Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) .................................................................... 31

Paper Settings.............................................................................................................................................. 39

Change the Paper Size and Paper Type............................................................................................ 40

Select the Tray to Be Used For Printing ............................................................................................. 41

Change the Check Paper Size Setting............................................................................................... 42

Recommended Print Media ......................................................................................................................... 43

Load Documents .......................................................................................................................................... 44

Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) ............................................................. 45

Load Documents on the Scanner Glass............................................................................................. 47

Unscannable and Unprintable Areas ........................................................................................................... 48

Using Special Paper..................................................................................................................................... 49

Print ...................................................................................................................................................... 50

Print from Your Computer (Windows)........................................................................................................... 51

Print a Document (Windows).............................................................................................................. 52

Print More Than One Page on a Single Sheet of Paper (N in 1) (Windows)...................................... 54

Print as a Poster (Windows)............................................................................................................... 55

Print on Both Sides of the Paper (Windows) ...................................................................................... 56

Print as a Booklet (Windows) ............................................................................................................. 59

Secure Print (Windows)...................................................................................................................... 61

Use a Macro from Your Computer (Windows).................................................................................... 62

Use a Preset Print Profile (Windows) ................................................................................................. 63

Change the Default Print Settings (Windows) .................................................................................... 66

Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript® 3™ Language Emulation)

(Windows) .......................................................................................................................................... 68

Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows) .................................................. 69

Print Settings (Windows) .................................................................................................................... 70

Print from Your Computer (Mac) .................................................................................................................. 74

Home > Table of Contents

Print a Document (Mac) ..................................................................................................................... 75

Print on Both Sides of the Paper (Mac).............................................................................................. 76

Print More Than One Page on a Single Sheet of Paper (N in 1) (Mac) ............................................. 78

Secure Print (Mac) ............................................................................................................................. 79

Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript® 3™ language emulation)

(Mac) .................................................................................................................................................. 80

Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Mac) .......................................................... 81

Print Options (Mac) ............................................................................................................................ 83

Print One Page Duplicates on Different Types of Paper .............................................................................. 88

Cancel a Print Job........................................................................................................................................ 89

Test Print ...................................................................................................................................................... 90

Scan...................................................................................................................................................... 91

Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine ............................................................................... 92

Scan Photos and Graphics................................................................................................................. 93

Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File .................................................................................. 95

Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive......................................................................................... 97

Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) .................................................................................................. 99

Scan to Email Attachment ................................................................................................................ 101

Send Scanned Data to an Email Server........................................................................................... 103

Scan to FTP ..................................................................................................................................... 105

Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP) ................................................................................................................ 110

Scan to Network (Windows) ............................................................................................................. 118

Scan to SharePoint .......................................................................................................................... 123

Web Services for Scanning on Your Network (Windows Vista SP2 or greater, Windows 7 and

Windows 8)....................................................................................................................................... 128

Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter4 (Windows)....................................................... 133

Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter2 (Mac) .............................................................. 136

Configure Certificate for Signed PDF ............................................................................................... 140

Disable Scanning from Your Computer ............................................................................................ 141

Scan from Your Computer (Windows)........................................................................................................ 142

Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows) ....................................................................... 143

Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)................................................................. 160

Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other Windows Applications....................................... 177

Scan Using Windows Photo Gallery or Windows Fax and Scan...................................................... 182

Scan from Your Computer (Mac)................................................................................................................ 185

Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) ................................................................................................... 186

Scan Using TWAIN-Compliant Applications (Mac)........................................................................... 199

Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management......................................................................... 202

Set the Scan File Name Using Web Based Management................................................................ 203

Set the Scan Job Email Report Using Web Based Management .................................................... 204

Copy ................................................................................................................................................... 205

Copy a Document ...................................................................................................................................... 206

Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images ............................................................................................................ 208

Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature ................................................................................. 209

Sort Copies ................................................................................................................................................ 211

Copy an ID Card ........................................................................................................................................ 212

Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided Copy) ...................................................................................... 213

Home > Table of Contents

Copy Options ............................................................................................................................................. 215

Fax ...................................................................................................................................................... 217

Send a Fax................................................................................................................................................. 218

Send a Fax ....................................................................................................................................... 219

Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF.................................................................................................... 221

Send a Fax Manually........................................................................................................................ 222

Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation ........................................................................................ 223

Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting) .................................................... 224

Send a Fax in Real Time .................................................................................................................. 226

Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)................................................................................ 227

Add a Cover Page to Your Fax......................................................................................................... 228

Cancel a Fax in Progress ................................................................................................................. 231

Check and Cancel a Pending Fax.................................................................................................... 232

Fax Options ...................................................................................................................................... 233

Receive a Fax ............................................................................................................................................ 234

Receive Mode Settings .................................................................................................................... 235

Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options .......................................................................................... 245

Remote Fax Retrieval....................................................................................................................... 253

Voice Operations and Fax Numbers .......................................................................................................... 259

Voice Operations .............................................................................................................................. 260

Store Fax Numbers .......................................................................................................................... 268

Set up Groups for Broadcasting ....................................................................................................... 272

Dial Access Codes and Credit Card Numbers ................................................................................. 276

Telephone Services and External Devices................................................................................................. 277

Voice Mail ......................................................................................................................................... 278

Distinctive Ring................................................................................................................................. 279

External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)................................................................................... 283

External and Extension Telephones ................................................................................................. 286

Multi-line Connections (PBX) ........................................................................................................... 292

Fax Reports................................................................................................................................................ 293

Print a Transmission Verification Report .......................................................................................... 294

Print a Fax Journal ........................................................................................................................... 295

PC-FAX ...................................................................................................................................................... 296

PC-FAX for Windows........................................................................................................................ 297

PC-FAX for Mac ............................................................................................................................... 320

Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive .................................................................................... 323

Compatible USB Flash Drives.................................................................................................................... 324

Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage......................... 325

Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows) ....................................................................................... 327

Network .............................................................................................................................................. 328

Get Started................................................................................................................................................. 329

Supported Basic Network Features.................................................................................................. 330

Network Management Software and Utilities ............................................................................................. 331

Learn about Network Management Software and Utilities ............................................................... 332

Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network .................................... 333

Before Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network................................................... 334

Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network.............................................................................. 335

Home > Table of Contents

iii

Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected

Setup™ (WPS).................................................................................................................................. 336

Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected

Setup™ (WPS).................................................................................................................................. 337

Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network in Ad-Hoc Mode (For IEEE 802.11b/g/n) ............. 340

Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard344

Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast ........................ 346

Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network .......................................................... 348

Use Wi-Fi Direct®............................................................................................................................. 350

Advanced Network Features...................................................................................................................... 359

Print the Network Configuration Report............................................................................................ 360

Configure Your Mail Server Settings Using Web Based Management............................................. 361

Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) ..................................................... 364

I-Fax Options.................................................................................................................................... 379

Use the Send Fax to Server Feature................................................................................................ 384

Print the WLAN Report..................................................................................................................... 388

Configure and Operate LDAP Search .............................................................................................. 391

Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management ..................................... 394

Technical Information for Advanced Users................................................................................................. 398

Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only) ............................................................................................ 399

Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings......................................................................... 401

Security .............................................................................................................................................. 402

Lock the Machine Settings ......................................................................................................................... 403

About Using Setting Lock ................................................................................................................. 404

Network Security Features......................................................................................................................... 408

Before Using Network Security Features ......................................................................................... 409

Secure Function Lock 3.0................................................................................................................. 410

Use Active Directory Authentication ................................................................................................. 417

Use LDAP Authentication................................................................................................................. 422

Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS............................................................... 426

Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using IPsec .................................................................... 459

Send or Receive an Email Securely................................................................................................. 477

Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network ............................................... 483

Store Print Log to Network ............................................................................................................... 488

Mobile/Web Connect......................................................................................................................... 494

Use Web Services from Your Brother Machine.......................................................................................... 495

Use Brother Web Services......................................................................................................................... 496

Print with Google Cloud Print™.................................................................................................................. 498

Print with AirPrint........................................................................................................................................ 499

Print with Mopria™...................................................................................................................................... 500

Print and Scan from a Mobile Device......................................................................................................... 501

Print and Scan Using Near-Field Communication (NFC)........................................................................... 502

ControlCenter .................................................................................................................................... 503

ControlCenter4 (Windows)......................................................................................................................... 504

Change the Operation Mode in ControlCenter4 (Windows) ............................................................ 505

Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows) ....................................................................... 507

Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)................................................................. 508

Home > Table of Contents

Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter4 (Windows) ....................................................... 509

Create a Custom Tab Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)....................................... 511

ControlCenter2 (Mac)................................................................................................................................. 513

Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) ................................................................................................... 514

Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) ............................................................... 515

Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 517

Error and Maintenance Messages ............................................................................................................. 518

Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal Report ..................................................................................... 524

Document Jams ......................................................................................................................................... 528

Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit ............................................................................ 529

Document is Jammed under the Document Cover .......................................................................... 530

Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF ...................................................................... 531

Paper Jams ................................................................................................................................................ 532

Paper is Jammed in the MP tray ...................................................................................................... 533

Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray ................................................................................................. 534

Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine .................................................................................. 536

Paper is Jammed inside the Machine .............................................................................................. 538

Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray............................................................................................... 540

Printing Problems....................................................................................................................................... 543

Improve the Print Quality............................................................................................................................ 545

Telephone and Fax Problems .................................................................................................................... 549

Set Dial Tone Detection.................................................................................................................... 553

Set Telephone Line Compatibility for Interference and VoIP Systems ............................................. 554

Network Problems...................................................................................................................................... 555

Error Messages ................................................................................................................................ 556

Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows) ...................................................................... 558

Where Can I Find My Brother Machine's Network Settings? ........................................................... 559

I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration........................................................ 560

My Brother Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or PC-FAX Receive over the Network............................. 562

I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly ................................................... 564

Other Problems .......................................................................................................................................... 565

Check the Machine Information ................................................................................................................. 567

Reset Your Brother Machine ...................................................................................................................... 568

Reset Functions Overview ............................................................................................................... 569

Routine Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 570

Replace Supplies ....................................................................................................................................... 571

Replace the Toner Cartridge ............................................................................................................ 573

Replace the Drum Unit ..................................................................................................................... 576

Reset the Drum Counter .................................................................................................................. 579

Clean the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 580

Clean the Scanner............................................................................................................................ 582

Clean the Touchscreen LCD ............................................................................................................ 583

Clean the Corona Wire..................................................................................................................... 584

Clean the Drum Unit......................................................................................................................... 586

Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers ...................................................................................................... 590

Check the Remaining Life of Parts............................................................................................................. 592

Pack and Ship Your Machine ..................................................................................................................... 593

Home > Table of Contents

Pack the Machine and the Toner Cartridge Together ....................................................................... 594

Pack the Machine and the Toner Cartridge Separately.................................................................... 596

Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts ......................................................................................................... 599

Machine Settings............................................................................................................................... 600

Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel ..................................................................................... 601

In the Event of Power Failure (Memory Storage) ............................................................................. 602

General Settings............................................................................................................................... 603

Save Your Favorite Settings as a Shortcut....................................................................................... 620

Print Reports .................................................................................................................................... 623

Settings and Features Tables........................................................................................................... 626

Change Machine Settings from Your Computer......................................................................................... 644

Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management ............................................................ 645

Change the Machine Settings Using Remote Setup ........................................................................ 650

Appendix............................................................................................................................................ 662

Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 663

How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine .............................................................................................. 670

Supplies ..................................................................................................................................................... 671

Accessories................................................................................................................................................ 672

Brother Numbers........................................................................................................................................ 673

FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions)................................................................................................ 674

For Customer Service ...................................................................................................................... 675

Glossary............................................................................................................................................. 676

Home > Table of Contents

Home > Before You Use Your Brother Machine

Before You Use Your Brother Machine

•Applicable Models

•Definitions of Notes

•Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties (USA and Canada)

•Trademarks

•Important Note

Home > Before You Use Your Brother Machine > Applicable Models

Applicable Models

This User's Guide applies to the following models:

MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW

Related Information

•Before You Use Your Brother Machine

Home > Before You Use Your Brother Machine > Definitions of Notes

Definitions of Notes

We use the following symbols and conventions throughout this User's Guide:

WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injuries.

CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may

result in minor or moderate injuries.

IMPORTANT IMPORTANT indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may

result in damage to property or loss of product functionality.

NOTE NOTE specifies the operating environment, conditions for installation, or special

conditions of use.

Tips icons indicate helpful hints and supplementary information.

Electrical Hazard icons alert you to possible electrical shock.

Fire Hazard icons alert you to the possibility of a fire.

Hot Surface icons warn you not to touch hot machine parts.

Prohibition icons indicate actions you must not perform.

Bold Bold style identifies buttons on the machine's control panel or computer screen.

Italics Italicized style emphasizes an important point or refers you to a related topic.

Courier New Courier New font identifies messages shown on the machine's LCD.

Related Information

•Before You Use Your Brother Machine

Home > Before You Use Your Brother Machine > Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties (USA and Canada)

Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties (USA and Canada)

BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S), AND THEIR DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS

(COLLECTIVELY BROTHER’S LICENSOR) MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING

WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE SOFTWARE. BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) DOES NOT

WARRANT, GUARANTEE OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS

OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY,

CURRENTNESS OR OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE

SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS NOT PERMITTED BY

SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN CANADA. THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT

APPLY TO YOU.

IN NO EVENT WILL BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL,

INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS,

BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE

USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF BROTHER’S LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF

THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN

CANADA DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR

INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN ANY EVENT BROTHER’S

LICENSOR’S LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ACTUAL DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, AND

REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING

NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE), WILL BE LIMITED TO $50.

Related Information

•Before You Use Your Brother Machine

Home > Before You Use Your Brother Machine > Trademarks

Trademarks

BROTHER is either a trademark or a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, SharePoint, Internet Explorer, Outlook, PowerPoint, Active

Directory, OneNote, Windows phone and OneDrive are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Apple, Mac, Safari, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United

States and other countries.

AirPrint is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Nuance and PaperPort are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates

in the United States and/or other countries.

PostScript and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in

the United States and/or other countries.

Wi-Fi CERTIFIED, Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Alliance, Wi-Fi Direct and Wi-Fi Protected Access are registered trademarks of

Wi-Fi Alliance®.

WPA, WPA2, Wi-Fi Protected Setup and Wi-Fi Protected Setup logo are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

Flickr is a registered trademark of Yahoo! Inc.

Android, Google Cloud Print, Google Drive, Google Play, Picasa Web Albums and Google Chrome are

trademarks of Google Inc. Use of these trademarks is subject to Google Permissions.

Mopria is a trademark of Mopria Alliance, Inc.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.

Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.

Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

Evernote is a trademark of Evernote Corporation and used under a license.

Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement specific to its

proprietary programs.

Any trade names and product names of companies appearing on Brother products, related documents

and any other materials are all trademarks or registered trademarks of those respective companies.

Related Information

•Before You Use Your Brother Machine

Home > Before You Use Your Brother Machine > Important Note

Important Note

• Do not use this product outside the country of purchase as it may violate the wireless telecommunication and

power regulations of that country.

• Not all models are available in all countries.

• Windows XP in this document represents Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Professional x64 Edition

and Windows XP Home Edition.

• Windows Server 2003 in this document represents Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition,

Windows Server 2003 R2 and Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition.

• Windows Server 2008 in this document represents Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2.

• Unless otherwise specified, the screens in this manual are from Windows 7 and OS X v10.9.x. Screens on

your computer may vary depending on your operating system.

• The contents of this guide and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.

• Not all features are available in countries subject to applicable export restrictions.

Related Information

•Before You Use Your Brother Machine

Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine

Introduction to Your Brother Machine

•Before Using Your Machine

•Control Panel Overview

•Touchscreen LCD Overview

•How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD

•Settings Screen Overview

•Setting the Home Screen

•Access Brother Utilities (Windows)

Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine > Before Using Your Machine

Before Using Your Machine

Before attempting any printing operation, confirm the following:

• Make sure you have installed the Brother software and drivers.

• For USB or network cable users: Make sure the interface cable is physically secure.

Simultaneous printing, scanning and faxing

Your machine can print from your computer while sending or receiving a fax into memory or while scanning a

document into the computer. Fax sending will not be stopped during printing from your computer. However, when

the machine is copying or receiving a fax on paper, it pauses the printing operation, and then continues printing

when copying or fax receiving has finished.

Firewall (Windows)

If your computer is protected by a firewall and you are unable to network print, network scan, or PC-FAX, you

may need to configure the firewall settings. If you are using the Windows Firewall and you installed the Brother

software and drivers from the CD-ROM, the necessary firewall settings have already been set. If you are using

any other personal firewall software, see the User's Guide for your software or contact the software

manufacturer.

Related Information

•Introduction to Your Brother Machine

Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine > Control Panel Overview

Control Panel Overview

321 5

1. Near Field Communication (NFC) Reader (available only for certain models)

You can use card authentication by touching the IC card to the NFC Reader on the control panel.

If your Android™ device supports the NFC feature, you can print from your device or scan documents to your

device in the same way.

2. Touchscreen Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)

Access menus and options by pressing them on the touchscreen.

3. Touchpanel

(Back)

Press to go back to the previous menu.

(Home)

• Press to return to the Home screen.

• While the machine is in Sleep Mode, the Home icon blinks.

(Cancel)

Press to cancel an operation (available when lit).

Dial Pad (Numerical buttons)

Press the numbers on the touchpanel to dial telephone or fax numbers and to enter the number of copies.

4. Power On/Off

• Turn on the machine by pressing .

• Turn off the machine by pressing and holding down . The LCD displays [Shutting Down] for a few

seconds before going off. If you have an external telephone or TAD connected, it is always available.

5. (WiFi)

(For infrastructure mode)

When the WiFi light is on, your Brother machine is connected to a wireless access point. When the WiFi light

blinks, the wireless connection is down, or your machine is in the process of connecting to a wireless access

point.

(For Ad-Hoc mode)

The WiFi LED is always off.

Related Information

•Introduction to Your Brother Machine

Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine > Touchscreen LCD Overview

Touchscreen LCD Overview

You can select from two types of screens to set the Home screen: Function screens and Shortcuts screen. When

a Function screen is displayed, swipe left or right or press d or c to display the other Function screens.

The Home screen displays the machine’s status when the machine is idle. This screen is also called the Ready

Mode screen. When displayed, this screen indicates that your machine is ready for the next command.

If Active Directory Authentication or LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked.

The available features vary depending on your model.

Function screens

The Function screens provide access to features, such as Fax, Copy and Scan.

Shortcuts screen

Create Shortcuts for frequently-used operations, such as sending a fax, copying, scanning and using Web

Connect.

Eight Shortcuts tabs are available with six Shortcuts on each Shortcuts tab. A total of 48 Shortcuts are

available.

1. Modes

• [Fax]

Press to access Fax mode.

• [Copy]

Press to access Copy mode.

• [Scan]

Press to access Scan mode.

• [Secure Print]

Press to access the [Secure Print] option.

• [Web]

Press to connect the Brother machine to an Internet service. For more detailed information, see the Web

Connect Guide. Go to your model's Manuals page on the Brother Solutions Center at

support.brother.com to download the guide.

• [Apps]

Press to connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service. For more detailed information, see the

Web Connect Guide. Go to your model's Manuals page on the Brother Solutions Center at

support.brother.com to download the guide.

•[USB]

Press to access the Direct Print and Scan to USB menus.

• [2 in 1 ID Copy]

Press to access the 2 in 1 ID Copy option.

2. or (Wireless Status)

Press to configure wireless settings.

If you are using a wireless connection, a four-level indicator displays the current wireless signal strength.

0 Max

3. (Toner)

Displays the remaining toner life. Press to access the [Toner] menu.

4. (Settings)

Press to access the [Settings] menu.

If Setting Lock has been turned on, a lock icon appears on the LCD. You must unlock the machine to

change settings.

5. Date & Time

Displays the date and time set on the machine.

6. [Shortcuts]

Press to access the [Shortcuts] screen.

7. (Function screens)

Press to access the Function screens.

New Fax

When [Fax Preview] is set to [On], the number of new faxes you received into the memory appears at the

top of the screen.

Warning icon

The warning icon appears when there is an error or maintenance message; press to view it,

and then press to return to Ready Mode.

NOTE

This product adopts the font of ARPHIC TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD.

Related Information

•Introduction to Your Brother Machine

Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine > How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD

How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD

Press your finger on the LCD to operate it. To display and access all the options, swipe left, right, up, down or

press d c or a b on the LCD to scroll through them.

The following steps explain how to change a machine setting. In this example, the LCD Backlight setting is

changed from [Light] to [Med].

IMPORTANT

DO NOT press the LCD with a sharp object, such as a pen or stylus. It may damage the machine.

NOTE

DO NOT touch the LCD immediately after plugging in the power cord or turning on the machine. Doing this

may cause an error.

1. Press [Settings].

2. Press [All Settings].

3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [General Setup] option, and then press [General

Setup].

4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [LCD Settings] option, and then press [LCD

Settings].

5. Press [Backlight].

6. Press [Med].

7. Press .

Related Information

•Introduction to Your Brother Machine

Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine > Settings Screen Overview

Settings Screen Overview

Press to view the current machine status on the LCD.

Use the Settings menu to access all of your Brother machine's settings.

The available features vary depending on your model.

1. Toner

• Displays the remaining toner life.

• Press to access the [Toner] menu.

2. Network (For wired network models)

• Press to set up a network connection.

• A four level indicator on the screen displays the current wireless signal strength if you are using a wireless

connection.

3. Date & Time

Displays the date and time set on the machine.

Press to access the [Date & Time] menu.

4. Screen Settings

Press to access the [Screen Settings] menu.

5. All Settings

Press to access a menu of all machine settings.

6. Tray Setting

Press to change the paper size and paper type settings.

7. Wi-Fi Direct (For wireless network models)

Press to set up a Wi-Fi Direct network connection.

Fax Preview (For MFC models without wireless network functionality)

• Display the Fax Preview status.

• Press to access the Fax Preview setting.

Related Information

•Introduction to Your Brother Machine

Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine > Setting the Home Screen

Setting the Home Screen

Set the Home screen to either [Basic Functions], [More1], [More2], [Shortcuts 1], [Shortcuts

2], [Shortcuts 3], [Shortcuts 4], [Shortcuts 5], [Shortcuts 6], [Shortcuts 7] or

[Shortcuts 8].

When the machine is idle or you press , the touchscreen will return to the screen you set.

1. Press [Settings] > [Screen Settings] > [Home Screen].

2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the screen settings, and then press the setting you want.

3. Press .

The machine will go to your chosen Home screen.

Related Information

•Introduction to Your Brother Machine

Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine > Access Brother Utilities (Windows)

Access Brother Utilities (Windows)

Brother Utilities is an application launcher that offers convenient access to all Brother applications installed on

your computer.

1. Do one of the following:

• (Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008 and Windows

Server 2008 R2)

Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.

• (Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012)

Tap or click (Brother Utilities) either on the Start screen or the desktop.

• (Windows 8.1 and Windows Server 2012 R2)

Move your mouse to the lower left corner of the Start screen and click (if you are using a touch-

based device, swipe up from the bottom of the Start screen to bring up the Apps screen).

When the Apps screen appears, tap or click (Brother Utilities).

2. Select your machine (where XXXX is the name of your model).

3. Choose the operation you want to use.

Related Information

•Introduction to Your Brother Machine

•Uninstall the Brother Software and Drivers (Windows)

Home > Introduction to Your Brother Machine > Access Brother Utilities (Windows) > Uninstall the Brother

Software and Drivers (Windows)

Uninstall the Brother Software and Drivers (Windows)

1. Do one of the following:

• (Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008 and Windows

Server 2008 R2)

Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.

• (Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012)

Tap or click (Brother Utilities) either on the Start screen or the desktop.

• (Windows 8.1 and Windows Server 2012 R2)

Move your mouse to the lower left corner of the Start screen and click (if you are using a touch-

based device, swipe up from the bottom of the Start screen to bring up the Apps screen).

When the Apps screen appears, tap or click (Brother Utilities).

2. Click the drop-down list, and then select your model name (if not already selected). Click Tools in the left

navigation bar, and then click Uninstall.

Follow the instructions in the dialog box to uninstall the software and drivers.

Related Information

•Access Brother Utilities (Windows)

Home > Paper Handling

Paper Handling

•Load Paper

•Paper Settings

•Recommended Print Media

•Load Documents

•Unscannable and Unprintable Areas

•Using Special Paper

Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper

Load Paper

•Load and Print Using the Paper Tray

•Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)

Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray

Load and Print Using the Paper Tray

•Load Plain Paper, Letterhead, Colored Paper, Thin Paper and Recycled Paper in the

Paper Tray

•Load Thick Paper in the Paper Tray

•Printing Problems

•Error and Maintenance Messages

Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray > Load Plain Paper,

Letterhead, Colored Paper, Thin Paper and Recycled Paper in the Paper Tray

Load Plain Paper, Letterhead, Colored Paper, Thin Paper and Recycled

Paper in the Paper Tray

• If the Check Size setting is set to On and you pull the paper tray out of the machine, a message appears

on the LCD asking if you want to change the paper size and paper type. Change the paper size and paper

type settings if needed, following the LCD instructions.

• When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must change the Paper Size and Paper

Type settings in the machine or on your computer, also.

1. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.

2. Press and slide the paper guides to fit the paper.

Press the green release levers to slide the paper guides.

For Legal or Folio size paper, press the release button (1) in the bottom of the paper tray or the release

lever (2) in the back of the tray, and then pull out the back of the paper tray. (Legal and Folio size paper are

not available in some regions.)

For trays with a release button:

For trays with a release lever:

3. Fan the stack of paper well.

4. Load paper in the paper tray with the printing surface face down.

When you use Letterhead or Preprinted paper, load the paper in the correct orientation as shown in the

illustrations.

Paper Orientation for Letterhead and Preprinted Paper

For 1-sided printing

• face down

• top edge toward the front of the paper tray

For automatic 2-sided printing (long edge binding)

• face up

• bottom edge toward the front of the paper tray

• DO NOT load different sizes and types of paper in the paper tray at the same time. Doing this may

cause the paper to jam or misfeed.

• When you use Letterhead or Preprinted paper for 2-sided printing, change the machine's setting by

completing the following step:

- Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [2-sided] > [Single Image] >

[2-sided Feed].

5. Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (b b b).

Overfilling the paper tray will cause paper jams.

6. Slowly push the paper tray completely into the machine.

7. Lift the support flap to prevent paper from sliding off the output tray.

Related Information

•Load and Print Using the Paper Tray

Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray > Load Thick Paper in the

Paper Tray

Load Thick Paper in the Paper Tray

• If the Check Size setting is set to On and you pull the paper tray out of the machine, a message appears

on the LCD asking if you want to change the paper size and paper type. Change the paper size and paper

type settings if needed, following the LCD instructions.

• When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must change the Paper Size and Paper

Type settings in the machine or on your computer, also.

1. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.

2. Press and slide the paper guides to fit the paper.

Press the green release levers to slide the paper guides.

For Legal or Folio size paper, press the release button (1) in the bottom of the paper tray or the release

lever (2) in the back of the tray, and then pull out the back of the paper tray. (Legal and Folio size paper are

not available in some regions.)

For trays with a release button:

For trays with a release lever:

3. Fan the stack of paper well.

4. Load paper in the paper tray with the printing surface face down.

DO NOT load different sizes and types of paper in the paper tray at the same time. Doing this may cause

the paper to jam or misfeed.

5. Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (b b b).

Overfilling the paper tray will cause paper jams.

6. Slowly push the paper tray completely into the machine.

7. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).

8. Open the paper stopper (Available only for certain models).

9. Send your print job to the machine.

Change your print preferences in the Print dialog box before sending the print job from your computer.

10. Close the paper stopper (Available only for certain models).

11. Close the back cover (the face up output tray) until it locks in the closed position.

Related Information

•Load and Print Using the Paper Tray

Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)

Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)

You can load up to ten envelopes, letterhead, colored paper, thin paper, thick paper, thicker paper, recycled

paper, Bond paper, labels, or up to 50 sheets of plain paper in the MP tray.

•Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)

•Load and Print Thick Paper and Labels Using the MP Tray

•Load and Print on Envelopes Using the MP Tray

•Printing Problems

•Error and Maintenance Messages

Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load

Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)

Load Paper in the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)

When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must change the Paper Size and Paper Type

settings in the machine or on your computer, also.

1. Lift the support flap to prevent paper from sliding off the face down output tray.

2. Open the MP tray and lower it gently.

3. Pull out the MP tray support (1) and unfold the flap (2).

4. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the paper you are using. If the paper guide on the right side

has a lever, press it and slide the paper guide.

5. Load paper with the printing surface face up in the MP tray. When you use Letterhead or Preprinted paper,

load the paper in the correct orientation as shown in the illustrations.

Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (1).

Paper Orientation for Letterhead and Preprinted Paper

For 1-sided printing

• face up

• top edge first

For automatic 2-sided printing (long edge binding)

• face down

• bottom edge first

When you use Letterhead or Preprinted paper for 2-sided printing, change the machine's setting by

completing the following step:

• Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [2-sided] > [Single Image] > [2-

sided Feed].

Related Information

•Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)

Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load

and Print Thick Paper and Labels Using the MP Tray

Load and Print Thick Paper and Labels Using the MP Tray

When the back cover (face up output tray) is pulled down, the machine has a straight paper path from the MP

tray through to the back of the machine. Use this paper feed and output method when you print on thick paper

or labels.

When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must change the Paper Size and Paper Type

settings in the machine or on your computer, also.

1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).

2. Open the paper stopper (Available only for certain models).

3. On the front of the machine, open the MP tray and lower it gently.

4. Pull out the MP tray support (1) and unfold the flap (2).

5. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the paper that you are using. If the paper guide on the right

side has a lever, press it and slide the paper guide.

6. Load paper or labels in the MP tray.

• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (1).

• Load paper into the MP tray with the printing surface face up.

7. Send your print job to the machine.

Change your print preferences in the Print screen before sending the print job from your computer.

8. Close the paper stopper (Available only for certain models).

9. Close the back cover (the face up output tray) until it locks in the closed position.

Related Information

•Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)

Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray) > Load

and Print on Envelopes Using the MP Tray

Load and Print on Envelopes Using the MP Tray

You can load up to ten envelopes in the MP tray.

Before loading, press the corners and sides of the envelopes to make them as flat as possible.

When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must change the Paper Size and Paper Type

settings in the machine or on your computer, also.

1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).

2. Open the paper stopper (Available only for certain models).

3. On the front of the machine, open the MP tray and lower it gently.

4. Pull out the MP tray support (1) and unfold the flap (2).

5. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the envelopes that you are using. If the paper guide on the

right side has a lever, press it and slide the paper guide.

6. Load envelopes in the MP tray.

Load up to 10 envelopes in the MP tray with the printing surface face up. Make sure the envelopes are

below the maximum paper mark (1). Loading more than 10 envelopes may cause paper jams.

7. Send your print job to the machine.

Change your print preferences in the Print dialog box before sending the print job from your computer.

Settings Options for Envelopes

Paper Size Com-10

Monarch

Media Type Envelopes

Env. Thick

Env. Thin

8. Close the paper stopper (Available only for certain models).

9. Close the back cover (the face up output tray) until it locks in the closed position.

Related Information

•Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)

Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings

Paper Settings

•Change the Paper Size and Paper Type

•Select the Tray to Be Used For Printing

•Change the Check Paper Size Setting

Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings > Change the Paper Size and Paper Type

Change the Paper Size and Paper Type

When you change the size and type of the paper you load in the tray, you must change the Paper Size and

Paper Type settings on the LCD at the same time.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting] > [Paper

Type].

2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper tray options, and then press the option you want.

3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper type options, and then press the option you want.

4. Press .

5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Paper Size] option, and then press [Paper Size].

6. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper tray options, and then press the option you want.

7. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper size options, and then press the option you want.

8. Press .

Related Information

•Paper Settings

Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings > Select the Tray to Be Used For Printing

Select the Tray to Be Used For Printing

Change the default tray the machine will use for printing copies, received faxes, and print jobs from your

computer.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting].

2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Tray Use: Copy], [Tray Use: Fax], or [Tray Use:

Print] option, and then press the option you want.

3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the option you want, and then press it. For example, when you

select the [MP>T1] option, the machine pulls paper from the MP tray until it is empty, and then from Tray 1.

4. Press .

• When you make a copy using the ADF and give priority to multiple trays, the machine looks for the tray

with the most suitable paper and pulls paper from that tray.

• When you make a copy using the scanner glass, your document is copied from the higher priority tray

even if more suitable paper is in another paper tray.

• (MFC models) Use the following sizes of paper for printing faxes: Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, Mexico Legal

or India Legal. When an appropriate size is not in any of the trays, the machine stores received faxes

and [Size Mismatch] appears on the touchscreen.

• (MFC models) If the tray is out of paper and received faxes are in the machine’s memory, [No Paper]

appears on the touchscreen. Load paper in the empty tray.

Related Information

•Paper Settings

Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings > Change the Check Paper Size Setting

Change the Check Paper Size Setting

When you turn on your machine's Check Size setting, the machine displays a message when you remove a

paper tray or load paper using the MP tray, asking if you changed the paper size and paper type.

The default setting is On.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting] > [Check

Size].

2. Press [On] or [Off].

3. Press .

Related Information

•Paper Settings

Home > Paper Handling > Recommended Print Media

Recommended Print Media

To get the best print quality, we recommend using the paper listed in the table.

Paper Type Item

Plain Paper Xerox 4200DP 20 lb

Hammermill Laser Print

(24 lb = 90 g/m2)

Recycled Paper No specific brand recommended

Labels Avery laser labels white #5160

Envelopes No specific brand recommended

Related Information

•Paper Handling

Home > Paper Handling > Load Documents

Load Documents

You can send a fax, make copies and scan from the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) and from the scanner

glass.

•Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

•Load Documents on the Scanner Glass

Home > Paper Handling > Load Documents > Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

Use the ADF when copying or scanning multiple-page, standard-sized documents.

• The ADF can hold the following pages and feed each sheet individually:

- (MFC-L6750DW)

up to 70 pages

- (MFC-L6900DW)

up to 80 pages

• Use standard 20 lb (80 g/m2) paper.

• Make sure documents with correction fluid or written in ink are completely dry.

IMPORTANT

• DO NOT leave thick documents on the scanner glass. If you do this, the ADF may jam.

• DO NOT use paper that is curled, wrinkled, folded, ripped, stapled, paper-clipped, pasted, or taped.

• DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper, or fabric.

• To avoid damaging your machine while using the ADF, DO NOT pull on the document while it is feeding.

Document Sizes Supported

Length: 5.8 to 14.0 in. (147.3 to 355.6 mm)

Width: 4.1 to 8.5 in. (105 to 215.9 mm)

Weight: 17 to 24 lb (64 to 90 g/m2)

1. Unfold the ADF document output support flap.

2. Fan the pages well.

3. Stagger the pages of your document and load it face up and top edge first, into the ADF as shown in the

illustration.

4. Adjust the paper guides to fit the width of your document.

Related Information

•Load Documents

Home > Paper Handling > Load Documents > Load Documents on the Scanner Glass

Load Documents on the Scanner Glass

Use the scanner glass to fax, copy, or scan one page at a time.

Document Sizes Supported

Length: • (MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW)

Up to 14 in. (355.6 mm)

Width: Up to 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)

Weight: Up to 4.4 lb (2 kg)

To use the scanner glass, the ADF must be empty.

1. Lift the document cover.

2. Place the document on the scanner glass face down.

3. Place the corner of the page in the upper left corner of the scanner glass.

4. Close the document cover.

If the document is a book or is thick, gently press on the document cover.

Related Information

•Load Documents

Home > Paper Handling > Unscannable and Unprintable Areas

Unscannable and Unprintable Areas

The figures in the table show maximum unscannable and unprintable areas from the edges of the most

commonly-used paper sizes. These measurements may vary depending on the paper size or settings in the

application you are using.

Do not attempt to scan, copy, or print into these areas; your output will not reflect anything in these areas.

Usage Document Size Top (1)

Bottom (3)

Left (2)

Right (4)

Fax (Sending) Letter, Legal 0.12 in. (3 mm) 0.16 in. (4 mm)

A4 0.12 in. (3 mm) (ADF)

0.04 in. (1 mm)

(Scanner Glass)

0.12 in. (3 mm)

Copy 1Letter, Legal 0.16 in. (4 mm) 0.16 in. (4 mm)

A4 0.16 in. (4 mm) 0.12 in. (3 mm)

Scan Letter 0.12 in. (3 mm) 0.12 in. (3 mm)

A4 0.12 in. (3 mm) Approximately 0.12 in. (3

mm)

Legal Approximately 0.12 in. (3

mm)

Approximately 0.12 in. (3

mm)

Print Letter, Legal 0.16 in. (4.2 mm) 0.16 in. (4.2 mm)

A4 0.16 in. (4.2 mm) 0.16 in. (4.2 mm)

Related Information

•Paper Handling

•Printing Problems

1a single copy or a 1 in 1 copy

Home > Paper Handling > Using Special Paper

Using Special Paper

Always test paper samples before purchasing them to ensure desirable performance.

• DO NOT use inkjet paper; it may cause a paper jam or damage your machine.

• If you use bond paper, paper with a rough surface, or paper that is wrinkled or creased, the paper may exhibit

degraded performance.

Store paper in its original packaging and keep it sealed. Keep the paper flat and away from moisture, direct

sunlight and heat.

IMPORTANT

Some types of paper may not perform well or may cause damage to your machine.

DO NOT use paper:

• that is highly textured

• that is extremely smooth or shiny

• that is curled or warped

• that is coated or has a chemical finish

• that is damaged, creased or folded

• that exceeds the recommended weight specification in this guide

• with tabs and staples

• with letterheads using low temperature dyes or thermography

• that is multipart or carbonless

• that is designed for inkjet printing

If you use any of the types of paper listed above, they may damage your machine. This damage is not

covered under any Brother warranty or service agreement.

Related Information

•Paper Handling

Home > Print

•Print from Your Computer (Windows)

•Print from Your Computer (Mac)

•Print One Page Duplicates on Different Types of Paper

•Cancel a Print Job

•Test Print

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows)

Print from Your Computer (Windows)

•Print a Document (Windows)

•Print More Than One Page on a Single Sheet of Paper (N in 1) (Windows)

•Print as a Poster (Windows)

•Print on Both Sides of the Paper (Windows)

•Print as a Booklet (Windows)

•Secure Print (Windows)

•Use a Macro from Your Computer (Windows)

•Use a Preset Print Profile (Windows)

•Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)

•Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript® 3™ Language

Emulation) (Windows)

•Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows)

•Print Settings (Windows)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print a Document (Windows)

Print a Document (Windows)

1. Select the print command in your application.

2. Select Brother XXX-XXXX (where XXXX is the name of your model), and then click the printing properties or

preferences button.

The printer driver window appears.

3. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray.

4. Click the Paper Size drop-down list, and then select your paper size.

5. In the Orientation field, select the Portrait or Landscape option to set the orientation of your printout.

If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the

application.

6. Type the number of copies (1-999) you want in the Copies field.

7. Click the Media Type drop-down list, and then select the type of paper you are using.

8. To print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper or print one page of your document on multiple sheets,

click the Multiple Page drop-down list, and then select your options.

9. Change other printer settings if needed.

10. Click OK.

11. Complete your print operation.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Windows)

•Print Settings (Windows)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print More Than One Page on a Single Sheet of

Paper (N in 1) (Windows)

Print More Than One Page on a Single Sheet of Paper (N in 1)

(Windows)

1. Select the print command in your application.

2. Select Brother XXX-XXXX (where XXXX is the name of your model), and then click the printing properties or

preferences button.

The printer driver window appears.

3. In the Orientation field, select the Portrait or Landscape option to set the orientation of your printout.

If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the

application.

4. Click the Multiple Page drop-down list, and then select the 2 in 1, 4 in 1, 9 in 1, 16 in 1, or 25 in 1 option.

5. Click the Page Order drop-down list, and then select your page order.

6. Click the Border Line drop-down list, and then select your border line type.

7. Change other printer settings if needed.

8. Click OK.

9. Complete your print operation.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Windows)

•Print Settings (Windows)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print as a Poster (Windows)

Print as a Poster (Windows)

Enlarge your print size and print the document in poster mode.

1. Select the print command in your application.

2. Select Brother XXX-XXXX (where XXXX is the name of your model), and then click the printing properties or

preferences button.

The printer driver window appears.

3. Click the Multiple Page drop-down list, and then select the 1 in 2x2 Pages, 1 in 3x3 Pages, 1 in 4x4 Pages,

or 1 in 5x5 Pages option.

4. Select the Print cut-out line check box, if needed.

Print cut-out line

Prints a faint cut-out line around the printable area so that you can easily cut it out.

5. Change other printer settings if needed.

6. Click OK.

7. Complete your print operation.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Windows)

•Print Settings (Windows)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print on Both Sides of the Paper (Windows)

Print on Both Sides of the Paper (Windows)

• Select Letter, Legal, Mexico Legal, India Legal or Folio sized paper when using the automatic 2-sided

printing function.

• Make sure the back cover is closed.

• If paper is curled, straighten it and put it back in the paper tray.

• Use regular paper or thin paper. DO NOT use bond paper.

• If the paper is too thin, it may wrinkle.

• When you use the manual 2-sided printing function, it is possible there may be paper jams or poor print

quality.

1. Select the print command in your application.

2. Select Brother XXX-XXXX (where XXXX is the name of your model), and then click the printing properties or

preferences button.

The printer driver window appears.

3. In the Orientation field, select the Portrait or Landscape option to set the orientation of your printout.

If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the

application.

4. Click the 2-sided / Booklet drop-down list, and then select the 2-sided or 2-sided (Manual) option.

Option Description

2-sided(Available only for

certain models)

Automatically prints on both sides of the paper.

2-sided (Manual) The machine prints all the even-numbered pages on one side of the paper

first. Then, the printer driver instructs you (with a pop-up message) to

reinsert the paper.

5. Click the 2-sided Settings button.

6. Select one of the options from the 2-sided Type menu.

When 2-sided is selected, four types of 2-sided binding are available for each orientation:

Option for Portrait Description

Long Edge (Left)

Long Edge (Right)

Short Edge (Top)

Short Edge (Bottom)

Option for Landscape Description

Long Edge (Top)

Long Edge (Bottom)

Option for Landscape Description

Short Edge (Right)

Short Edge (Left)

7. Select the Binding Offset check box if you want to specify the offset for binding in inches or millimeters.

8. Click OK.

9. Change other printer settings if needed.

10. Do one of the following:

• For automatic 2-sided printing, click OK again, and then complete your print operation.

• For manual 2-sided printing, click OK again and follow the on-screen instructions.

If the paper is not feeding correctly, it may be curled. Remove the paper, straighten it, and put it back in the paper

tray.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Windows)

•Print Settings (Windows)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print as a Booklet (Windows)

Print as a Booklet (Windows)

Use this option to print a document in booklet format using 2-sided printing. The document's pages will be

arranged according to the correct page number and will allow you to fold the print output at the center, without

having to change the order of the printed pages.

• Select Letter, Legal, Mexico Legal, India Legal or Folio sized paper when using the automatic 2-sided

printing function.

• Make sure the back cover is closed.

• If paper is curled, straighten it and put it back in the paper tray.

• Use regular paper or thin paper. DO NOT use bond paper.

• If the paper is too thin, it may wrinkle.

• When you use the manual 2-sided printing function, it is possible there may be paper jams or poor print

quality.

1. Select the print command in your application.

2. Select Brother XXX-XXXX (where XXXX is the name of your model), and then click the printing properties or

preferences button.

The printer driver window appears.

3. In the Orientation field, select the Portrait or Landscape option to set the orientation of your printout.

If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the

application.

4. Click the 2-sided / Booklet drop-down list, and then select the Booklet or Booklet (Manual) option.

Option Description

Booklet (Available only for certain models) Automatically prints as a booklet.

Booklet (Manual) Manually prints as a booklet.

5. Click the 2-sided Settings button.

6. Select one of the options from the 2-sided Type menu.

There are two types of 2-sided binding directions available for each orientation:

Option for Portrait Description

Left Binding

Right Binding

Option for Landscape Description

Top Binding

Bottom Binding

7. Select one of the options from the Booklet Printing Method menu.

Option Description

All Pages at

Once

Every page will be printed in booklet format (four pages to every piece of paper, two pages

per side). Fold your printout in the center to create the booklet.

Divide into

Sets

This option prints the whole booklet in smaller individual booklet sets, allowing you to fold at

the center of the smaller individual booklet sets without having to change the order of the

printed pages. You can specify the number of sheets in each smaller booklet set (from

1-15). This option can be helpful when folding a printed booklet that has a large number of

pages.

8. Select the Binding Offset check box if you want to specify the offset for binding in inches or millimeters.

9. Click OK.

10. Change other printer settings if needed.

11. Do one of the following:

• For automatic booklet printing, click OK again, and then complete your print operation.

• For manual booklet printing, click OK again and follow the on-screen instructions.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Windows)

•Print Settings (Windows)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Secure Print (Windows)

Secure Print (Windows)

Use Secure Print to ensure that confidential or sensitive documents do not print until you enter a password on

the machine's control panel.

• The secure data is deleted from the machine when you turn off the machine.

1. Select the print command in your application.

2. Select Brother XXX-XXXX (where XXXX is the name of your model), and then click the printing properties or

preferences button.

The printer driver window appears.

3. Click the Advanced tab.

4. Click the Settings button in the Secure Print field.

5. Select the Secure Print check box.

6. Type your four-digit password in the Password field, and then click OK.

You must set a separate password for each document.

7. Click OK.

8. Complete your print operation.

9. On the machine's control panel, swipe left or right or press d or c to display the [Secure Print] option,

and then press [Secure Print].

10. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display user names, and then press your user name.

The LCD displays the list of secured jobs for your name.

11. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the print job, and then press it.

12. Enter your four-digit password, and then press [OK].

13. Enter the number of copies you want.

14. Press [Start].

The machine prints the data.

After you print the secured data, it will be cleared from the machine's memory.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Windows)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Use a Macro from Your Computer (Windows)

Use a Macro from Your Computer (Windows)

If you have stored the electronic forms (macros) in your machine's memory, you can use the macro to print the

data as an overlay on the print job you want.

1. Select the print command in your application.

2. Select Brother XXX-XXXX (where XXXX is the name of your model), and then click the printing properties or

preferences button.

The printer driver window appears.

3. Click the Advanced tab.

4. Click the Other Print Options button.

5. Select Macro.

6. Click the Macro Settings button.

7. Enter Macro ID and Macro Name you want to use.

8. Select Insert Macro Command.

9. Select the page to overlay the macro data.

Option Description

All Pages Lets you insert the macro onto all pages.

Page Lets you insert the macro onto a specific page. Select this option, and then enter a

page number within the range 1 to 255.

Add to Top of Page Send the macro data to the top of the page.

Add to End of Page Send the macro data to the bottom of the page.

When Booklet has been selected, the Page setting in Insert Macro Command is disabled.

10. Click OK.

11. Click OK to return to the printer driver window.

12. Click OK.

13. Complete your print operation.

The macro data is printed as an overlay.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Windows)

•Print One Page Duplicates on Different Types of Paper

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Use a Preset Print Profile (Windows)

Use a Preset Print Profile (Windows)

Print Profiles are presets designed to give you quick access to frequently-used printing configurations.

1. Select the print command in your application.

2. Select Brother XXX-XXXX (where XXXX is the name of your model), and then click the printing properties or

preferences button.

The printer driver window appears.

3. Click the Print Profiles tab.

4. Select your profile from the print profile list.

The profile settings are shown on the left side of the printer driver window.

5. Do one of the following:

• If the settings are correct for your print job, click OK.

• To change the settings, go back to the Basic or Advanced tab, change settings, and then click OK.

To display the Print Profiles tab at the front of the window the next time you print, select the Always show

Print Profiles tab first. check box.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Windows)

•Create or Delete Your Print Profile (Windows)

•Print Settings (Windows)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Use a Preset Print Profile (Windows) > Create or

Delete Your Print Profile (Windows)

Create or Delete Your Print Profile (Windows)

Add up to 20 new print profiles with customized settings.

1. Select the print command in your application.

2. Select Brother XXX-XXXX (where XXXX is the name of your model), and then click the printing properties or

preferences button.

The printer driver window appears.

3. Click the Basic tab and the Advanced tab, and configure the print settings you want for the new Print Profile.

4. Click the Print Profiles tab.

5. Do one of the following:

To create a new print profile:

a. Click Add Profile.

The Add Profile dialog box appears.

b. Type the new profile name in the Name field.

c. Click the icon you want to use to represent this profile from the icon list.

d. Click OK.

The new Print Profile name is added to the list in the Print Profiles tab.

To delete a print profile that you created:

a. Click Delete Profile.

The Delete Profile dialog box appears.

b. Select the profile you want to delete.

c. Click Delete.

d. Click Yes.

e. Click Close.

Related Information

•Use a Preset Print Profile (Windows)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)

Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)

When you change print settings from within a program, the changes apply only to the items you are printing in

that program, at that time. To select print settings to use for all of your Windows programs, all the time, use these

steps to change the default print settings.

1. Do one of the following:

• (For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003)

Click Start > Printers and Faxes.

• (For Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008)

Click (Start) > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.

• (For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2)

Click (Start) > Devices and Printers.

• (For Windows 8)

Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings,

and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers.

• (For Windows Server 2012)

Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings,

and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.

• (For Windows Server 2012 R2)

Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.

2. Right-click the Brother XXX-XXXX icon (where XXXX is your model name), and then select Printer

properties. If printer driver options appear, select your printer driver.

3. Click the General tab, and then click the Printing Preferences... or Preferences... button.

The printer driver dialog box appears.

• To configure the tray settings, click the Device Settings tab.

• To change the printer port, click the Ports tab.

4. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults for all of your Windows programs.

5. Click OK.

6. Close the printer properties dialog box.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Windows)

•Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows)

•Print Settings (Windows)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Change the Default Print Settings

(Windows) > Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows)

Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows)

Access your machine's Properties to auto-detect your machine's Optional Tray and serial number.

The printer driver automatically detects the Optional Tray during the driver installation. If you added the

Optional Tray after the driver installation, follow these steps.

1. Do one of the following:

• (For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003)

Click Start > Printers and Faxes.

• (For Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008)

Click (Start) > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.

• (For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2)

Click (Start) > Devices and Printers.

• (For Windows 8)

Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings,

and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers.

• (For Windows Server 2012)

Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings,

and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.

• (For Windows Server 2012 R2)

Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers.

2. Right-click the Brother XXX-XXXX icon (where XXXX is your model name), and then select Printer

properties. If printer driver options appear, select your printer driver.

3. Select the Device Settings tab.

4. Click the Auto Detect button.

The Optional Tray and the machine's serial number are automatically detected.

5. Click the Apply button.

The Auto Detect function is not available under the following machine conditions:

• The machine power switch is off.

• The machine is in an error state.

• The machine is in a network shared environment.

• The cable is not connected to the machine correctly.

Related Information

•Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer

Driver (PostScript® 3™ Language Emulation) (Windows)

Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript® 3™

Language Emulation) (Windows)

The BR-Script3 printer driver lets you print PostScript® data more clearly.

To install the PS driver (BR-Script3 printer driver), launch Brother's installation CD-ROM, select Custom in

Select Machine section, and then check PS Driver check box.

1. Select the print command in your application.

2. Select Brother XXX-XXXX BR-Script3 (where XXXX is the name of your model), and then click the printing

properties or preferences button.

The printer driver window appears.

3. Click the Layout, Paper/Quality, or Secure Print tab to change basic print settings.

Click the Layout or Paper/Quality tab, and then click the Advanced... button to change advanced print

settings.

4. Click OK.

5. Complete your print operation.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Windows)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your

Computer (Windows)

Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows)

The Status Monitor utility is a configurable software tool for monitoring the status of one or more devices,

allowing you to get immediate notification of errors.

• To display the Status Monitor icon on your task tray, click the button. The (Status Monitor) icon

will appear in the small window. Drag the icon to the task tray.

• Do one of the following:

- Double-click the icon in the task tray.

- (Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7)

Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.

Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click Tools in the left

navigation bar, and then click Status Monitor.

- (Windows 8)

Click (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not

already selected). Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Status Monitor.

- (Windows 8.1)

Move your mouse to the lower left corner of the Start screen and click (if you are using a touch-

based device, swipe up from bottom of the Start screen to bring up the Apps screen). When the Apps

screen appears, tap or click (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your

model name (if not already selected). Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Status

Monitor.

Troubleshooting

Click the Troubleshooting button to access the troubleshooting website.

Visit the Genuine Supplies website

Click the Visit the Genuine Supplies website button for more information on Brother genuine supplies.

When you enable Status Monitor, if you selected Automatic Firmware Update during installation, this

feature will detect and download any updates for your machine.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Windows)

•Printing Problems

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Windows) > Print Settings (Windows)

Print Settings (Windows)

Basic Tab

1. Paper Size

Select the size of the paper you want to use. You can either choose from standard paper sizes or create a

custom paper size.

2. Orientation

Select the orientation (portrait or landscape) of your printout.

If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the application.

3. Copies

Type the number of copies (1-999) that you want to print in this field.

Collate

Select this option to print sets of multi-page documents in the original page order. When this option is

selected, one complete copy of your document will print, and then reprint according to the number of

copies you choose. If this option is not selected, then each page will print according to the number of

copies chosen before the next page of the document is printed.

4. Media Type

Select the type of media you want to use. To achieve the best print results, the machine automatically adjusts

its print settings according to the selected media type.

5. Resolution

Select the print resolution. As print resolution and speed are related, the higher the resolution, the longer it

will take to print the document.

6. Print Settings

Select the type of document you want to print.

Manual Settings...

Specify advanced settings such as brightness, contrast, and other settings.

Graphics

Use Printer Halftone

Select this option to use the printer driver to express halftones.

Brightness

Specify the brightness.

Contrast

Specify the contrast.

Graphics Quality

Select either Graphics or Text for the best print quality, based on the type of document you are

printing.

Improve Gray Printing

Select this option to improve the image quality of shaded areas.

Improve Pattern Printing

Select this option to improve the pattern printing if printed fills and patterns are different from the

fills and patterns you see on your computer screen.

Improve Thin Line

Select this option to improve the image quality of thin lines.

Use System Halftone

Select this option to use Windows to express halftones.

TrueType Mode

Mode

Select how the fonts are processed for printing.

Use Printer TrueType Fonts

Select whether to use built-in fonts for the font processing.

7. Multiple Page

Select this option to print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper or print one page of your document on

multiple sheets.

Page Order

Select the page order when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.

Border Line

Select the type of border to use when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.

8. 2-sided / Booklet

Select this option to print on both sides of the paper or print a document in booklet format using 2-sided

printing.

2-sided Settings button

Click this button to select the type of 2-sided binding. Four types of 2-sided bindings are available for each

orientation.

9. Paper Source

Select the paper source setting according to your print conditions or purpose.

First Page

Select the paper source to use for printing the first page.

Other Pages

Select the paper source to use for printing the second and subsequent pages.

Advanced Tab

1. Scaling

Select these options to enlarge or reduce the size of the pages in your document.

Fit to Paper Size

Select this option to enlarge or reduce the document pages to fit a specified paper size. When you select

this option, select the paper size you want from the drop-down list.

Free

Select this option to enlarge or reduce the document pages manually. When you select this option, type a

value into the field.

2. Reverse Print

Select this option to rotate the printed image 180 degrees.

3. Use Watermark

Select this option to print a logo or text on your document as a watermark. Select one of the preset

watermarks, add a new watermark, or use an image file you have created.

4. Header-Footer Print

Select this option to print the date, time and PC login user name on the document.

5. Toner Save Mode

Select this feature to conserve toner by using less toner to print documents; printouts appear lighter, but are

still legible.

6. Secure Print

This feature ensures that confidential or sensitive documents do not print until you enter a password on the

machine's control panel.

7. Administrator

This feature allows you to change the administrator password and restrict various printing functions.

8. User Authentication

This feature allows you to confirm the restrictions for each user.

9. Other Print Options button

Macro

Select this feature to print an electronic form (macro), which you have stored in your machine's memory,

as an overlay on the print job.

Density Adjustment

Specify the print density.

Improve Print Output

Select this option to reduce the amount of paper curling and improve the toner fixing.

Skip Blank Page

Select this option to allow the printer driver to automatically detect blank pages and exclude them from

printing.

Print Text in Black

Select this option when you want to print color text in black.

Print Archive

Select this option to save the print data as a PDF file to your computer.

Eco settings

Select this option to reduce printing noise.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Windows)

•Print a Document (Windows)

•Print More Than One Page on a Single Sheet of Paper (N in 1) (Windows)

•Print as a Poster (Windows)

•Print on Both Sides of the Paper (Windows)

•Print as a Booklet (Windows)

•Use a Preset Print Profile (Windows)

•Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Mac)

Print from Your Computer (Mac)

•Print a Document (Mac)

•Print on Both Sides of the Paper (Mac)

•Print More Than One Page on a Single Sheet of Paper (N in 1) (Mac)

•Secure Print (Mac)

•Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript® 3™ language

emulation) (Mac)

•Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Mac)

•Print Options (Mac)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Mac) > Print a Document (Mac)

Print a Document (Mac)

1. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray.

2. From an application, such as Apple TextEdit, click the File menu, and then select Print.

3. Select Brother XXX-XXXX (where XXXX is your model name).

4. Type the number of copies you want in the Copies field.

5. Click the Paper Size pop-up menu, and then select your paper size.

6. Select the Orientation option that matches the way you want the document to print.

7. Click the application pop-up menu, and then select Print Settings.

The Print Settings options appear.

8. Click the Media Type pop-up menu, and then select the type of paper you are using.

9. Change other printer settings, if needed.

10. Click Print.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Mac)

•Print Options (Mac)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Mac) > Print on Both Sides of the Paper (Mac)

Print on Both Sides of the Paper (Mac)

• Select Letter, Legal, Mexico Legal, India Legal or Folio sized paper when using the automatic 2-sided

printing function.

• Make sure the back cover is closed.

• If paper is curled, straighten it and put it back in the paper tray.

• Use regular paper or thin paper. DO NOT use bond paper.

• If the paper is too thin, it may wrinkle.

• When you use the manual 2-sided printing function, it is possible there may be paper jams or poor print

quality.

1. From an application, such as Apple TextEdit, click the File menu, and then select Print.

2. Select Brother XXX-XXXX (where XXXX is your model name).

3. Select the Orientation option that matches the way you want the document to print.

4. For automatic 2-sided printing, do the following:

a. Click the application pop-up menu, and then select Layout.

The Layout setting options appear.

b. In the Two-Sided section, select the Short-Edge binding or Long-Edge binding option.

c. Change other printer settings, if needed.

d. Click Print.

5. For manual 2-sided printing, do the following:

a. Click the application pop-up menu, and then select Paper Handling.

The Paper Handling options appear.

b. In the Pages to Print pop-up menu, select Even Only.

c. Change other print settings, if needed.

d. Click the Print button.

e. After the machine prints the even-numbered pages, remove the printed pages from the output paper tray.

f. Make sure the pages are completely flat, and put the paper back in the tray, blank side facing down.

g. Repeat steps 1-3, selecting the same printer and settings you used to print the even-numbered pages.

h. Click the application pop-up menu, and then select Paper Handling. The Paper Handling options

appear.

i. In the Pages to Print pop-up menu, select Odd Only.

j. Click Print.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Mac)

•Print Options (Mac)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Mac) > Print More Than One Page on a Single Sheet of Paper

(N in 1) (Mac)

Print More Than One Page on a Single Sheet of Paper (N in 1) (Mac)

1. From an application, such as Apple TextEdit, click the File menu, and then select Print.

2. Select Brother XXX-XXXX (where XXXX is your model name).

3. Click the application pop-up menu, and then select Layout.

The Layout setting options appear.

4. Click the Pages per Sheet pop-up menu, and then select the number of pages to print on each sheet.

5. Select the Layout Direction option.

6. Click the Border pop-up menu, and then select your border line type.

7. Change other printer settings if needed.

8. Click Print.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Mac)

•Print Options (Mac)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Mac) > Secure Print (Mac)

Secure Print (Mac)

Use Secure Print to ensure that confidential or sensitive documents do not print until you enter a password on

the machine's control panel.

• The secure data is deleted from the machine when you turn off the machine.

1. From an application, such as Apple TextEdit, click the File menu, and then select Print.

2. Select Brother XXX-XXXX (where XXXX is your model name).

3. Click the application pop-up menu, and then select the Secure Print option. The Secure Print options

appear.

4. Select the Secure Print check box.

5. Type your user name, job name and a four-digit password.

6. Click Print.

7. On the machine's control panel, swipe left or right or press d or c to display the [Secure Print] option,

and then press [Secure Print].

8. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display user names, and then press your user name.

The LCD displays the list of secured jobs for your name.

9. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the print job, and then press it.

10. Enter your four-digit password, and then press [OK].

11. Enter the number of copies you want.

12. Press [Start].

The machine prints the data.

After you print the secured data, it will be cleared from the machine's memory.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Mac)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Mac) > Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver

(PostScript® 3™ language emulation) (Mac)

Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript® 3™

language emulation) (Mac)

The BR-Script3 printer driver lets you print PostScript® data more clearly.

• Go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to download

the PS driver (BR-Script3 printer driver).

• Make sure you have added the BR-Script3 printer driver from Print & Scan or Printers & Scanners in the

System Preferences list on your Mac.

1. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray.

2. From an application, such as Apple TextEdit, click the File menu, and then select Print.

3. Select your machine.

4. Type the number of copies you want in the Copies field.

5. Click the Paper Size pop-up menu, and then select your paper size.

6. Select the Orientation option that matches the way you want the document to print.

7. Click the print options pop-up menu, and then click Printer Features.

The Printer Features options appear.

8. Click the Print Quality pop-up menu, and then select the resolution.

9. Click the Media Type pop-up menu, and then select the type of paper you are using.

10. Change other printer settings, if needed.

11. Click Print.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Mac)

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Mac) > Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer

(Mac)

Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Mac)

The Status Monitor utility is a configurable software tool for monitoring the status of a device, allowing you to get

immediate notification of error messages, such as paper empty or paper jam, at preset update intervals. You can

also access Web Based Management.

1. Click the System Preferences menu, select Print & Scan or Printers & Scanners, and then select your

machine.

2. Click the Options & Supplies button.

3. Click the Utility tab, and then click the Open Printer Utility button.

Status Monitor starts.

Troubleshooting

Click the Troubleshooting button to access the troubleshooting website.

Visit the Genuine Supplies website

Click the Visit the Genuine Supplies website button for more information on Brother genuine supplies.

Updating the machine's status

To view the latest machine status while the Status Monitor window is open, click the icon. You can set

the interval at which the software updates machine status information. Click Brother Status Monitor in

the menu bar, and then select Preferences.

Web Based Management (Network Connection Only)

Access the Web Based Management System by clicking the machine icon on the Status Monitor screen.

You can use a standard Web Browser to manage your machine using HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer

Protocol).

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Mac)

•Printing Problems

Home > Print > Print from Your Computer (Mac) > Print Options (Mac)

Print Options (Mac)

Page Setup

1. Paper Size

Select the size of the paper you want to use. You can either choose from standard paper sizes or create a

custom paper size.

2. Orientation

Select the orientation (portrait or landscape) of your printout.

If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the application.

3. Scale

Type a value into the field to enlarge or reduce the pages in your document to fit the selected paper size.

Layout

1. Pages per Sheet

Select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper.

2. Layout Direction

Select the page order when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.

3. Border

Select the type of border to use when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.

4. Two-Sided (Available only for certain models)

Select whether to print on both sides of the paper.

5. Reverse page orientation

Select this option to rotate the printed image 180 degrees.

6. Flip horizontally

Select this option to reverse the printed image on the page horizontally from left to right.

Paper Handling

1. Collate pages

Select this option to print sets of multi-page documents in the original page order. When this option is

selected, one complete copy of your document will print, and then reprint according to the number of copies

you choose. If this option is not selected, then each page will print according to the number of copies chosen

before the next page of the document is printed.

2. Pages to Print

Select which pages you want to print (even pages or odd pages).

3. Page Order

Select the page order.

4. Scale to fit paper size

Select this option to enlarge or reduce the pages in your document to fit the selected paper size.

5. Destination Paper Size

Select the paper size to print on.

6. Scale down only

Select this option if you want to reduce the pages in your document when they are too large for the selected

paper size. If this option is selected and the document is formatted for a paper size that is smaller than the

paper size you are using, the document will be printed at its original size.

Print Settings

1. Media Type

Select the type of media you want to use. To achieve the best print results, the machine automatically adjusts

its print settings according to the selected media type.

2. Print Quality

Select the print resolution you want. Because print quality and speed are related, the higher the quality, the

longer it will take to print the document.

3. Paper Source

Select the paper source setting according to your print conditions or purpose.

4. Advanced

Toner Save Mode

Select this feature to conserve toner by using less toner to print documents; printouts appear lighter, but

are still legible.

Graphics Quality

Select either Graphics or Text for the best print quality, based on the type of document you are printing.

Improve Print Output

Select this option to reduce the amount of paper curling and improve the toner fixing.

Density Adjustment

Specify the print density.

Quiet Mode

Select this option to reduce printing noise.

Other Print Options

Skip Blank Page

Select this option to allow the printer driver to automatically detect blank pages and exclude them from

printing.

Secure Print

1. Secure Print

This feature ensures that confidential or sensitive documents do not print until you enter a password on the

machine's control panel.

Related Information

•Print from Your Computer (Mac)

•Print a Document (Mac)

•Print on Both Sides of the Paper (Mac)

•Print More Than One Page on a Single Sheet of Paper (N in 1) (Mac)

Home > Print > Print One Page Duplicates on Different Types of Paper

Print One Page Duplicates on Different Types of Paper

Use the Carbon Copy function to make multiple copies of the same print data, as if printing on carbon paper.

Send the data to individual paper trays that you pre-loaded with different paper types or colors.

For example, you may want to set the machine to send your print data to Tray1, which you have pre-loaded with

blue colored paper, and then reprint the data in a certain location on the page from the MP Tray, which you have

pre-loaded with yellow colored paper that already contains text.

If you load blue paper in Tray 1 and yellow paper in the MP tray, the printer will automatically feed paper for

Sheet 1 from Tray 1 and Sheet 2 from the MP Tray.

If you enable the Carbon Copy function, the machine will always make copies automatically.

(Windows)

The carbon copy function also allows you to select a different printing macro for each page.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Carbon Menu] > [Carbon Copy] > [On].

2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Copies] option, and then press the [Copies] option.

3. Enter the number of copies you want, and then press [OK].

4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Copy1 Tray] option, and then press the [Copy1 Tray]

option.

5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper tray you want to configure the [Copy1 Tray] option,

and then press the paper tray.

(Windows)

a. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Copy1 Macro] option, and then press the [Copy1

Macro] option.

b. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the ID number of macro you want to use, and then press it.

6. Repeat these steps until you have selected all the tray settings for each copy.

7. Send your print job to the machine.

Related Information

•Print

•Use a Macro from Your Computer (Windows)

Home > Print > Cancel a Print Job

Cancel a Print Job

1. Press .

To cancel multiple print jobs, press and hold for about four seconds.

Related Information

•Print

•Printing Problems

Home > Print > Test Print

Test Print

If there are problems with print quality, follow these instructions to do a test print.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Print Options] > [Test Print] >

[Yes].

2. Press .

Related Information

•Print

•Improve the Print Quality

Home > Scan

Scan

•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine

•Scan from Your Computer (Windows)

•Scan from Your Computer (Mac)

•Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine

Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine

•Scan Photos and Graphics

•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File

•Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive

•Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR)

•Scan to Email Attachment

•Send Scanned Data to an Email Server

•Scan to FTP

•Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP)

•Scan to Network (Windows)

•Scan to SharePoint

•Web Services for Scanning on Your Network (Windows Vista SP2 or greater, Windows 7

and Windows 8)

•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter4 (Windows)

•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter2 (Mac)

•Configure Certificate for Signed PDF

•Disable Scanning from Your Computer

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan Photos and Graphics

Scan Photos and Graphics

Send scanned photos or graphics directly to your computer.

Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent

changes, use Brother's ControlCenter software.

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Scan].

3. Swipe left or right to display [to Image].

4. Press [to Image].

The icon moves to the middle of the touchscreen and is highlighted in blue.

5. Press [to Image].

6. If the machine is connected over the network, swipe up or down or press a or b to display the computer

where you want to send data, and then press the computer name.

If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press

[OK].

7. Do one of the following:

• To change the scan settings, press [Options], and then go to the next step.

• To use the default scan settings, press [Start].

The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen

instructions to complete the scanning job.

To change scan settings, a computer with Brother's Control Center software installed must be connected to

the machine.

8. To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW):

• Press [2-sided Scan], and then select the document type.

Option Description

2-sided Scan: Long Edge

2-sided Scan: Short Edge

9. Select the scan settings you want to change:

•[Scan Settings]

•[Scan Type]

•[Resolution]

•[File Type]

•[Document Size]

•[Brightness]

•[Contrast]

•[ADF Auto Deskew]

•[Skip Blank Page]

•[Remove Background Color]

(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)

To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].

10. Press [OK].

11. Press [Start].

The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen

instructions to complete the scanning job.

Related Information

•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine

•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter4 (Windows)

•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter2 (Mac)

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Save Scanned Data to a Folder as

a PDF File

Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File

Scan documents and save them to a folder on your computer as PDF files.

Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent

changes, use Brother's ControlCenter software.

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Scan].

3. Swipe left or right to display [to File].

4. Press [to File].

The icon moves to the middle of the touchscreen and is highlighted in blue.

5. Press [to File].

6. If the machine is connected over the network, swipe up or down or press a or b to display the computer

where you want to send data, and then press the computer name.

If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press

[OK].

7. Do one of the following:

• To change the scan settings, press [Options], and then go to the next step.

• To use the default scan settings, press [Start].

The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen

instructions to complete the scanning job.

To change scan settings, a computer with Brother's Control Center software installed must be connected to

the machine.

8. To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW):

• Press [2-sided Scan], and then select the document type.

Option Description

2-sided Scan: Long Edge

Option Description

2-sided Scan: Short Edge

9. Select the scan settings you want to change:

•[Scan Settings]

•[Scan Type]

•[Resolution]

•[File Type]

•[Document Size]

•[Brightness]

•[Contrast]

•[ADF Auto Deskew]

•[Skip Blank Page]

•[Remove Background Color]

(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)

To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].

10. Press [OK].

11. Press [Start].

The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen

instructions to complete the scanning job.

Related Information

•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine

•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter4 (Windows)

•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter2 (Mac)

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Save Scanned Data to a USB

Flash Drive

Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive

Scan documents directly to a USB flash drive.

1. Load your document.

2. Insert a USB flash drive into your machine.

The LCD automatically changes.

3. Press [Scan to USB].

4. Do one of the following:

• To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the button you want to change. Follow the

machine's instructions.

- To set your own default settings: after making changes to settings, press the [Set New Default]

option, and then press [Yes].

- To restore the factory settings: press [Factory Reset], and then press [Yes].

• Press [Start] to start scanning without changing additional settings.

5. To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW):

• Press [2-sided Scan], and then select the document type.

Option Description

2-sided Scan: Long Edge

2-sided Scan: Short Edge

6. Select the scan settings you want to change:

•[Scan Type]

•[Resolution]

•[File Type]

•[Document Size]

•[File Name]

•[File Name Style]

•[File Size]

•[Brightness]

•[Contrast]

•[ADF Auto Deskew]

•[Skip Blank Page]

•[Remove Background Color]

(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)

To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].

7. Press [OK].

8. Press [Start].

The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen

instructions to complete the scanning job.

IMPORTANT

The LCD displays a message while reading the data. DO NOT unplug the power cord or remove the USB

flash drive from the machine while it is reading the data. You could lose your data or damage the USB

flash drive.

Related Information

•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to an Editable Text File

(OCR)

Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR)

Your machine can convert characters in a scanned document to text using optical character recognition (OCR)

technology. You can edit this text using your preferred text-editing application.

ABC

• The Scan to OCR feature is available for certain languages.

• Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent

changes, use Brother's ControlCenter software.

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Scan].

3. Swipe left or right to display [to OCR].

4. Press [to OCR].

The icon moves to the middle of the touchscreen and is highlighted in blue.

5. Press [to OCR].

6. If the machine is connected over the network, swipe up or down or press a or b to display the computer

where you want to send data, and then press the computer name.

If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press

[OK].

7. Do one of the following:

• To change the scan settings, press [Options], and then go to the next step.

• To use the default scan settings, press [Start].

The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen

instructions to complete the scanning job.

To change scan settings, a computer with Brother's Control Center software installed must be connected to

the machine.

8. To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW):

• Press [2-sided Scan], and then select the document type.

Option Description

2-sided Scan: Long Edge

2-sided Scan: Short Edge

9. Select the scan settings you want to change:

•[Scan Settings]

•[Scan Type]

•[Resolution]

•[File Type]

•[Document Size]

•[Brightness]

•[Contrast]

•[ADF Auto Deskew]

•[Skip Blank Page]

•[Remove Background Color]

(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)

To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].

10. Press [OK].

11. Press [Start].

The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen

instructions to complete the scanning job.

Related Information

•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine

•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter4 (Windows)

•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter2 (Mac)

100

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to Email Attachment

Scan to Email Attachment

Send a scanned document as an email attachment.

• Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent

changes, use Brother's ControlCenter software.

• The Scan to Email feature does not support Webmail services. Use the Scan to Image or Scan to File

feature to scan a document or a picture, and then attach the scanned file to an email message.

The machine scans to your default email client.

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Scan].

3. Swipe left or right to display [to E-mail].

4. Press [to E-mail].

The icon moves to the middle of the touchscreen and is highlighted in blue.

5. Press [to E-mail].

6. If the machine is connected over the network, swipe up or down or press a or b to display the computer

where you want to send data, and then press the computer name.

If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press

[OK].

7. Do one of the following:

• To change the scan settings, press [Options], and then go to the next step.

• To use the default scan settings, press [Start].

The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen

instructions to complete the scanning job.

To change scan settings, a computer with Brother's Control Center software installed must be connected to

the machine.

8. To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW):

• Press [2-sided Scan], and then select the document type.

101

Option Description

2-sided Scan: Long Edge

2-sided Scan: Short Edge

9. Select the scan settings you want to change:

•[Scan Settings]

•[Scan Type]

•[Resolution]

•[File Type]

•[Document Size]

•[Brightness]

•[Contrast]

•[ADF Auto Deskew]

•[Skip Blank Page]

•[Remove Background Color]

(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)

To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].

10. Press [OK].

11. Press [Start].

The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen

instructions to complete the scanning job.

Related Information

•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine

•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter4 (Windows)

•Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter2 (Mac)

102

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Send Scanned Data to an Email

Server

Send Scanned Data to an Email Server

Send scanned data from your Brother machine directly to your email server, for delivery to an email recipient

without using a computer.

• To send scanned data to an email server, you must configure your machine to communicate with your

network and mail server. You can configure these items from the machine's control panel, Web Based

Management, Remote Setup, or BRAdmin Professional.

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Scan].

3. Swipe left or right to display [to E-mail Server].

4. Press [to E-mail Server].

The icon moves to the middle of the touchscreen and is highlighted in blue.

5. Press [to E-mail Server].

6. Do one of the following to enter the destination email address:

• To enter the email address manually, press [Manual], and then enter the email address using the

keyboard on the LCD. When finished, press [OK].

• If the email address is stored in the machine's address book, press [Address Book], and then select

the email address.

Press [OK].

7. Confirm the email address, and then press [Next].

8. Do one of the following:

• To change the settings, press [Options], and then select the button you want to change. Follow the

machine's instructions.

- To set your own default settings: after making changes to settings, press the [Set New Default]

option, and then press [Yes].

- To restore the factory settings: press [Factory Reset], and then press [Yes].

• Press [Start] to start scanning without changing additional settings.

9. To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW):

• Press [2-sided Scan], and then select the document type.

Option Description

2-sided Scan: Long Edge

103

Option Description

2-sided Scan: Short Edge

10. Select the scan settings you want to change:

•[Scan Type]

•[Resolution]

•[File Type]

•[Document Size]

•[File Name]

•[File Name Style]

•[File Size]

•[Brightness]

•[Contrast]

•[ADF Auto Deskew]

•[Skip Blank Page]

•[Remove Background Color]

(available only for the [Color] and [Gray] options)

To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut].

(This function may not be available depending on your machine conditions.)

11. Press [OK].

12. Press [Start].

The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen

instructions to complete the scanning job.

Related Information

•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine

•How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine

104

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to FTP

Scan to FTP

Scan documents directly to an FTP server when you need to share the scanned information. For added

convenience, configure different profiles to save your favorite Scan to FTP destinations.

•Set up a Scan to FTP Profile

•Upload Scanned Data to an FTP Server

105

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to FTP > Set up a Scan to

FTP Profile

Set up a Scan to FTP Profile

Set up a Scan to FTP Profile to scan and upload the scanned data directly to an FTP location.

We recommend Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0/10.0/11.0 for Windows and Safari 8.0 for Mac. Make sure that

JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled in whichever browser you use. If a different web browser is used,

make sure it is compatible with HTTP 1.0 and HTTP 1.1.

1. Start your web browser.

Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP

address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2

No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then press .

2. Click the Scan tab.

3. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint menu in the left navigation bar.

4. Select the FTP option, and then click Submit.

106

5. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint Profile menu in the left navigation bar.

6. Select the profile you want to set up or change.

7. In the Profile Name field, type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The

machine will display this name on the LCD.

8. In the Host Address field, type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the

IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).

9. In the Username field, type a user name (up to 32 characters) that has permission to write data to the FTP

server.

10. In the Password field, type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in

the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field.

11. In the Store Directory field, type the path to the folder on the FTP server where you want to send your

scanned data. Do not type a slash mark at the beginning of the path (see example).

12. Click the File Name drop-down list, and then select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or

from user-defined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be the file name prefix you

107

select, followed by the last six digits of the flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:

"Estimate_098765.pdf").

13. Click the Quality drop-down list, and then select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the

machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.

14. Click the File Type drop-down list, and then select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If

you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the

scan profile.

15. Click the Document Size drop-down list, and then select your document size from the list. This is necessary

to make sure the scanned file is the correct size.

16. Click the File Size drop-down list, and then select your file size from the list.

17. Click the Remove Background Color drop-down list, and then select the level from the list. You can use this

feature to remove the background color of documents to make the scanned data more legible.

18. Set the Passive Mode option to off or on depending on your FTP server and network firewall configuration.

The default setting is on. In most cases this setting does not need to be changed.

19. Change the Port Number setting used to access the FTP server. The default for this setting is port 21. In

most cases this setting does not need to be changed.

20. Click Submit.

Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.

Related Information

•Scan to FTP

108

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to FTP > Upload Scanned

Data to an FTP Server

Upload Scanned Data to an FTP Server

Share scanned information by saving it to your FTP server.

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Scan].

3. Swipe left or right to display [to FTP/SFTP].

4. Press [to FTP/SFTP].

The icon moves to the middle of the touchscreen and is highlighted in blue.

5. Press [to FTP/SFTP].

6. The FTP and SFTP server profiles you have set up using Web Based Management are listed. Swipe up or

down or press a or b to select one of the FTP server profiles listed, and then press the profile you want. If the

profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality or

file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.

7. Press [Start].

The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen

instructions to complete the scanning job.

Related Information

•Scan to FTP

•How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine

109

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP)

Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP)

Scan documents directly to an SFTP server, a secure version of an FTP server. For added convenience,

configure different profiles to save your favorite Scan to SFTP destinations.

•Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile

•Create a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management

•Export a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management

•Import a Server Public Key Using Web Based Management

•Upload Scanned Data to an SFTP Server

110

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP) > Set up

a Scan to SFTP Profile

Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile

Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile to scan and upload scanned data directly to an SFTP location.

We recommend Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0/10.0/11.0 for Windows and Safari 8.0 for Mac. Make sure that

JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled in whichever browser you use. If a different web browser is used,

make sure it is compatible with HTTP 1.0 and HTTP 1.1.

1. Start your web browser.

Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP

address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2

No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then press .

2. Click the Scan tab.

3. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint menu in the left navigation bar.

4. Select the SFTP option, and then click Submit.

111

5. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint Profile menu in the left navigation bar.

6. Select the profile you want to set up or change.

7. In the Profile Name field, type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The

machine will display this name on the LCD.

8. In the Host Address field, type the Host Address (for example: sftp.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the

IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).

9. In the Username field, type the user name (up to 32 characters) that has permission to write data to the

SFTP server.

10. In the Auth. Method field, select Password or Public Key.

11. Do one of the following:

• When you select Password, type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you

typed in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field.

• When you select Public Key, select the authentication type from the Client Key Pair drop-down list.

12. Select the authentication type from the Server Public Key drop-down list.

112

13. In the Store Directory field, type the path to the folder on the SFTP server where you want to send your

scanned data. Do not type a slash mark at the beginning of the path (see example).

14. Click the File Name drop-down list, and then select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or

from user-defined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be the file name prefix you

select, followed by the last six digits of the flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:

"Estimate_098765.pdf").

15. Click the Quality drop-down list, and then select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the

machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.

16. Click the File Type drop-down list, and then select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If

you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the

scan profile.

17. Click the Document Size drop-down list, and then select your document size from the list. This is necessary

to make sure the scanned file is the correct size.

18. Click the File Size drop-down list, and then select your file size from the list.

19. Click the Remove Background Color drop-down list, and then select the level from the list. You can use this

feature to remove the background color of documents to make the scanned data more legible.

20. You can change the Port Number setting used to access the SFTP server. The default for this setting is port

22. In most cases this setting does not need to be changed.

21. Click Submit.

Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.

Related Information

•Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP)

113

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SSH FTP

(SFTP) > Create a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management

Create a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such

as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.

- For example:

http://SharedPrinter

If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.

- For example:

http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx

The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.

• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor

screen.

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click the Security tab.

6. Click Client Key Pair in the left navigation bar.

7. Click Create New Client Key Pair.

8. In the Client Key Pair Name field, type the name (up to 20 characters) you want.

9. Click the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list, and then select the algorithm you want.

10. Click Submit.

The client key pair is created and saved in your machine's memory. The client key pair name and public key

algorithm will be displayed in the Client Key Pair List.

Related Information

•Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP)

114

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP) > Export

a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management

Export a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such

as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.

- For example:

http://SharedPrinter

If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.

- For example:

http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx

The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.

• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor

screen.

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click the Security tab.

6. Click Client Key Pair in the left navigation bar.

7. Click Export Public Key shown with Client Key Pair List.

8. Click Submit.

9. Specify the location where you want to save the file.

The client key pair is exported to your computer.

Related Information

•Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP)

115

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP) > Import

a Server Public Key Using Web Based Management

Import a Server Public Key Using Web Based Management

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such

as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.

- For example:

http://SharedPrinter

If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.

- For example:

http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx

The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.

• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor

screen.

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click the Security tab.

6. Click Server Public Key in the left navigation bar.

7. Click Import Server Public Key.

8. Specify the file that you want to import.

9. Click Submit.

The server public key is imported to your machine.

Related Information

•Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP)

116

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SSH FTP

(SFTP) > Upload Scanned Data to an SFTP Server

Upload Scanned Data to an SFTP Server

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Scan].

3. Swipe left or right to display [to FTP/SFTP].

4. Press [to FTP/SFTP].

The icon moves to the middle of the touchscreen and is highlighted in blue.

5. Press [to FTP/SFTP].

6. The FTP and SFTP server profiles you have set up using Web Based Management are listed. Swipe up or

down or press a or b to select one of the SFTP server profiles listed, and then press the profile you want. If

the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality

or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.

7. Press [Start].

The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen

instructions to complete the scanning job.

Related Information

•Scan to SSH FTP (SFTP)

117

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to Network (Windows)

Scan to Network (Windows)

Scan documents directly to a CIFS server on your local network. For added convenience, you can configure

different profiles to save your favorite Scan to Network destinations.

•Set up a Scan to Network Profile

•Upload Scanned Data to a CIFS Server

118

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to Network (Windows) > Set

up a Scan to Network Profile

Set up a Scan to Network Profile

Set up a Scan to Network Profile to scan and upload scanned data directly to a folder on a CIFS server.

We recommend Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0/10.0/11.0 for Windows. Make sure that JavaScript and Cookies

are always enabled in whichever browser you use. If a different web browser is used, make sure it is compatible

with HTTP 1.0 and HTTP 1.1.

1. Start your web browser.

Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP

address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2

No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then press .

2. Click the Scan tab.

3. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint menu in the left navigation bar.

4. Select the Network option, and then click Submit.

119

5. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint Profile menu in the left navigation bar.

6. Select the profile you want to set up or change.

7. In the Profile Name field, type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The

machine will display this name on the LCD.

8. In the Network Folder Path field, type the path to the folder on the CIFS server where you want to send your

scanned data.

9. Click the File Name drop-down list, and then select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or

from user-defined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be the file name prefix you

select, followed by the last six digits of the flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:

"Estimate_098765.pdf").

10. Click the Quality drop-down list, and then select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the

machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.

11. Click the File Type drop-down list, and then select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If

you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the

scan profile.

12. Click the Document Size drop-down list, and then select your document size from the list. This is necessary

to make sure the scanned file is the correct size.

13. Click the File Size drop-down list, and then select your file size from the list.

14. Click the Remove Background Color drop-down list, and then select the level from the list. You can use this

feature to remove the background color of documents to make the scanned data more legible.

15. To PIN-protect this profile, in the Use PIN for Authentication field, select On.

16. If you selected On for the Use PIN for Authentication field, type a four-digit PIN in the PIN Code field.

17. To set your authentication method, select Auto, Kerberos, or NTLMv2 from the Auth. Method menu.

18. In the Username field, type a user name (up to 96 characters) that has permission to write data to the folder

specified in the Network Folder Path field. If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one

of the following styles:

user@domain

domain\user

19. In the Password field, type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in

the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field.

20. To set the Kerberos Server Address manually, in the Kerberos Server Address field, type the Kerberos

Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters).

21. Click Submit.

Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.

22. You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server) or you must set the date, time and time zone

correctly on the control panel for all authentication methods. The time must match the time used by the

Kerberos Server and CIFS Server.

Related Information

•Scan to Network (Windows)

•Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management

120

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to Network (Windows) > Set

up a Scan to Network Profile > Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management

Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management

Make sure the date and time and the time zone settings are set correctly using Web Based Management or the

control panel, so the machine's time matches the time being used by the server providing authentication.

Ignore step 1, if you already have a Web Based Management window open.

1. Start your web browser.

Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP

address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2

No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then press .

2. Click the Administrator tab.

3. Click the Date&Time menu in the left navigation bar.

4. In the Date fields, enter the date.

5. Select the clock type from the Clock Type field (available only for some countries).

6. In the Time fields, enter the time.

7. Select the time difference between your location and UTC from the Time Zone drop-down list, for example,

the time zone for Eastern time in the USA and Canada is UTC-05:00.

8. In the Auto Daylight field, click On to set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Saving Time. It

will reset itself forward one hour in the spring, and back one hour in the fall (available only for some

countries).

9. Click Submit.

Related Information

•Set up a Scan to Network Profile

121

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to Network

(Windows) > Upload Scanned Data to a CIFS Server

Upload Scanned Data to a CIFS Server

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Scan].

3. Swipe left or right to display [to Network].

4. Press [to Network].

The icon moves to the middle of the touchscreen and is highlighted in blue.

5. Press [to Network].

6. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select one of the network server profiles listed, and then press the profile

you want. If the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or

if the quality or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.

7. Press [Start].

The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen

instructions to complete the scanning job.

Related Information

•Scan to Network (Windows)

122

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SharePoint

Scan to SharePoint

Scan documents directly to a SharePoint server when you need to share the scanned information. For added

convenience, configure different profiles to save your favorite Scan to SharePoint destinations.

•Set up a Scan to SharePoint Profile

•Upload Scanned Data to a SharePoint Server

123

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SharePoint > Set up a

Scan to SharePoint Profile

Set up a Scan to SharePoint Profile

Set up a Scan to SharePoint Profile to scan and upload the scanned data directly to a SharePoint location.

We recommend Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0/10.0/11.0 for Windows and Safari 8.0 for Mac. Make sure that

JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled in whichever browser you use. If a different web browser is used,

make sure it is compatible with HTTP 1.0 and HTTP 1.1.

1. Start your web browser.

Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP

address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2

No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then press .

2. Click the Scan tab.

3. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint menu in the left navigation bar.

4. Select the SharePoint option, and then click Submit.

124

5. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint Profile menu in the left navigation bar.

6. Select the profile you want to set up or change.

7. In the Profile Name field, type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The

machine will display this name on the LCD.

8. In the SharePoint Site Address field, Copy and Paste the full destination address shown in the address bar

of your browser (for example: http://SharePointSiteAddress/Shared%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx) or

the IP address (for example: http://192.168.0.1/Shared%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx).

9. Click the File Name drop-down list, and then select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or

from user-defined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be the file name prefix you

select, followed by the last six digits of the flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:

"Estimate_098765.pdf").

10. Click the Quality drop-down list, and then select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the

machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.

11. Click the File Type drop-down list, and then select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If

you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the

scan profile.

125

12. Click the Document Size drop-down list, and then select your document size from the list. This is necessary

to make sure the scanned file is the correct size.

13. Click the File Size drop-down list, and then select your file size from the list.

14. Click the Remove Background Color drop-down list, and then select the level from the list. You can use this

feature to remove the background color of documents to make the scanned data more legible.

15. To PIN-protect this profile, in the Use PIN for Authentication field, select On.

16. If you selected On for the Use PIN for Authentication field, type a four-digit PIN in the PIN Code field.

17. To set your authentication method, select Auto, NTLMv2, Kerberos, or Basic from the Auth. Method menu.

If you choose Auto, the authentication method will be detected automatically.

18. In the Username field, type the user name (up to 96 characters) that has permission to write data to the

folder specified in the SharePoint Site Address field. If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user

name in one of the following styles:

user@domain

domain\user

19. In the Password field, type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in

the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field.

20. To set the Kerberos Server Address manually, in the Kerberos Server Address field, type the Kerberos

Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters).

21. Click Submit.

Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.

Related Information

•Scan to SharePoint

126

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Scan to SharePoint > Upload

Scanned Data to a SharePoint Server

Upload Scanned Data to a SharePoint Server

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Scan].

3. Swipe left or right to display [to SharePoint].

4. Press [to SharePoint].

The icon moves to the middle of the touchscreen and is highlighted in blue.

5. Press [to SharePoint].

6. The SharePoint server profiles you have set up using Web Based Management are listed. Swipe up or down

or press a or b to select one of the SharePoint server profiles listed, and then press the profile you want. If

the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality

or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.

7. Press [Start].

The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen

instructions to complete the scanning job.

Related Information

•Scan to SharePoint

127

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Web Services for Scanning on

Your Network (Windows Vista SP2 or greater, Windows 7 and Windows 8)

Web Services for Scanning on Your Network (Windows Vista SP2 or

greater, Windows 7 and Windows 8)

The Web Services protocol enables Windows Vista (SP2 or greater), Windows 7 and Windows 8 users to scan

using a Brother machine on the network. You must install the driver via Web Services.

•Use Web Services to Install Drivers Used for Scanning (Windows Vista, Windows 7 and

Windows 8)

•Scan Using Web Services from the Brother Machine (Windows Vista SP2 or greater,

Windows 7 and Windows 8)

•Configure Scan Settings for Web Services

128

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Web Services for Scanning on

Your Network (Windows Vista SP2 or greater, Windows 7 and Windows 8) > Use Web Services to Install

Drivers Used for Scanning (Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 8)

Use Web Services to Install Drivers Used for Scanning (Windows Vista,

Windows 7 and Windows 8)

Use Web Services to monitor printers on the network.

• Make sure you have installed the Brother software and drivers.

• Verify that the host computer and the Brother machine are on the same subnet, or that the router is

correctly configured to pass data between the two devices.

• You must configure the IP address on your Brother machine before you configure this setting.

• For Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2, you must install Print

Services.

1. Do one of the following:

• (Windows Vista)

Click (Start) > Network.

The machine's Web Services Name appears with the printer icon.

Right-click the machine you want to install.

• (Windows 7)

Click (Start) > Control Panel > Network and Internet > View network computers and devices.

The machine's Web Services Name appears with the printer icon.

Right-click the machine you want to install.

• (Windows 8)

Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings >

Change PC settings > Devices > Add a device.

The machine's Web Services Name appears.

• (Windows 8.1)

Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings >

Change PC settings > PC and devices > Devices > Add a device.

The machine's Web Services Name appears.

• The Web Services Name for the Brother machine is your model name and the MAC Address (Ethernet

Address) of your machine (for example, Brother MFC-XXXX (model name) [XXXXXXXXXXXX] (MAC

Address / Ethernet Address)).

• (Windows 8)

Move your mouse over the machine name to display the machine's information.

2. Do one of the following:

• (Windows Vista/Windows 7)

Click Install in the machine's drop-down menu.

• (Windows 8)

Select the machine you want to install.

To uninstall drivers, click Uninstall or (Remove device).

129

Related Information

•Web Services for Scanning on Your Network (Windows Vista SP2 or greater, Windows 7 and Windows 8)

130

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Web Services for Scanning on

Your Network (Windows Vista SP2 or greater, Windows 7 and Windows 8) > Scan Using Web Services from

the Brother Machine (Windows Vista SP2 or greater, Windows 7 and Windows 8)

Scan Using Web Services from the Brother Machine (Windows Vista

SP2 or greater, Windows 7 and Windows 8)

If you have installed the driver for scanning via Web Services, you can access the Web Services scanning menu

on your Brother machine's LCD.

Certain characters in the messages displayed on the LCD may be replaced with spaces if the language

settings of your OS and your Brother machine are different.

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Scan].

3. Swipe left or right to display [WS Scan].

4. Press [WS Scan].

The icon moves to the middle of the touchscreen and is highlighted in blue.

5. Press [WS Scan].

6. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the scan options, and then press the type of scan.

7. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the computer name where you want to send data, and then press

the computer name.

8. Press [Start].

The machine starts scanning.

If you are requested to select a scanning application, select Windows Fax and Scan or Windows Photo Gallery

from the list.

Related Information

•Web Services for Scanning on Your Network (Windows Vista SP2 or greater, Windows 7 and Windows 8)

131

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Web Services for Scanning on

Your Network (Windows Vista SP2 or greater, Windows 7 and Windows 8) > Configure Scan Settings for Web

Services

Configure Scan Settings for Web Services

1. Do one of the following:

• (Windows Vista)

Click (Start) > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Scanners and Cameras.

• (Windows 7)

Click (Start) > Devices and Printers.

• (Windows 8)

Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings,

and then click Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers.

2. Do one of the following:

• (Windows Vista)

Click your machine, and then click the Scan Profiles button. The Scan Profiles dialog box appears.

• (Windows 7 and Windows 8)

Right-click the machine icon, and then select Scan profiles.... The Scan Profiles dialog box appears.

3. Select the scan profile you want to use.

4. Make sure the scanner selected in the Scanner list is a Brother machine that supports Web Services for

scanning, and then click the Set as Default button.

5. Click Edit....

The Edit Default Profile dialog box appears.

6. Select the Source, Paper size, Color format, File type, Resolution (DPI), Brightness and Contrast

settings.

7. Click the Save Profile button.

These settings will be applied when you scan using the Web Services protocol.

If you are requested to select a scanning application, select Windows Fax and Scan or Windows Photo Gallery

from the list.

Related Information

•Web Services for Scanning on Your Network (Windows Vista SP2 or greater, Windows 7 and Windows 8)

132

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Change Scan Button Settings from

ControlCenter4 (Windows)

Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter4 (Windows)

1. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.

2. Click the Device Settings tab.

3. Click the Device Scan Settings button.

The Device Scan Settings dialog box appears.

4. Click the tab for the Scan to action you want to change (Image, OCR, E-mail, or File).

5. Change the settings as needed.

6. Click OK.

Each tab represents one of the scanning destinations, as outlined in the table below.

Change your Scan to settings by clicking on the corresponding tab and customizing the setting you want.

Tab Name Corresponding Feature

Image Scan to Image

OCR Scan to OCR

E-mail Scan to Email

File Scan to File

133

Settings Applicable Features

Image OCR E-mail File

File Type Yes Yes Yes Yes

Target Application Yes Yes - -

OCR Language - Yes - -

File Name Yes Yes Yes Yes

Destination Folder Yes Yes Yes Yes

Show Folder - - - Yes

File size Yes - Yes Yes

Resolution Yes Yes Yes Yes

Scan Type Yes Yes Yes Yes

Document Size Yes Yes Yes Yes

Brightness Yes Yes Yes Yes

Contrast Yes Yes Yes Yes

ID Card Scan Yes Yes Yes Yes

Default Yes Yes Yes Yes

File Type

Select the file type you want to use for the scanned data.

Target Application

Select the destination application from the drop-down list.

OCR Language

Set the OCR language to match the language of the scanned document's text.

File Name

Click Change to change the file name's prefix.

Destination Folder

Click the folder icon to browse and select the folder where you want to save your scanned documents.

Show Folder

Select this option to automatically display the destination folder after scanning.

File size

Adjust the data compression ratio of the scanned image. Change the file size by moving the File size slider to

the right or left.

Resolution

Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution drop-down list. Higher resolutions take more memory and

transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.

Scan Type

Select from a range of scan color depths.

•Auto

Use for any type of document. This mode automatically picks an appropriate color depth for the

document.

•Black & White

Use for text or line art images.

•Gray (Error Diffusion)

Use for photographic images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating simulated gray

images without using true gray dots. Black dots are put in a specific pattern to give a gray appearance.)

134

•True Gray

Use for photographic images or graphics. This mode is more accurate because it uses up to 256

shades of gray.

•24bit Color

Use to create an image with the most accurate color reproduction. This mode uses up to 16.8 million

colors to scan the image, but it requires the most memory and has the longest transfer time.

Document Size

Select the exact size of your document from the Document Size drop-down list.

• If you select 1 to 2 (A4), the scanned image will be divided into two A5-size documents.

Brightness

Set the Brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the

scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too dark,

set a higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value into the field to set the

Brightness level.

Contrast

Increase or decrease the Contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasizes dark

and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in gray areas. You can also type a value

into the field to set the Contrast level.

ID Card Scan

Select this check box to scan both sides of an identification card onto one page.

Default

Select this option to restore all settings to their factory setting values.

Related Information

•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine

•Scan Photos and Graphics

•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File

•Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR)

•Scan to Email Attachment

135

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Change Scan Button Settings from

ControlCenter2 (Mac)

Change Scan Button Settings from ControlCenter2 (Mac)

1. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the

(ControlCenter) icon.

The ControlCenter2 screen appears.

2. Hold the control key on your keyboard and click the scan destination (Image, OCR, E-mail, or File) whose

settings you want to change.

3. Click the Device Button tab.

The settings for the scan destination that you selected appear.

The following example shows the Scan to Image settings.

136

Each tab corresponds to a scan feature, as described below.

These settings can be changed.

Button Name Corresponding Feature

Image Scan to Image

OCR Scan to OCR

E-mail Scan to Email

File Scan to File

Settings Applicable Features

Image OCR E-mail File

Target Application/E-mail Application Yes Yes Yes -

File Type Yes Yes Yes Yes

File size Yes - Yes Yes

OCR Language - Yes - -

Destination File Path Yes Yes Yes -

File Name Yes Yes Yes Yes

Insert Date in File Name Yes Yes Yes Yes

Destination Folder Yes Yes Yes Yes

Show Folder - - - Yes

Resolution Yes Yes Yes Yes

Scan Type Yes Yes Yes Yes

Document Size Yes Yes Yes Yes

ID Card Scan Yes Yes Yes Yes

Advanced Settings Yes Yes Yes Yes

Restore Defaults Yes Yes Yes Yes

Target Application/E-mail Application

Select which application is used to open scanned data. Only applications installed on your computer can be

selected.

•Add

Add an application to the pop-up menu.

Type the application name in the Application Name field (up to 30 characters) and select your

preferred application by clicking the Browse button. Select the File Type option from the pop-up menu.

•Delete

Delete an application you have added to the pop-up menu.

Select the application from the Application Name pop-up menu, and then click Delete.

File Type

Select the file type you want to use for the scanned data.

File size

Change the file size by moving the File size slider to the right or left.

OCR Language

Set the OCR language to match the language of the scanned document's text.

Destination File Path

Click the Change button to change the prefix of the file name and the path of the destination folder.

137

File Name

Type a prefix for your file name, if needed.

Insert Date in File Name

Automatically insert the date in the file name of the scanned image.

Destination Folder

Click Browse to select the folder where you would like to save your scanned document.

Show Folder

Select the Show Folder option to automatically display the destination folder after scanning.

Resolution

Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution pop-up menu. Higher resolutions take more memory and

transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.

Scan Type

Select from a range of scan color depths.

•Black & White

Use for text or line art images.

•Gray (Error Diffusion)

Use for photographic images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating simulated gray

images without using true gray dots. Black dots are put in a specific pattern to give a gray appearance.)

•True Gray

Use for photographic images or graphics. This mode is more accurate because it uses up to 256

shades of gray.

•24bit Color

Use to create an image with the most accurate color reproduction. This mode uses up to 16.8 million

colors to scan the image, but it requires the most memory and has the longest transfer time.

•Auto

Use for any type of document. This mode automatically picks an appropriate color depth for the

document.

Document Size

Select the exact size of your document from the Document Size pop-up menu.

• If you select 1 to 2 (A4), the scanned image will be divided into two A5-size documents.

ID Card Scan

Select this check box to scan both sides of an identification card onto one page.

Advanced Settings

Configure advanced settings by clicking the Advanced Settings button in the Scan Settings dialog box.

•Brightness

Set the Brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the

scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is

too dark, set a higher brightness level and scan the document again.

•Contrast

Increase or decrease the Contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasize

dark and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in gray areas.

•ADF Auto Deskew

When scanning the document from the ADF, the machine corrects skewing of the document

automatically.

•Remove Background Color

Remove the base color of documents to make the scanned data more recognizable. When you use this

function, select from three settings: high, medium, and low.

138

(Available only for the Auto, True Gray and 24bit Color options)

•Skip Blank Page

Remove blank pages of the document from the scanning results.

(MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW)

•Display Scanning Results

Show the numbers of total pages saved and blank pages skipped on your computer screen.

(MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW)

Restore Defaults

Select this option to restore all settings to their factory setting values.

Related Information

•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine

•Scan Photos and Graphics

•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File

•Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR)

•Scan to Email Attachment

139

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Configure Certificate for Signed

PDF

Configure Certificate for Signed PDF

If you select Signed PDF for Scan to USB, Scan to Email server, Scan to FTP, Scan to SFTP, Scan to Network or

Scan to SharePoint features, you must configure a certificate on your machine using Web Based Management.

To use Signed PDF, you must install a certificate on your machine and your computer.

1. Start your web browser.

Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP

address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2

No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then press .

2. Click the Administrator tab.

3. Click the Signed PDF menu in the left navigation bar.

The Signed PDF configuration dialog box appears.

4. Click the Select the Certificate drop-down list, and then select the certificate.

5. Click Submit.

Related Information

•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine

140

Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine > Disable Scanning from Your

Computer

Disable Scanning from Your Computer

You can disable the ability to scan from your computer. Set the pull scan setting using Web Based Management.

1. Start your web browser.

Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP

address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2

No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then press .

2. Click the Scan tab.

3. Click the Scan from PC menu in the left navigation bar.

4. In the Pull Scan field, click Disabled.

5. Click Submit.

Related Information

•Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Brother Machine

141

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows)

Scan from Your Computer (Windows)

There are several ways you can use your computer to scan photos and documents on your Brother machine.

Use the software applications provided by Brother, or use your favorite scanning application.

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

•Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other Windows Applications

•Scan Using Windows Photo Gallery or Windows Fax and Scan

142

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode

(Windows)

Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

Use ControlCenter4 Home Mode to access your machine's main features.

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode

(Windows)

•Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode

(Windows)

•Scan Settings for ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

143

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode

(Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

Select Home Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.

1. Load your document.

2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.

3. Click the Scan tab.

4. Select the Document Type.

5. Change the document's Scan Size, if needed.

6. Click (Scan).

The machine starts scanning, and the scanned image appears in the image viewer.

7. Click the left or right arrow buttons to preview each scanned page.

8. Crop the scanned image, if needed.

9. Do one of the following:

• Click (Save) to save scanned data.

• Click (Print) to print scanned data.

• Click (Open with an Application) to open scanned data in another application.

• Click (Send E-mail) to attach scanned data to an email.

• Click (OCR) to convert your scanned document to an editable text file. (available only for certain

models)

144

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

•Select Document Type Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

•Change Scan Size Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

•Crop a Scanned Image Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

•Print Scanned Data Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

•Scan to an Application Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

145

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode

(Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows) > Select Document Type Using

ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

Select Document Type Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

• Select the Document Type option that matches the type of original you want to scan.

Option Description

Photo 600 x 600 dpi 24bit Color

Text and Graph 300 x 300 dpi 24bit Color

Monochrome Text 200 x 200 dpi Black & White

Custom 300 x 300 dpi (24bit Color as default) Select the scan settings you want from the

Custom Settings button.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

•Custom Scan Settings (Windows)

146

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode

(Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows) > Select Document Type Using

ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows) > Custom Scan Settings (Windows)

Custom Scan Settings (Windows)

Select Custom in the Document Type list to change advanced scan settings.

• Select Custom, and then click the Custom Settings button.

The Custom Scan Settings dialog box appears.

You can change the following settings:

Resolution

Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution drop-down list. Higher resolutions take more memory

and transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.

Scan Type

Select from a range of scan color depths.

-Auto

Use for any type of document. This mode automatically picks an appropriate color depth for the

document.

-Black & White

Use for text or line art images.

-Gray (Error Diffusion)

Use for photographic images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating simulated gray

images without using true gray dots. Black dots are put in a specific pattern to give a gray

appearance.)

-True Gray

Use for photographic images or graphics. This mode is more accurate because it uses up to 256

shades of gray.

-24bit Color

Use to create an image with the most accurate color reproduction. This mode uses up to 16.8

million colors to scan the image, but it requires the most memory and has the longest transfer time.

147

Brightness

Set the Brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the

scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too

dark, set a higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value into the field to

set the Brightness level.

Contrast

Increase or decrease the Contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasizes

dark and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in gray areas. You can also type a

value into the field to set the Contrast level.

Continuous Scanning

Select this option to scan multiple pages from the scanner glass or ADF (Available only for certain

models). After a page is scanned, select either continue scanning or finish. Use this method to scan more

pages than the maximum ADF capacity.

2-sided Scanning

Select this check box to scan both sides of the document. When using the Automatic 2-sided Scan

feature, you must select the Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option, depending on the layout

of your original, to make sure the data file you create appears correctly.

(MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW)

ID Card Scan

Select this check box to scan both sides of an identification card onto one page.

Advanced Settings

Configure advanced settings by clicking the Advanced Settings button in the Scan Settings dialog box.

-Remove Background Color

Remove the base color of documents to make the scanned data more legible. Choose from three

settings: high, medium, and low.

(available only for the Auto, True Gray and 24bit Color options)

-Skip Blank Page

Remove the document's blank pages from the scanning results.

(MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW)

-Display Scanning Results

Show the numbers of total pages saved and blank pages skipped on your computer screen.

(MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW)

-ADF Auto Deskew

When scanning the document from the ADF, the machine corrects skewing of the document

automatically.

Related Information

•Select Document Type Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

148

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode

(Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows) > Change Scan Size Using ControlCenter4

Home Mode (Windows)

Change Scan Size Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

For faster scan speeds, select the exact size of your document from the Scan Size drop-down menu.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

149

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode

(Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows) > Crop a Scanned Image Using

ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

Crop a Scanned Image Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

The crop tool on the Image Editing Toolbar lets you trim unwanted areas from your scanned image. Use the

Zoom In and Zoom Out tools to help view the image to be cropped.

Image Editing Toolbar

1. Restart

Cancels all the edits applied to the selected image. The edited image returns to its original state.

2. Fit to Window

Displays the scanned image so that the entire image fits in the window.

3. Zoom In

Zooms in on the scanned image.

4. Zoom Out

Zooms out of the scanned image.

5. Crop and Edit

Removes the outer parts of the image. Click the Crop and Edit button, and then change the frame to contain

the area you want to keep after cropping.

6. Page Counter

Indicates the page number of the scanned page currently shown in the image viewer. To display a different

page, select the desired page number from the drop-down page number list.

If you have scanned multiple pages, you can see the next or previous scanned page by clicking the left or

right arrow buttons in the preview window.

1. Scan a document.

2. Click (Crop and Edit) to edit the scanned image.

The Crop and Edit - ControlCenter4 window appears.

150

a. Expands the scanned image so that the entire image fits in the window.

b. Zooms in on the image.

c. Zooms out of the image.

d. Rotates the image counter-clockwise 90 degrees.

e. Rotates the image clockwise 90 degrees.

f. Click and drag the frame to adjust the area to be cropped.

3. Click OK.

The edited image appears in the image viewer.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

151

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode

(Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows) > Print Scanned Data Using ControlCenter4

Home Mode (Windows)

Print Scanned Data Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

Scan a document on your Brother machine, and then print copies using the printer driver features that are

available in ControlCenter4.

1. Scan a document.

2. Click Print.

a. Shows which images are currently selected, and how many copies of each image will print.

b. Click the Properties button to change specific printer settings.

c. Select the Paper Size, Media Type and Layout options. The current settings are enclosed in a blue

square.

3. Configure the print settings, and then click the Start Printing button.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

152

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode

(Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows) > Scan to an Application Using

ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

Scan to an Application Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

The Open with an Application button lets you scan an image directly into your graphics application for editing.

Select Home Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.

1. Load your document.

2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.

3. Click the Scan tab.

4. Select the Document Type.

5. Change the size of your document, if needed.

6. Click (Scan).

The machine starts scanning, and the scanned image appears in the image viewer.

7. Click the left or right arrow buttons to preview each scanned page.

8. Crop the scanned image, if needed.

9. Click the Open with an Application button.

10. Select the application from the drop-down list, and then click OK.

The image opens in the application you have selected.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

153

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode

(Windows) > Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter4

Home Mode (Windows)

Select Home Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.

1. Load your document.

2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.

3. Click the Scan tab.

4. Select the Document Type.

5. Change the size of your document, if needed.

6. Click (Scan).

The machine starts scanning, and the scanned image appears in the image viewer.

7. Click the left or right arrow buttons to preview each scanned page.

8. Click Save.

The Save dialog box appears.

9. Click the File Type drop-down list, and then select a PDF file.

154

To save the document as a password-protected PDF, select Secure PDF Single-Page (*.pdf) or Secure

PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf) from the File Type drop-down list, click , and then type the password.

10. To change the file name, click the Change button, if needed.

11. Click the folder icon to browse and select the folder where you want to save your scanned documents.

12. Click OK.

The scanned document is saved to the destination folder as a PDF.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

155

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode

(Windows) > Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter4

Home Mode (Windows)

Select Home Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.

1. Load documents in the ADF.

To scan both sides of a document automatically, you must use the ADF, not the flatbed scanner glass.

2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.

3. Click the Scan tab.

4. Under Document Type, select Custom, and then click the Custom Settings button.

The Custom Scan Settings dialog box appears.

5. Select the 2-sided Scanning check box.

6. Select the Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option, depending on the Original layout (see table for

layout examples).

2-sided Scan setting Original layout Scan Result

Long-edge binding

156

2-sided Scan setting Original layout Scan Result

Short-edge binding

7. Configure other Custom Scan Settings, if needed.

8. Click OK.

9. Click (Scan).

The machine starts scanning, and the scanned image appears in the image viewer.

10. Click the left or right arrow buttons to preview each scanned page.

11. Do one of the following:

• Click (Save) to save scanned data.

• Click (Print) to print scanned data.

• Click (Open with an Application) to open scanned data in another application.

• Click (Send E-mail) to attach scanned data to an email.

• Click (OCR) to convert your scanned document to an editable text file. (available only for certain

models)

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

157

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode

(Windows) > Scan Settings for ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

Scan Settings for ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

Settings Applicable Features

Open with an Application OCR Send E-mail Save

File Type - Yes Yes Yes

Target Application Yes Yes - -

OCR Language - Yes - -

File Name - - - Yes

Scan Location - - - Yes

Show Folder - - - Yes

File size - - Yes Yes

File Type

Select the file type you want to use for the scanned data.

For Send E-mail and Save

•Windows Bitmap (*.bmp)

•JPEG (*.jpg) (recommended for most users when scanning pictures)

•TIFF Single-Page (*.tif)

•TIFF Multi-Page (*.tif)

•Portable Network Graphics (*.webp)

•PDF Single-Page (*.pdf) (recommended for scanning and sharing documents)

•PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf) (recommended for scanning and sharing documents)

•PDF/A Single-Page (*.pdf) (recommended for scanning and sharing documents)

•PDF/A Multi-Page (*.pdf) (recommended for scanning and sharing documents)

•High Compression PDF Single-Page (*.pdf)

•High Compression PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf)

•Secure PDF Single-Page (*.pdf)

•Secure PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf)

•Searchable PDF Single-Page (*.pdf)

•Searchable PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf)

•XML Paper Specification (*.xps) (the XML Paper Specification is available for Windows Vista, Windows 7

and Windows 8, and when using applications that support XML Paper Specification files)

•Microsoft Office Word (*.docx) (Available only for certain models)

•Microsoft Office PowerPoint (*.pptx) (Available only for certain models)

For OCR

•HTML 3.2 (*.htm)

•HTML 4.0 (*.htm)

•Microsoft Excel 2003, XP (*.xls)

•RTF Word 2000 (*.rtf)

•WordPad (*.rtf)

•WordPerfect 9, 10 (*.wpd)

•Text (*.txt)

•Searchable PDF Single-Page (*.pdf)

•Searchable PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf)

158

Target Application

Select the destination application from the drop-down list.

OCR Language

Set the optical character recognition (OCR) language to match the language of the scanned document's text.

File Name

Click Change to change the file name's prefix.

Scan Location

Select the Folder or SharePoint button to specify the destination where you would like to save your scanned

documents.

Show Folder

Select this option to automatically display the destination folder after scanning.

File size

Adjust the data compression ratio of the scanned image. Change the file size by moving the File size slider to

the right or left.

Custom Settings

Select the Custom option, click the Custom Settings button, and then change settings.

Scan Size

Select the exact size of your document from the Scan Size drop-down menu.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

159

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode

(Windows)

Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode gives you more control over the details of your machine's features and allows

you to customize one-button scan actions.

•Scan Photos and Graphics Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode

(Windows)

•Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode

(Windows)

•Scan Both Sides of an ID Card Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

•Scan to Email Attachment Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

•Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

•Scan Settings for ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

160

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode

(Windows) > Scan Photos and Graphics Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

Scan Photos and Graphics Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode

(Windows)

Send scanned photos or graphics directly to your computer.

Select Advanced Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.

1. Load your document.

2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.

3. Click the Scan tab.

4. Click the Image button.

The scan settings dialog box appears.

161

5. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, destination file path, resolution and color, if needed.

• To change the file name, click Change.

• To change Destination Folder, click the folder icon.

• To preview and configure the scanned image, select the PreScan check box.

6. Click Scan.

The machine starts scanning. The image opens in the application you have selected.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

162

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode

(Windows) > Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter4

Advanced Mode (Windows)

Scan documents and save them to a folder on your computer as PDF files.

Select Advanced Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.

1. Load your document.

2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.

3. Click the Scan tab.

163

4. Click the File button.

The scan settings dialog box appears.

5. Click the File Type drop-down list, and then select a PDF file.

To save the document as a password-protected PDF, select Secure PDF Single-Page (*.pdf) or Secure

PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf) from the File Type drop-down list, click , and then type the password..

6. Click the folder icon to browse and select the folder where you want to save your scanned documents.

7. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, resolution and color, if needed.

To preview and configure the scanned image, select the PreScan check box.

8. Click Scan.

The machine starts scanning. The file is saved in the folder you selected.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

164

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode

(Windows) > Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode

(Windows)

Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter4

Advanced Mode (Windows)

Select Advanced Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.

1. Load documents in the ADF.

To scan both sides of a document automatically, you must use the ADF, not the flatbed scanner glass.

2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.

3. Click the Scan tab.

4. Click the button for the setting you want to change (Image, OCR, E-mail, or File).

The scan settings dialog box appears.

5. Select the 2-sided Scanning check box.

6. Select the Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option, depending on the Original layout (see table for

layout examples).

2-sided Scan setting Original layout Scan Result

Long-edge binding

165

2-sided Scan setting Original layout Scan Result

Short-edge binding

7. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, destination file path, resolution and color, if needed.

• To change the file name, click Change.

• To change Destination Folder, click the folder icon.

8. Click Scan.

The machine starts scanning.

You have now changed the default settings for your selected Scan to action. These settings will be used the next

time one of the scan options (Image, OCR, E-mail, or File) is selected for this action.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

166

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode

(Windows) > Scan Both Sides of an ID Card Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

Scan Both Sides of an ID Card Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode

(Windows)

Select Advanced Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.

1. Place an ID card on the scanner glass.

2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.

3. Click the Scan tab.

167

4. Click the File button.

The scan settings dialog box appears.

5. Select the ID Card Scan check box.

The instruction dialog box appears.

6. Read the instructions on the screen, and then press OK.

7. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, scan location, resolution and color, if needed.

8. Click Scan.

The machine starts scanning one side of the identification card.

9. After the machine has scanned one side, turn over the identification card, and then click Continue to scan

the other side.

10. Click Finish.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

168

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode

(Windows) > Scan to Email Attachment Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

Scan to Email Attachment Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode

(Windows)

Send a scanned document as an email attachment.

• Select Advanced Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.

• The Scan to Email feature does not support Webmail services. Use the Scan to Image or Scan to File

feature to scan a document or a picture, and then attach the scanned file to an email message.

The machine scans to your default email client.

1. Load your document.

2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.

3. Click the Scan tab.

4. Click the E-mail button.

The scan settings dialog box appears.

169

5. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, destination file path, resolution and color, if needed.

• To change the file name, click Change.

• To change Destination Folder, click the folder icon.

• To preview and configure the scanned image, select the PreScan check box.

6. Click Scan.

The machine starts scanning. Your default email application opens and the scanned image is attached to a

new, blank email message.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

170

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode

(Windows) > Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) Using ControlCenter4 Advanced

Mode (Windows)

Your machine can convert characters in a scanned document to text using optical character recognition (OCR)

technology. You can edit this text using your preferred text-editing application.

ABC

• Select Advanced Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.

1. Load your document.

2. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.

3. Click the Scan tab.

4. Click the OCR button.

The scan settings dialog box appears.

171

5. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, destination file path, resolution and color, if needed.

• To change the file name, click Change.

• To change Destination Folder, click the folder icon.

• To preview and configure the scanned image, select the PreScan check box.

6. Click Scan.

The machine scans the document, converts it to editable text, and then sends it to your default word

processing application.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

172

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode

(Windows) > Scan Settings for ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

Scan Settings for ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

Settings Applicable Features

Image OCR E-mail File

File Type Yes Yes Yes Yes

Target Application Yes Yes - -

OCR Language - Yes - -

File Name Yes Yes Yes Yes

Scan Location or Destination Folder Yes Yes Yes Yes

Show Folder - - - Yes

Show Save As Window - - - Yes

File size Yes - Yes Yes

PreScan Yes Yes Yes Yes

Resolution Yes Yes Yes Yes

Scan Type Yes Yes Yes Yes

Document Size Yes Yes Yes Yes

Brightness Yes Yes Yes Yes

Contrast Yes Yes Yes Yes

Continuous Scanning Yes Yes Yes Yes

2-sided Scanning Yes Yes Yes Yes

ID Card Scan Yes Yes Yes Yes

Advanced Settings Yes Yes Yes Yes

Default Yes Yes Yes Yes

File Type

Select the file type you want to use for the scanned data.

For Image, Email and File

•Windows Bitmap (*.bmp)

•JPEG (*.jpg) (recommended for most users when scanning pictures)

•TIFF Single-Page (*.tif)

•TIFF Multi-Page (*.tif)

•Portable Network Graphics (*.webp)

•PDF Single-Page (*.pdf) (recommended for scanning and sharing documents)

•PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf) (recommended for scanning and sharing documents)

•PDF/A Single-Page (*.pdf) (recommended for scanning and sharing documents)

•PDF/A Multi-Page (*.pdf) (recommended for scanning and sharing documents)

•High Compression PDF Single-Page (*.pdf)

•High Compression PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf)

•Secure PDF Single-Page (*.pdf)

•Secure PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf)

•Searchable PDF Single-Page (*.pdf)

•Searchable PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf)

173

•XML Paper Specification (*.xps) (the XML Paper Specification is available for Windows Vista, Windows 7

and Windows 8, and when using applications that support XML Paper Specification files)

•Microsoft Office Word (*.docx) (Available only for certain models)

•Microsoft Office PowerPoint (*.pptx) (Available only for certain models)

For OCR

•HTML 3.2 (*.htm)

•HTML 4.0 (*.htm)

•Microsoft Excel 2003, XP (*.xls)

•RTF Word 2000 (*.rtf)

•WordPad (*.rtf)

•WordPerfect 9, 10 (*.wpd)

•Text (*.txt)

•Searchable PDF Single-Page (*.pdf)

•Searchable PDF Multi-Page (*.pdf)

Target Application

Select the destination application from the drop-down list.

OCR Language

Set the OCR language to match the language of the scanned document's text.

File Name

Click Change to change the file name's prefix.

Scan Location

Select the Folder or SharePoint button to specify the destination where you would like to save your scanned

documents.

Destination Folder

Click the folder icon to browse and select the folder where you want to save your scanned documents.

Show Folder

Select this option to automatically display the destination folder after scanning.

Show Save As Window

Select this option if you want to specify the scanned image's destination every time you scan.

File size

Adjust the data compression ratio of the scanned image. Change the file size by moving the File size slider to

the right or left.

PreScan

Select PreScan to preview your image and crop unwanted portions before scanning.

Resolution

Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution drop-down list. Higher resolutions take more memory and

transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.

Scan Type

Select from a range of scan color depths.

•Auto

Use for any type of document. This mode automatically picks an appropriate color depth for the

document.

•Black & White

Use for text or line art images.

174

•Gray (Error Diffusion)

Use for photographic images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating simulated gray

images without using true gray dots. Black dots are put in a specific pattern to give a gray appearance.)

•True Gray

Use for photographic images or graphics. This mode is more accurate because it uses up to 256

shades of gray.

•24bit Color

Use to create an image with the most accurate color reproduction. This mode uses up to 16.8 million

colors to scan the image, but it requires the most memory and has the longest transfer time.

Document Size

Select the exact size of your document from the Document Size drop-down list.

• If you select 1 to 2 (A4), the scanned image will be divided into two A5-size documents.

Brightness

Set the Brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the

scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too dark,

set a higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value into the field to set the

Brightness level.

Contrast

Increase or decrease the Contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasizes dark

and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in gray areas. You can also type a value

into the field to set the Contrast level.

Continuous Scanning

Select this option to scan multiple pages from the scanner glass or ADF (Available only for certain models).

After a page is scanned, select either continue scanning or finish. Use this method to scan more pages than

the maximum ADF capacity.

2-sided Scanning

Select this check box to scan both sides of the document. When using the Automatic 2-sided Scan feature,

you must select the Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option, depending on the layout of your

original, to make sure the data file you create appears correctly.

(MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW)

ID Card Scan

Select this check box to scan both sides of an identification card onto one page.

Advanced Settings

Configure advanced settings by clicking the Advanced Settings button in the Scan Settings dialog box.

•Remove Background Color

Remove the base color of documents to make the scanned data more legible. Choose from three

settings: high, medium, and low.

(available only for the Auto, True Gray and 24bit Color options)

•Skip Blank Page

Remove the document's blank pages from the scanning results.

(MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW)

•Display Scanning Results

Show the numbers of total pages saved and blank pages skipped on your computer screen.

(MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW)

•ADF Auto Deskew

When scanning the document from the ADF, the machine corrects skewing of the document

automatically.

175

Default

Select this option to restore all settings to their factory setting values.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

176

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other

Windows Applications

Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other Windows Applications

You can use the Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE application for scanning.

• To download the Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE application, click (Brother Utilities), select Do More in

the left navigation bar, and then click PaperPort.

• Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE supports Windows XP Home (SP3 or greater), Windows XP Professional 32-

bit (SP3 or greater), Windows Vista (SP2 or greater), Windows 7, Windows 8 and Windows 8.1.

• For detailed instructions on using each application, click the application's Help menu, and then click

Getting Started Guide in the Help ribbon.

The instructions for scanning in these steps are for PaperPort™ 14SE. For other Windows applications, the

steps will be similar. PaperPort™ 14SE supports both TWAIN and WIA drivers; the TWAIN driver

(recommended) is used in these steps.

1. Load your document.

2. Start PaperPort™ 14SE.

Do one of the following:

• (Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7)

Using your computer, click (Start) > All Programs > Nuance PaperPort 14 > PaperPort.

• (Windows 8)

Click (PaperPort).

3. Click the Desktop menu, and then click Scan Settings in the Desktop ribbon.

The Scan or Get Photo panel appears on the left side of the screen.

4. Click Select.

5. From the available Scanners list, select TWAIN: TW-Brother XXX-XXXX or TWAIN: TW-Brother XXX-XXXX

LAN (where MFC-XXXX is the model name of your machine). If you want to use the WIA driver, select the

Brother driver that has "WIA" as the prefix.

6. Select the Display scanner dialog box check box in the Scan or Get Photo panel.

7. Click Scan.

The Scanner Setup dialog box appears.

177

8. Adjust the settings in the Scanner Setup dialog box, if needed.

9. Click the Document Size drop-down list, and then select your document size.

To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW):

Automatic 2-sided scan is available only when using the ADF.

You cannot use PreScan to preview an image.

10. Click PreScan if you want to preview your image and crop unwanted portions before scanning.

11. Click Start.

The machine starts scanning.

Related Information

•Scan from Your Computer (Windows)

•TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows)

178

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other

Windows Applications > TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows)

TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows)

• Note that the item names and assignable values will vary depending on the machine.

• The Brightness option is available only when selecting the Black & White, Gray (Error Diffusion),

True Gray, or 24bit Color options from the Scan Type settings.

• The Contrast option is available only when selecting the Gray (Error Diffusion), True Gray, or 24bit

Color options from the Scan Type settings.

1. Scan

Select the Photo, Web, or Text option depending on the type of document you want to scan.

Scan (Image Type) Resolution Scan Type

Photo Use for scanning photo images. 300 x 300 dpi 24bit Color

Web Use for attaching the scanned

image to web pages.

100 x 100 dpi 24bit Color

Text Use for scanning text

documents.

200 x 200 dpi Black & White

2. Resolution

Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution drop-down list. Higher resolutions take more memory and

transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.

3. Scan Type

Select from a range of scan color depths.

•Black & White

Use for text or line art images.

•Gray (Error Diffusion)

Use for photographic images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating simulated gray

images without using true gray dots. Black dots are put in a specific pattern to give a gray

appearance.)

•True Gray

Use for photographic images or graphics. This mode is more accurate because it uses up to 256

shades of gray.

179

•24bit Color

Use to create an image with the most accurate color reproduction. This mode uses up to 16.8 million

colors to scan the image, but it requires the most memory and has the longest transfer time.

4. 2-sided Scanning

Scan both sides of the document. When using the Automatic 2-sided Scan feature, you must select the

Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option from the 2-sided Scanning drop-down list, so when you

turn the pages, they are facing the way you want.

(MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW)

5. Brightness

Set the Brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the

scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too

dark, set a higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value in the field to set

the brightness level.

6. Contrast

Increase or decrease the Contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasizes dark

and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in gray areas. You can also type a value

in the field to set the contrast level.

7. Document Size

Select the exact size of your document from a selection of preset scan sizes.

If you select Custom, the Custom Document Size dialog box appears and you can specify the document

size.

8. Advanced Settings

Configure advanced settings by clicking the Advanced Settings button in the Scan Settings dialog box.

•Paper Detection

-ADF Auto Deskew

Set the machine to correct document skewing automatically as the pages are scanned from the ADF.

-Skip Blank Page

Remove the document's blank pages from the scanning results.

(MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW)

•Image Quality

-Reduce Noise

Improve and enhance the quality of your scanned images with this selection. The Reduce Noise

option is available when selecting the 24bit Color option and the 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, or

600 x 600 dpi scan resolution.

-Remove Background Color

180

Remove the base color of documents to make the scanned data more legible. Choose from three

levels.

Related Information

•Scan Using Nuance™ PaperPort™ 14SE or Other Windows Applications

181

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Windows Photo Gallery or Windows

Fax and Scan

Scan Using Windows Photo Gallery or Windows Fax and Scan

Windows Photo Gallery or Windows Fax and Scan applications are other options that you can use for scanning.

• These applications use the WIA scanner driver.

• If you want to crop a portion of a page after pre-scanning the document, you must scan using the scanner

glass (also called the flatbed).

1. Load your document.

2. Launch your scanning application. Do one of the following:

• (Windows Photo Gallery)

Click File > Import from Camera or Scanner.

• (Windows Fax and Scan)

Click File > New > Scan.

3. Select the scanner you want to use.

4. Click Import or OK.

The New Scan dialog box appears.

5. Adjust the settings in the Scanner Setup dialog box, if needed.

The scanner resolution can be set to a maximum of 1200 dpi. If you want to scan at higher resolutions, use

the Scanner Utility software of Brother Utilities.

If your machine supports 2-sided Scan and you want to scan both sides of your document, select Feeder

(Scan both sides) as Source.

6. Click Scan.

The machine starts scanning the document.

Related Information

•Scan from Your Computer (Windows)

•WIA Driver Settings (Windows)

182

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows) > Scan Using Windows Photo Gallery or Windows

Fax and Scan > WIA Driver Settings (Windows)

WIA Driver Settings (Windows)

Paper source

Select the Document Feeder or Flatbed option from the drop-down list.

Picture Type (Image Type)

Select Color picture, Grayscale picture, Black and white picture or text, or Custom Settings for the type

of document you want to scan.

To change advanced settings, click the Adjust the quality of the scanned picture link.

Page size

The Page size option is available if you select the Document Feeder as the Paper source option.

Brightness

Set the Brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the

scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too dark,

set a higher brightness level and scan the document again.

Contrast

Increase or decrease the Contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasizes dark

and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in gray areas. You can also type a value in

the field to set the contrast level.

Resolution (DPI)

Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution (DPI) list. Higher resolutions take more memory and

transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.

183

Related Information

•Scan Using Windows Photo Gallery or Windows Fax and Scan

184

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac)

Scan from Your Computer (Mac)

There are several ways you can use your Mac to scan photos and documents on your Brother machine. Use the

software applications provided by Brother or your favorite scanning application.

•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

•Scan Using TWAIN-Compliant Applications (Mac)

185

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

Use Brother's ControlCenter software to scan photos and save them as JPEGs, PDFs, or other file formats.

•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

•Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

•Scan Both Sides of an ID Card Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

•Scan to Email Attachment Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

•Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

186

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) > Scan Using

ControlCenter2 (Mac)

Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

Send scanned photos or graphics directly to your computer.

1. Load your document.

2. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the

(ControlCenter) icon.

The ControlCenter2 screen appears.

3. Click the SCAN tab.

4. Click the Image button.

The scan settings dialog box appears.

187

5. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, destination file path, resolution and color, if needed.

To change the file name or destination file path, click Change.

6. Click the Start Scanning button.

The machine starts scanning. The scanned image opens in the application you have selected.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

188

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) > Save Scanned

Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter2

(Mac)

1. Load your document.

2. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the

(ControlCenter) icon.

The ControlCenter2 screen appears.

3. Click the SCAN tab.

4. Click the File button.

The scan settings dialog box appears.

189

5. Click the File Type pop-up menu, and then select PDF (*.pdf).

To save the document as a password-protected PDF, select Secure PDF (*.pdf) from the File Type pop-up

menu, type your password in the Password and Re-type Password fields, and then click OK.

6. Change the scan settings, such as file name, destination folder, resolution and color, if needed.

7. Click the Start Scanning button.

The machine starts scanning. The file will be saved in the folder you selected.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

190

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) > Scan Both Sides of

a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter2

(Mac)

1. Load documents in the ADF.

To scan both sides of a document automatically, you must use the ADF, not the flatbed scanner glass.

2. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the

(ControlCenter) icon.

The ControlCenter2 screen appears.

3. Click the SCAN tab.

4. Click the scan type button (Image, OCR, E-mail, or File) you want to use.

The scan settings dialog box appears.

5. Select the 2-sided Scanning check box.

6. Select the Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option, depending on the Original layout (see table for

layout examples).

2-sided Scan setting Original layout Scan Result

Long-edge binding

Short-edge binding

7. Configure other settings, if needed.

8. Click the Start Scanning button.

The machine starts scanning.

You have now changed the default settings for your selected Scan to action. These settings will be used the next

time this scan type (Image, OCR, E-mail, or File) is clicked for this action.

191

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

192

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) > Scan Both Sides of

an ID Card Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

Scan Both Sides of an ID Card Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

1. Place an ID card on the scanner glass.

2. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the

(ControlCenter) icon.

The ControlCenter2 screen appears.

3. Click the SCAN tab.

4. Click the File button.

The scan settings dialog box appears.

193

5. Select the ID Card Scan check box.

The instruction dialog box appears.

6. Read the instructions on the screen, and then press OK.

7. Configure other settings, if needed.

8. Click the Start Scanning button.

The machine starts scanning one side of the identification card.

9. After the machine has scanned one side, turn over the identification card, and then click Continue to scan

the other side.

10. Click Finish.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

194

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) > Scan to Email

Attachment Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

Scan to Email Attachment Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

Send a scanned document as an email attachment.

The Scan to Email feature does not support Webmail services. Use the Scan to Image or Scan to File feature

to scan a document or a picture, and then attach the scanned file to an email message.

1. Load your document.

2. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the

(ControlCenter) icon.

The ControlCenter2 screen appears.

3. Click the SCAN tab.

4. Click the E-mail button.

The scan settings dialog box appears.

195

5. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, destination file path, resolution and color, if needed.

To change the file name or destination file path, click Change.

6. Click the Start Scanning button.

The machine starts scanning. Your default email application opens and the scanned image is attached to a

new, blank email.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

196

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac) > Scan to an Editable

Text File (OCR) Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

Your machine can convert characters in a scanned document to text using optical character recognition (OCR)

technology. You can edit this text using your preferred text-editing application.

ABC

•The Scan to OCR feature is available for certain languages.

1. Load your document.

2. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the

(ControlCenter) icon.

The ControlCenter2 screen appears.

3. Click the SCAN tab.

4. Click the OCR button.

The scan settings dialog box appears.

197

5. Change the scan settings, such as file format, file name, destination file path, resolution and color, if needed.

To change the file name or destination file path, click Change.

6. Click the Start Scanning button.

The machine scans the document, converts it to editable text, and then sends it to your default word

processing application.

Related Information

•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

198

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using TWAIN-Compliant Applications (Mac)

Scan Using TWAIN-Compliant Applications (Mac)

You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant applications. For more information about the scanning procedure, see

the manual for your application.

To use Brother TWAIN Driver, go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at

support.brother.com and download Scanner Driver.

1. Start your graphics application, and then select the scan operation.

The scanner setup dialog box appears.

2. Change the scan settings, such as Resolution, Scan Type, or Adjust Image, if needed.

3. Click the Document Size pop-up menu, and then select your document size.

4. Click the PreScan option to preview your image and crop unwanted portions before scanning.

• After you select a document size, adjust the scanning area by holding down the mouse button and

dragging your mouse pointer over the portion you want to scan.

• To scan both sides of the document:

Automatic 2-sided scan is available only when using the ADF.

You cannot adjust the scanning area.

You cannot use PreScan to preview an image.

5. Click Start.

The machine starts scanning.

Related Information

•Scan from Your Computer (Mac)

•TWAIN Driver Settings (Mac)

199

Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac) > Scan Using TWAIN-Compliant Applications

(Mac) > TWAIN Driver Settings (Mac)

TWAIN Driver Settings (Mac)

• Item names and assignable values will vary depending on the machine.

• The Contrast setting is available only when selecting Gray (Error Diffusion), True Gray, or 24bit

Color from the Scan Type options.

1. Resolution

Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution pop-up menu. Higher resolutions take more memory and

transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.

2. Scan Type

Select from a range of scan color depths.

•Black & White

Use for text or line art images.

•Gray (Error Diffusion)

Use for photographic images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating simulated gray

images without using true gray dots. Black dots are put in a specific pattern to give a gray

appearance.)

•True Gray

Use for photographic images or graphics. This mode is more accurate because it uses up to 256

shades of gray.

•24bit Color

Use to create an image with the most accurate color reproduction. This mode uses up to 16.8 million

colors to scan the image, but it requires the most memory and has the longest transfer time.

3. Document Size

Select the exact size of your document from a selection of preset scan sizes.

• If you select Custom, you can specify the document size.

4. Adjust Image

Click the Adjust Image button to adjust other image qualities.

200

Brightness

Set the Brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the

scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too

dark, set a higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value in the box to

set the brightness.

Contrast

Increase or decrease the Contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasizes

dark and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in gray areas. You can also type a

value in the box to set the contrast.

Reduce Noise

Improve and enhance the quality of your scanned images with this selection. The Reduce Noise option is

available when selecting the 24bit Color option and the 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, or 600 x 600 dpi

scan resolutions.

5. 2-sided Scanning

If you select this check box, the machine scans both sides of the document. When using the Automatic 2-

sided Scan feature, you must select the Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option, depending on

the layout of your original, to make sure the created data file appears correctly.

(Available only for certain models)

Related Information

•Scan Using TWAIN-Compliant Applications (Mac)

201

Home > Scan > Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management

Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management

•Set the Scan File Name Using Web Based Management

•Set the Scan Job Email Report Using Web Based Management

202

Home > Scan > Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management > Set the Scan File Name Using

Web Based Management

Set the Scan File Name Using Web Based Management

Set up a file name for scanned data using Web Based Management.

1. Start your web browser.

Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP

address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2

No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then press .

2. Click the Scan tab.

3. Click the Scan File Name menu in the left navigation bar.

4. Select the File Name Style from the drop-down list.

5. If you selected the option to include the date in File Name Style field, select the Date format from the drop-

down list.

6. In the Time fields, select On to include the time information in the file name.

7. In the Counter field, select Continuous or Reset after each job.

When you select Reset after each job, duplication of file names may occur.

8. If you want to create a user-defined file name prefix, type a file name in the user-defined fields of each scan

function.

Using the following characters: ?, /, \, or * may cause a sending error.

9. Click Submit.

Related Information

•Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management

203

Home > Scan > Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management > Set the Scan Job Email Report

Using Web Based Management

Set the Scan Job Email Report Using Web Based Management

When you scan a document, the machine will send a scan job email report automatically to the registered email

address.

1. Start your web browser.

Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the IP

address of the machine or the print server name). For example: http://192.168.1.2

No password is required by default. If you have previously set a password, type it, and then press .

2. Click the Scan tab.

3. Click the Scan Job e-mail report menu in the left navigation bar.

4. In the Administrator Address field, type the email address.

5. For the scan functions you want, select On to send a scan job email report.

6. Click Submit.

Related Information

•Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management

204

Home > Copy

Copy

•Copy a Document

•Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images

•Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature

•Sort Copies

•Copy an ID Card

•Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided Copy)

•Copy Options

205

Home > Copy > Copy a Document

Copy a Document

1. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray.

2. Do one of the following:

• Place the document face up in the ADF.

(If you are copying multiple pages, we recommend using the ADF.)

• Place the document face down on the scanner glass.

3. Press [Copy].

The LCD displays:

4. Change the copy settings, if needed.

• (Number of copies)

206

Enter the number of copies in one of the following ways:

- Press or on the LCD.

- Press the numbers on the control panel.

•[Options]

Press to change the copy settings for the next copy only.

- When finished, press [OK].

- After you have finished choosing new options, you can save them by pressing the [Save as

Shortcut] button.

•[Quick Copy]

Press to access the preset copy settings.

• Current setting indications

Press the following icons to change these settings for the next copy only.

- [Enlarge/Reduce]

- [2-sided Copy]

- [Density]

- [Tray Use]

5. Press [Start].

To stop copying, press .

Related Information

•Copy

207

Home > Copy > Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images

Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images

Select an enlargement or reduction ratio to resize your copied data.

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Copy].

3. Enter the number of copies.

4. Press [Options] > [Enlarge/Reduce].

5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available options, and then press the option you want.

6. Do one of the following:

• If you select [Enlarge] or [Reduce], press the enlargement or reduction ratio you want to use.

• If you select [Custom(25-400%)], press (backspace) to erase the displayed percentage, or press

d to move the cursor, and then enter an enlargement or reduction ratio from [25] to [400].

Press [OK].

• If you selected [100%] or [Auto], go to the next step.

•[Auto] sets the machine to calculate the reduction ratio that best fits the size of paper.

•[Auto] is only available when using the ADF.

7. When finished, press [OK].

8. Press [Start].

Related Information

•Copy

208

Home > Copy > Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature

Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature

The N in 1 copy feature saves paper by copying two or four pages of your document onto one page of the copy.

If you are copying from the ADF, insert the documents face up in the direction as shown below:

• 2 in 1 (Portrait)

• 2 in 1 (Landscape)

• 4 in 1 (Portrait)

• 4 in 1 (Landscape)

If you are copying from the scanner glass, place the document face down in the direction as shown

below:

• 2 in 1 (Portrait)

• 2 in 1 (Landscape)

• 4 in 1 (Portrait)

• 4 in 1 (Landscape)

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Copy].

209

3. Enter the number of copies.

4. Press [Options] > [Page Layout].

5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [2in1(Portrait)], [2in1(Landscape)],

[4in1(Portrait)] or [4in1(Landscape)] option, and then press the option you want.

6. When finished, press [OK].

7. Press [Start].

If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.

8. If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document:

• Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page.

• After scanning all the pages, press [Finish].

Related Information

•Copy

210

Home > Copy > Sort Copies

Sort Copies

Sort multiple copies. Pages will be stacked in the order they are fed, that is: 1, 2, 3, and so on.

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Copy].

3. Enter the number of copies.

4. Press [Options] > [Stack/Sort] > [Sort].

5. When finished, press [OK].

6. Press [Start].

If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.

7. If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document:

• Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page.

• After scanning all the pages, press [Finish].

Related Information

•Copy

211

Home > Copy > Copy an ID Card

Copy an ID Card

Use the [2 in 1 ID Copy] feature to copy both sides of an identification card onto one page, keeping the

original card size.

• You may copy an identification card only to the extent permitted under applicable laws. For more detailed

information, see the Product Safety Guide.

1. Place your identification card face down near the upper left corner of the scanner glass.

1: Distance 0.16 in. (4.0 mm) or greater (top, left)

2. Swipe left or right or press d or c to display the [2 in 1 ID Copy] option, and then press [2 in 1 ID

Copy].

3. Enter the number of copies.

4. Press [Start].

The machine scans one side of the identification card.

5. After the machine has scanned the first side, turn over the identification card.

6. Press [Continue] to scan the other side.

Related Information

•Copy

212

Home > Copy > Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided Copy)

Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided Copy)

Reduce the amount of paper you use by copying onto both sides of the paper.

• You must choose a 2-sided copy layout from the following options before you can start 2-sided copying.

• The layout of your original document determines which 2-sided copy layout you should choose.

• To use the automatic 2-sided copy feature, you must load your document in the ADF.

• When you manually make 2 sided copies from a 2-sided document, use the scanner glass.

• Select Letter, Legal, Mexico Legal, India Legal or Folio sized paper when using the 2‑sided copy option.

Portrait

2–sided to 2–sided

1–sided to 2–sided (Long Edge Flip)

1–sided to 2–sided (Short Edge Flip)

Landscape

2–sided to 2–sided

1–sided to 2–sided (Long Edge Flip)

1–sided to 2–sided (Short Edge Flip)

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Copy].

3. Enter the number of copies.

4. Press [Options] > [2-sided Copy].

213

5. Do one of the following:

• (MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW)

To make 2-sided copies of a 2-sided document automatically, press [2-sided⇒2-sided].

Load your document in the ADF to use the automatic 2-sided copy feature.

• To make 2-sided copies from a 1-sided document, follow these steps:

a. To change the layout options, press [Layout], and then press [Long Edge Flip] or [Short

Edge Flip].

b. Press [1-sided⇒2-sided].

6. When finished, press [OK].

7. Press [Start].

If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.

8. If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document:

• For a 2-sided document, turn the sheet over along the long edge to scan the other side.

• Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page.

• After scanning all the pages, press [Finish].

Related Information

•Copy

214

Home > Copy > Copy Options

Copy Options

To change Copy settings, press [Options].

Menu selections Options

Quality Select the copy quality for your type of document.

Enlarge/Reduce 100% -

Enlarge Select an enlargement ratio for the

next copy.

Reduce Select a reduction ratio for the next

copy.

Auto Adjusts the copy size to fit on the

paper size you have set.

Custom(25-400%) Enter an enlargement or reduction

ratio.

Density Increase the density to make the text darker.

Decrease the density to make the text lighter.

Contrast Increase the contrast to make an image clearer.

Decrease the contrast to make an image more subdued.

Stack/Sort Select to stack or sort multiple copies.

Stack

Sort

Page Layout Make N in 1 or 2 in 1 ID copies.

4 in1

215

Menu selections Options

2-sided Copy Select to copy on both sides of the paper.

1-sided → 2-sided

2-sided → 2-sided

The available options will vary depending on your model.

2-sided Copy Page Layout

(available only for certain settings)

Select long edge binding or short edge binding.

Tray Use Select a paper tray for the next copy.

Save as Shortcut Add the current settings as a shortcut.

Related Information

•Copy

216

Home > Fax

Fax

•Send a Fax

•Receive a Fax

•Voice Operations and Fax Numbers

•Telephone Services and External Devices

•Fax Reports

•PC-FAX

217

Home > Fax > Send a Fax

Send a Fax

•Send a Fax

•Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF

•Send a Fax Manually

•Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation

•Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)

•Send a Fax in Real Time

•Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)

•Add a Cover Page to Your Fax

•Cancel a Fax in Progress

•Check and Cancel a Pending Fax

•Fax Options

218

Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax

Send a Fax

1. Do one of the following:

• Place the document face up in the ADF.

(If you are faxing multiple pages, we recommend using the ADF.)

• Place the document face down on the scanner glass.

2. Press [Fax].

3. Enter the fax number.

•Using the dial pad

Press the digits to enter the fax number.

•Using the Address Book

Press [Address Book], and then do one of the following:

- Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want, and then press it.

- Press [Search:], and then enter the name and press [OK]. Press the name you want to dial.

When finished, press [Apply].

•Using the call history

219

Press [Call History], and then press the [Outgoing Call] option.

Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the fax number you want, and then press it.

To send a fax, press [Apply].

4. Press [Fax Start].

The machine scans and sends the document.

If you placed the document on the scanner glass, follow the instructions in the table.

Option Description

Yes To scan the next page, press the Yes option, and then place the next page on the scanner glass.

Press OK to scan the page.

No After you have scanned the last page, press the No option.

The machine sends the document.

To stop faxing, press , and then press .

Related Information

•Send a Fax

220

Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF

Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF

You must select a 2-sided scanning format before sending a 2-sided fax. Select either Long Edge or Short Edge,

depending on the layout of your document.

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Fax] > [Options] > [2-sided Fax].

3. Do one of the following:

• If your document is flipped on the Long edge, press the [2-sided Scan: Long Edge] option.

• If your document is flipped on the Short edge, press the [2-sided Scan: Short Edge] option.

4. Press [OK].

5. Enter the fax number.

6. Press [Fax Start].

Related Information

•Send a Fax

221

Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax Manually

Send a Fax Manually

Manual fax transmission lets you hear the dialing, ringing and fax-receiving tones while sending a fax.

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Fax].

3. Press [Hook] and listen for a dial tone.

4. Dial the fax number you want to call.

5. When you hear the fax tone, press [Fax Start].

• If you are using the scanner glass, press [Send].

Related Information

•Send a Fax

222

Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation

Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation

At the end of a conversation, you can send a fax to the other party before you both hang up.

1. Ask the other party to wait for fax tones (beeps) and then to press the Start or Send key before hanging up.

2. Load your document.

3. Press [Fax Start].

• If you are using the scanner glass, press [Send].

4. Replace the handset of an external telephone.

Related Information

•Send a Fax

223

Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)

Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)

Use the Broadcasting feature to send the same fax to multiple fax numbers at the same time.

• The same broadcast can include Groups, Address Book numbers (One Touch Dial numbers and Speed

Dial numbers in some models) and up to 50 manually dialed numbers.

• Touchscreen LCD models

If you did not use any of the Address Book numbers for Groups, you can broadcast faxes to as many as

350 different numbers.

• Address Book numbers (One Touch Dial numbers and Speed Dial numbers in some models) must be

stored in the machine’s memory before they can be used in a broadcast.

• Group numbers must also be stored in the machine’s memory before they can be used in a broadcast.

Group numbers include many stored Address Book numbers (One Touch Dial numbers and Speed Dial

numbers in some models) for easier dialing.

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Fax] > [Options] > [Broadcasting].

3. Press [Add Number].

You can add numbers to the broadcast in the following ways:

• Press [Add Number] and enter a number using the LCD.

Press [OK].

If you want to broadcast using an email address, press , enter the email address, and press [OK].

(On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email

server feature.)

• Press [Add from Address book]. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want

to add to the broadcast. Select the check boxes of the broadcast. After you select all the numbers you

want, press [OK].

• Press [Search in Address book]. Press the name and press [OK]. Press the name, and then

press the number you want to add.

4. When finished, press [OK].

5. Press [Fax Start]. After the broadcast is finished, the machine will print a broadcast report to let you know

the results.

• The machine’s available memory will vary depending on the types of jobs in the memory and the

numbers used for broadcasting. If you broadcast to the maximum number available, you will not be able

to use dual access and delayed fax.

• If the [Out of Memory] message appears, press to stop the job. If more than one page has

been scanned, press [Send Now] to send the portion that is in the machine's memory.

Related Information

•Send a Fax

•Cancel a Broadcast in Progress

224

Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting) > Cancel a

Broadcast in Progress

Cancel a Broadcast in Progress

While broadcasting you can cancel the fax currently being sent or the whole broadcast job.

1. Press .

2. Press .

3. Do one of the following:

• To cancel the entire broadcast, press [Entire Broadcast].

• To cancel the current job, press the name or number being dialed on the LCD.

• To exit without canceling, press .

Related Information

•Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)

225

Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax in Real Time

Send a Fax in Real Time

When sending a fax, the machine scans the document into the memory before sending it. As soon as the

telephone line is free, the machine starts dialing and sending. If you want to send an important document

immediately without waiting for the machine to retrieve the scan from its memory, turn on [Real Time TX].

• If the memory is full and you are sending a fax from the ADF, the machine sends the document in real time

(even if [Real Time TX] is set to [Off]). If the memory is full, faxes from the scanner glass cannot be

sent until you clear some of the memory.

• In Real Time Transmission, the automatic redial feature does not work when using the scanner glass.

• If [Real Time TX] is set to on, the option to scan 2-sided documents is not available.

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Fax] > [Options] > [Real Time TX].

3. Press [On] or [Off].

4. Press [OK].

5. Enter the fax number.

6. Press [Fax Start].

Related Information

•Send a Fax

226

Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)

Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)

You can store up to 50 faxes in the machine's memory to be sent within the next twenty-four hour period.

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Fax] > [Options] > [Delayed Fax] > [Delayed Fax].

3. Press [On].

4. Press [Set Time].

5. To enter the time you want the fax to be sent, do one of the following:

• If you set [12h Clock] in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time in 12-hour format.

Press the button to select [AM] or [PM], and then press [OK].

• If you set [24h Clock] in the [Clock Type] setting, enter the time in 24-hour format and then press

[OK].

(For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)

6. Press [OK].

7. Enter the fax number.

8. Press [Fax Start].

9. Press .

Related Information

•Send a Fax

227

Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Add a Cover Page to Your Fax

Add a Cover Page to Your Fax

You can add a cover page to the next fax or every outgoing fax.

• This feature will not work unless you have programmed your Station ID.

• Your cover page includes your Station ID, a comment, and the name stored in the Address Book, One

Touch Dial, or Speed Dial (in some models).

1. Load your document.

2. Press [Fax] > [Options] > [Coverpage Setup] > [Coverpage Setup].

3. Press [On].

4. Press [Coverpage Message].

5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to choose the comment you want to use, and then press the comment.

Press .

6. Press [OK].

7. Enter the fax number.

8. Press [Fax Start].

The cover page will be added to the next fax. If you want to add the cover page to every outgoing fax, set the

settings as the new default.

Related Information

•Send a Fax

•Compose Your Own Comments

•Use a Printed Cover Page

228

Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Add a Cover Page to Your Fax > Compose Your Own Comments

Compose Your Own Comments

You can set up two comments of your own.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Send] > [Coverpage Setting] >

[Coverpage Message].

2. Press [5.] or [6.] to store your own comment.

3. Enter your own comment using the LCD. Press [OK].

Press to choose numbers, letters or special characters.

4. Press .

Related Information

•Add a Cover Page to Your Fax

229

Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Add a Cover Page to Your Fax > Use a Printed Cover Page

Use a Printed Cover Page

If you want a printed cover page you can write on, print the sample page and attach it to your fax.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Send] > [Coverpage Setting] >

[Print Sample].

2. Press [Yes].

The machine prints the sample cover page.

3. Press .

Related Information

•Add a Cover Page to Your Fax

230

Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Cancel a Fax in Progress

Cancel a Fax in Progress

1. Press .

2. Press while the machine is dialing or sending a fax.

The LCD will display [Cancel Job?].

3. Press an option in the table to cancel or continue the fax job in progress.

Option Description

Yes The machine cancels sending the fax job.

No The machine exits from the process without canceling the fax job.

Related Information

•Send a Fax

231

Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Check and Cancel a Pending Fax

Check and Cancel a Pending Fax

You can cancel a fax job before it is sent, by canceling the fax job while it is stored and waiting in the memory.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Remaining Jobs].

2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll through the waiting jobs, and then press the job you want to

cancel.

3. Press [Cancel].

4. Press [Yes] to confirm or press [No] to exit without canceling.

5. When finished canceling jobs, press .

Related Information

•Send a Fax

232

Home > Fax > Send a Fax > Fax Options

Fax Options

To change fax-sending settings, press the [Options] button.

Option Description

Fax Resolution Set the resolution for outgoing faxes.

The fax quality often can be improved by changing the Fax

Resolution.

2-sided Fax

(For automatic 2-sided scanning models)

Set the 2-sided scanning format.

Contrast Adjust the contrast.

If your document is very light or very dark, changing the contrast

may improve the fax quality.

Broadcasting Send the same fax message to more than one fax number at the

same time.

Delayed Fax Set the time of day the delayed faxes will be sent.

Real Time TX Send a fax immediately without waiting for the machine to retrieve

the scan from its memory.

Coverpage Setup Set the machine to automatically send a cover page that you have

pre-programmed.

Overseas Mode Set to On if you have difficulty sending faxes overseas.

Glass Scan Size Adjust the scan area of the scanner glass to the size of the

document.

Set New Default Save your settings as the default.

Factory Reset Restore all settings back to the factory settings.

You can save the current settings by pressing [Save as Shortcut].

Related Information

•Send a Fax

233

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax

Receive a Fax

•Receive Mode Settings

•Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options

•Remote Fax Retrieval

234

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings

Receive Mode Settings

•Receive Modes Overview

•Choose the Correct Receive Mode

•Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay)

•Set the F/T Ring Time (Pseudo/Double-ring)

•Set Easy Receive

•Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax

•Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes

•Set the Fax Receive Stamp

•Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone Conversation

235

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Receive Modes Overview

Receive Modes Overview

Some receive modes answer automatically (Fax Only Mode and Fax/Tel Mode). You may want to change the

Ring Delay before using these modes.

Fax Only Mode

([Fax] or [Fax Only] in the machine's menu)

Fax Only Mode automatically answers every call as a fax.

Fax/Tel Mode

([Fax/Tel] in the machine's menu)

Fax/Tel Mode helps you manage incoming calls, by recognizing whether they are fax or voice calls and

handling them in the following ways:

• Faxes will be received automatically.

• Voice calls will start the F/T ring to tell you to pick up the call. The F/T ring is a fast pseudo/double-ring

made by your machine.

Manual Mode

([Manual] in the machine's menu)

Manual Mode turns off all automatic answering operations unless you are using the Distinctive Ring Receive

feature.

To receive a fax in Manual Mode, lift the handset of the external telephone connected to the machine or press

the button in the table.

Applicable Models Alternate way to lift the handset

MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW Fax and then Hook

When you hear fax tones (short repeating beeps), press the buttons in the table to receive a fax. Use the Easy

Receive feature to receive faxes when you have lifted a handset on the same line as the machine.

Applicable Models To receive the fax

All MFC models Fax Start and then Receive

External TAD Mode

([External TAD] in the machine's menu)

External TAD Mode lets an external answering device manage your incoming calls.

Incoming calls will be handled in the following ways:

• Faxes will be received automatically.

• Voice callers can record a message on the external TAD.

Related Information

•Receive Mode Settings

236

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Choose the Correct Receive Mode

Choose the Correct Receive Mode

The correct Receive Mode for you is determined by the external devices and telephone subscriber services

(Voice Mail, Distinctive Ring and so on) you will be using on the same line as the Brother machine.

Will you be using a Distinctive Ring number for receiving faxes?

Brother uses the term "Distinctive Ring" but different telephone companies may have other names for this

service, such as Custom Ringing, RingMaster, Personalized Ring, Teen Ring, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call, Data

Ident-A-Call, Smart Ring and SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number Ringing.

Will you be using Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine?

If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine, there is a strong possibility that

Voice Mail and the Brother machine will conflict with each other when receiving incoming calls.

Will you be using a Telephone Answering Device on the same telephone line as your Brother machine?

Your external telephone answering device (TAD) will answer every call automatically. Voice messages are

stored on the external TAD and fax messages are printed. Select [External TAD] as your receive mode.

Will you be using your Brother machine on a dedicated fax line?

Your machine automatically answers every call as a fax. Select [Fax] or [Fax Only] as your receive mode.

Will you be using your Brother machine on the same line as your telephone?

•Do you want to receive voice calls and faxes automatically?

The Fax/Tel Mode is used when sharing the Brother machine and your telephone on the same line.

Select [Fax/Tel] as your receive mode.

Important Note: You cannot receive voice messages on either Voice Mail or an answering machine if

you selected the Fax/Tel Mode.

•Do you expect to receive very few faxes?

Choose [Manual] as your receive mode. You control the telephone line and must answer every call

yourself.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Receive Mode].

If you cannot change the [Receive Mode] option, make sure the Distinctive Ring feature is set to [Off].

2. Press [Fax], [Fax/Tel], [External TAD], or [Manual].

3. Press .

Related Information

•Receive Mode Settings

•Telephone and Fax Problems

•Turn Off Distinctive Ring

237

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine

Answers (Ring Delay)

Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay)

When somebody calls your machine, you will hear the normal telephone ring sound. The number of rings is set in

the Ring Delay option.

• The Ring Delay setting sets the number of times the machine rings before it answers in the Fax Only and

Fax/Tel Modes.

• If you have external or extension telephones on the same line as the machine, keep the Ring Delay setting

of 4.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Ring Delay].

2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the number of rings you want, and then press the number.

If you select [0], the machine will answer immediately and the line will not ring at all (available only for

some countries).

3. Press .

Related Information

•Receive Mode Settings

•Telephone and Fax Problems

238

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the F/T Ring Time (Pseudo/Double-ring)

Set the F/T Ring Time (Pseudo/Double-ring)

When you set the Receive Mode to Fax/Tel Mode, if the call is a fax, your machine will automatically receive it.

However, if it is a voice call, the machine will sound the F/T ring (pseudo/double-ring) for the time you set in the

F/T Ring Time option. When you hear the F/T ring, it means that a voice caller is on the line.

• The F/T Ring Time feature works when you set Fax/Tel Mode as the Receive Mode.

Because the F/T ring is made by the machine, extension and external telephones will not ring; however, you can

still answer the call on any telephone.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [F/T Ring Time].

2. Press how long you want the machine to ring to alert you that you have a voice call.

3. Press .

Even if the caller hangs up during the pseudo/double-ringing, the machine will continue to ring for the set

time.

Related Information

•Receive Mode Settings

239

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set Easy Receive

Set Easy Receive

If Easy Receive is On: The machine can receive a fax automatically, even if you answer the call. When

you see [Receiving] on the LCD or hear a click on the phone line through the handset you are using,

just replace the handset. Your machine will do the rest.

If Easy Receive is Off: If you are at the machine and answer a fax call first by lifting the external handset,

press the buttons in the following table to receive the fax. If you answered at an extension telephone, press

*51.

Applicable Models To receive the fax

MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW Fax Start and then Receive

• If this feature is set to [On], but your machine does not connect a fax call when you lift an extension

or external telephone handset, press the fax receive code *51.

• If you send faxes from a computer on the same telephone line and the machine intercepts them, set

Easy Receive to [Off].

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Easy Receive].

2. Press [On] or [Off].

3. Press .

Related Information

•Receive Mode Settings

•Operation from External and Extension Telephones

240

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax

Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax

If you enable the auto reduction function, the machine reduces each page of an incoming fax to fit on your paper.

The machine calculates the reduction ratio by using the page size of the fax and your Paper Size setting.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Auto Reduction].

2. Press [On] or [Off].

3. Press .

Related Information

•Receive Mode Settings

241

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes

Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes

Your machine prints received faxes on both sides of the paper when [2-sided] is set to [On].

• Use Letter, Legal, Folio (8.5 in. × 13 in.), Mexico Legal or India Legal size paper for this function [16 to 28

lb (60 to 105 g/m2)].

• When 2-sided printing is enabled, incoming faxes are automatically reduced to fit the paper in the paper

tray.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [2-sided].

2. Press [On] or [Off].

3. Press .

Related Information

•Receive Mode Settings

242

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Set the Fax Receive Stamp

Set the Fax Receive Stamp

You can set the machine to print the received date and time at the top center of each received fax page.

• Make sure you have set the current date and time on the machine.

• The received time and date will not appear when using Internet Fax.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Fax Rx Stamp].

2. Press [On] or [Off].

3. Press .

Related Information

•Receive Mode Settings

243

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings > Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone

Conversation

Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone Conversation

If you are speaking on the telephone connected to your Brother machine and the other party is also speaking on

a telephone connected to his fax machine, at the end of the conversation, the other party can send you a fax

before you both hang up.

Your machine's ADF must be empty.

1. Ask the other party to place the document in their machine and to press the Start or Send key.

2. When you hear the CNG tones (slowly repeating beeps), press [Fax Start].

If the machine is in Automatic Redial, wait until it is finished and try again.

3. Press [Receive] to receive a fax.

4. Replace the external handset.

Related Information

•Receive Mode Settings

244

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options

Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options

Use Memory Receive (Remote Fax) options to direct incoming faxes while you are away from the machine. You

can use only one Memory Receive option at a time.

Memory Receive (Remote Fax) can be set to:

• Fax Forwarding

• Paging

• Fax Storage

• PC-Fax Receive

• Forward to Cloud

The machine forwards your received faxes to online services. For more detailed information, see the Web

Connect Guide.

• Off

•Forward Incoming Faxes to Another Machine

•Set the Machine to Dial a Cell Phone or Pager Number When Receiving Faxes

•Store Incoming Faxes in the Machine's Memory

•Change Memory Receive Options

•Turn Off Memory Receive

•Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory

•Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received Faxes to Your Computer (Windows only)

245

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options > Forward Incoming Faxes to

Another Machine

Forward Incoming Faxes to Another Machine

Use the Fax Forwarding feature to automatically forward your incoming faxes to another machine.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive].

2. Press [Fax Forward].

3. Do one of the following:

• Press [Manual] to enter the forwarding fax number (up to 20 characters) using the LCD.

Press [OK].

To forward a fax using an email address, press , enter the email address, and press [OK].

(On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email

server feature.)

• Swipe up or down or press a or b to display to scroll until you find the fax number or email address where

you want your faxes to be forwarded.

Press the fax number or email address you want.

NOTE

• Press [Backup Print: On] or [Backup Print: Off]. If you select [Backup Print: On],

the machine also prints a copy of received faxes at your machine.

4. Press .

Related Information

•Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options

246

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options > Set the Machine to Dial a Cell

Phone or Pager Number When Receiving Faxes

Set the Machine to Dial a Cell Phone or Pager Number When Receiving

Faxes

Use the Paging option if you want your machine to dial a pre-programmed cell phone or pager number. This

feature activates your cell phone or pager so you will know there is a fax message in the machine’s memory.

If you turn on Paging, a backup copy will automatically print at the machine. You cannot change a pager number,

cell phone number or PIN remotely.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive].

2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Paging] option, and then press [Paging].

3. Enter your cell phone or pager number followed by ## (up to 20 digits) using the LCD. Press [OK]. Do not

include the area code if it is the same as that of your machine. For example: press 18005551234##.

4. Do one of the following:

• If you are programming a cell phone number, press [OK].

• If your pager needs a PIN, enter the PIN, press #, press [Pause], and enter your fax number followed by

##. Press [OK]. (For example: press 12345 # [Pause] 18005556789 ##)

• If you do not need a PIN, press [OK].

5. Press .

Related Information

•Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options

247

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options > Store Incoming Faxes in the

Machine's Memory

Store Incoming Faxes in the Machine's Memory

Use the Fax Storage feature to store incoming faxes in the machine's memory. Retrieve your stored fax

messages from your fax machine when you are at another location using the Remote Retrieval commands. Your

machine will print a backup copy of each stored fax.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive].

2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Fax Storage] option, and then press [Fax Storage].

3. Press .

Related Information

•Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options

•How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)

248

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options > Change Memory Receive

Options

Change Memory Receive Options

If received faxes are in your machine's memory when you change the Remote Fax operations, the LCD will ask

you one of the following questions:

If received faxes have been printed automatically, the LCD displays [Erase all faxes?]

• Do one of the following:

- If you press [Yes], faxes in the memory will be erased before the setting changes.

- If you press [No], faxes in the memory will not be erased and the setting will be unchanged.

If unprinted faxes are in the machine's memory, the LCD displays [Print all faxes?]

• Do one of the following:

- If you press [Yes], faxes in the memory will be printed before the setting changes.

- If you press [No], faxes in the memory will not be printed and the setting will be unchanged.

If received faxes are left in the machine’s memory when you change to [PC Fax Receive] from another

option ([Fax Forward], [Paging], or [Fax Storage]).

• Press [<USB>] or the name of the computer if you are on a network, and then press [OK].

The LCD displays:

[Send Fax to PC?]

- If you press [Yes], faxes in the memory will be sent to your computer before the setting changes. You

will be asked if you want to turn on Backup Print.

- If you press [No], faxes in the memory will not be erased and the setting will be unchanged.

Related Information

•Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options

249

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options > Turn Off Memory Receive

Turn Off Memory Receive

Turn off Memory Receive if you do not want the machine to save or transfer incoming faxes.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive].

2. Press [Off].

The LCD displays options if there are received faxes still in your machine's memory.

3. Press .

Related Information

•Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options

250

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options > Print a Fax Stored in the

Machine's Memory

Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory

If you select [Paging] or [Fax Storage], you can still print a fax from the memory when you are at your

machine.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Print Fax].

2. Press [Yes].

Related Information

•Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options

251

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options > Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer

Received Faxes to Your Computer (Windows only)

Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received Faxes to Your Computer

(Windows only)

Turn on the PC-Fax Receive feature, automatically store incoming faxes to your machine's memory, and then

send them to your computer. Use your computer to view and store these faxes.

To transfer the received faxes to your computer you must have the PC-FAX Receiving software running on

your computer.

Even if you have turned off your computer (at night or on the weekend, for example), your machine will receive

and store your faxes in its memory.

When you start your computer and the PC-FAX Receiving software runs, your machine transfers your faxes to

your computer automatically.

If you selected [Backup Print: On], the machine will also print the fax.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [PC Fax Receive].

2. Press [On], and then following the LCD instruction.

• Before you can set up PC-Fax Receive, you must install the MFL-Pro Suite software on your computer.

Make sure your computer is connected and turned on.

• PC-Fax Receive is not available for the Mac operating systems.

• If you get an error message and the machine cannot print the faxes in the memory, you can use this

setting to transfer your faxes to your computer.

3. Press [<USB>] or the name of the computer you want to receive faxes if you are on a network, and then

press [OK].

4. Press [Backup Print: On] or [Backup Print: Off].

5. Press .

Related Information

•Memory Receive (Remote Fax) Options

•Transfer Faxes to Your Computer

•Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)

252

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval

Remote Fax Retrieval

Use Remote Retrieval to call your machine from any touch-tone telephone or fax machine, and use a remote

access code and remote commands to retrieve fax messages.

•Set a Remote Access Code

•Use Your Remote Access Code

•Remote Retrieval Commands

•Forward Faxes Remotely

•Change the Fax Forwarding Number

253

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Set a Remote Access Code

Set a Remote Access Code

Set a Remote Access Code to access and control your Brother machine even when you are away from it.

Before you can use the remote access and retrieval features, you must set up your own code. The factory

default code is the inactive code (---*).

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Remote Access].

2. Enter a three-digit code using the numbers [0] to [9], [*] or [#] using the LCD (the preset '*' cannot be

changed), and then press [OK].

• DO NOT use the same code used for your Fax Receive Code (*51) or Telephone Answer Code (#51).

• To make your code inactive, press and hold to restore the inactive setting (---*), and then press

[OK].

3. Press .

Related Information

•Remote Fax Retrieval

254

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Use Your Remote Access Code

Use Your Remote Access Code

1. Dial your fax number from a telephone or another fax machine using touch tone.

2. When your machine answers, immediately enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *).

3. The machine signals if it has received messages:

• One long beep -- Fax messages

• No beeps -- No messages

4. When the machine gives two short beeps, enter a command.

• The machine will hang up if you wait longer than 30 seconds to enter a command.

• The machine will beep three times if you enter an invalid command.

5. Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you are finished.

6. Hang up.

• If your machine is set to Manual mode and you want to use the remote retrieval features, wait for about

100 seconds after it starts ringing, and then enter the remote access code within 30 seconds.

• This function may not be available in some countries or supported by your local telephone company.

Related Information

•Remote Fax Retrieval

255

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Remote Retrieval Commands

Remote Retrieval Commands

Use the Remote Commands in this table to access fax commands and options when you are away from your

Brother machine. When you call the machine and enter your remote access code (three digits followed by *), the

system will sound two short beeps and you must enter a Remote Command (column 1), followed by one of the

options (column 2) for that command.

Remote

Command

Options Operation Details

95 Change the Fax Forwarding, Paging, or

Fax Storage settings

1 OFF You can select Off after you retrieve or erase all

your messages.

2 Fax Forwarding One long beep means the change is accepted. If

you hear three short beeps, you cannot make a

change because something has not been set up

(for example, a Fax Forwarding or Paging number

has not been registered). You can register your Fax

Forwarding number by entering 4. After you

3 Paging (USA and Canada only)

4 Fax Forwarding number

6 Fax Storage

96 Retrieve a fax

2 Retrieve all faxes Enter the fax number of a remote fax machine to

receive stored fax messages.

3 Erase faxes from memory If you hear one long beep, fax messages have

been erased from memory.

97 Check the receiving status

1 Fax Check whether your machine has received any

faxes. If yes, you will hear one long beep. If not,

you will hear three short beeps.

98 Change the Receive Mode

1 External TAD One long beep means the change has been

accepted.

2 Fax/Tel

3 Fax Only

90 Exit Press 9 0 to stop remote retrieval. Wait for the long

beep, then hang up.

Related Information

•Remote Fax Retrieval

256

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Forward Faxes Remotely

Forward Faxes Remotely

Call your Brother machine from any touch-tone telephone or fax machine to forward incoming faxes to another

machine.

You must turn on Fax Storage to use this feature.

1. Dial your fax number.

2. When your machine answers, enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *). If you hear one

long beep, you have messages.

3. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 6 2.

4. Wait for the long beep, and then use the dial pad to enter the number of the remote fax machine where you

want your fax messages sent, followed by # # (up to 20 digits).

You cannot use * and # as dial numbers. However, press # if you want to create a pause.

5. Hang up after you hear your machine beep. Your machine will call the other fax machine, which will then print

your fax messages.

Related Information

•Remote Fax Retrieval

257

Home > Fax > Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval > Change the Fax Forwarding Number

Change the Fax Forwarding Number

You can change your fax forwarding number from another touch-tone telephone or fax machine.

1. Dial your fax number.

2. When your machine answers, enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *). If you hear one

long beep, you have messages.

3. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 5 4.

4. Wait for the long beep, enter the new number (up to 20 digits) of the remote fax machine you want your fax

messages forwarded to using the dial pad, then enter # #.

You will hear one long beep.

You cannot use * and # as dial numbers. However, press # if you want to create a pause.

5. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 0 to stop Remote Access when you have finished.

6. Hang up after you hear your machine beep.

Related Information

•Remote Fax Retrieval

258

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers

Voice Operations and Fax Numbers

•Voice Operations

•Store Fax Numbers

•Set up Groups for Broadcasting

•Dial Access Codes and Credit Card Numbers

259

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations

Voice Operations

•Send Tone Signals (For Canada)

•Pick up a Voice Call in Fax/Tel Receive Mode

•Special Line Considerations

260

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations > Send Tone Signals (For Canada)

Send Tone Signals (For Canada)

If you have a Pulse dialing service, but must send Tone signals (for example, for telephone banking), follow these

steps. If you have a Touch Tone service, you will not need this feature to send tone signals.

1. Press [Fax].

2. Press [Hook].

3. Press # on the machine's LCD.

Any digits dialed after this will send tone signals.

When you are finished with the call, the machine will return to the Pulse dialing service.

Related Information

•Voice Operations

261

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations > Pick up a Voice Call in Fax/Tel

Receive Mode

Pick up a Voice Call in Fax/Tel Receive Mode

When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will use the F/T Ring (pseudo/double-ring) to alert you to pick up a voice

call.

If you are at the machine, lift the external telephone’s handset, and then press the button in the following table to

answer:

Applicable Models To pick up voice call

MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW Pickup

If you are at an extension telephone, lift the handset during the F/T Ring and then press #51 between the

pseudo/double rings. If no one is on the line, or if someone wants to send you a fax, send the call back to the

machine by pressing *51.

Related Information

•Voice Operations

262

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations > Special Line Considerations

Special Line Considerations

•Rollover Telephone Lines

•Two-Line Telephone System

•Convert Telephone Wall Outlets

•Install Your Brother Machine, an External Two-Line TAD and Two-Line Telephone

263

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations > Special Line

Considerations > Rollover Telephone Lines

Rollover Telephone Lines

A rollover telephone system is a group of two or more separate telephone lines that pass incoming calls to each

other if they are busy.

This feature is available only in the USA and Canada.

The calls are usually passed down or 'rolled over' to the next available telephone line in a preset order.

Your machine can work in a rollover system only if it is the last number in the sequence, so the call cannot roll

away. Do not place the machine on any of the other numbers; when the other lines are busy and a second fax

call is received, the fax call would be transferred to a line that does not have a fax machine. Your machine will

work best on a dedicated line.

Related Information

•Special Line Considerations

264

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations > Special Line

Considerations > Two-Line Telephone System

Two-Line Telephone System

A two-line telephone system is nothing more than two separate telephone numbers on the same wall outlet.

This feature is available only in the USA and Canada.

The two telephone numbers can be on separate jacks (RJ11) or combined into one jack (RJ14). Your machine

must be plugged into an RJ11 jack. RJ11 and RJ14 jacks may be equal in size and appearance and both may

contain four wires (black, red, green, yellow). To test the type of jack, plug in a two-line telephone and see if it

can access both lines. If it can, you must separate the line for your machine.

Related Information

•Special Line Considerations

265

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations > Special Line

Considerations > Convert Telephone Wall Outlets

Convert Telephone Wall Outlets

This feature is available only in the USA and Canada.

There are three ways to convert to an RJ11 jack. The first two ways may require assistance from the telephone

company. You can change the wall outlets from one RJ14 jack to two RJ11 jacks. Or, you can have an RJ11 wall

outlet installed and slave or jump one of the telephone numbers to it.

The third way is the easiest: Buy a triplex adapter. You can plug a triplex adapter into an RJ14 outlet. It separates

the wires into two separate RJ11 jacks (Line 1, Line 2) and a third RJ14 jack (Lines 1 and 2). If your machine is

on Line 1, plug the machine into L1 of the triplex adapter. If your machine is on Line 2, plug it into L2 of the triplex

adapter.

Triplex adapter

Related Information

•Special Line Considerations

266

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations > Special Line

Considerations > Install Your Brother Machine, an External Two-Line TAD and Two-Line Telephone

Install Your Brother Machine, an External Two-Line TAD and Two-Line

Telephone

When you are installing an external two-line telephone answering device (TAD) and a two-line telephone, your

machine must be isolated on one line at both the wall jack and at the TAD.

• This feature is available only in the USA and Canada.

• The most common connection is to place the machine on Line 2, which is explained in the following steps.

The back of the two-line TAD must have two telephone jacks: one labeled L1 or L1/L2, and the other

labeled L2. You will need at least three telephone line cords, the one that came with your machine and two

for your external two-line TAD. You will need a fourth line cord if you add a two-line telephone.

1. Place the two-line TAD and the two-line telephone next to your machine.

2. Plug one end of the telephone line cord for your machine into the L2 jack of the triplex adapter. Plug the other

end into the LINE jack of the machine.

3. Plug one end of the first telephone line cord for your TAD into the L1 jack of the triplex adapter. Plug the other

end into the L1 or L1/L2 jack of the two-line TAD.

4. Plug one end of the second telephone line cord for your TAD into the L2 jack of the two-line TAD. Plug the

other end into the EXT. jack of the machine.

a. Triplex Adapter

b. Two Line Telephone

c. External Two Line TAD

d. Machine

You can keep two-line telephones on other wall outlets as always. There are ways to add a two-line telephone to

the machine's wall outlet. You can plug the telephone line cord from the two-line telephone into the L1+L2 jack of

the triplex adapter. Or, you can plug the two-line telephone into the TEL jack of the two-line TAD.

Related Information

•Special Line Considerations

267

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers

Store Fax Numbers

•Store Address Book Numbers

•Change or Delete Address Book Names or Numbers

•How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine

268

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers > Store Address Book Numbers

Store Address Book Numbers

1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book].

2. Do the following steps:

a. Press [Edit].

b. Press [Add New Address].

c. Press [Name].

d. Enter the name using the LCD (up to 16 characters), and then press [OK].

e. Press [Address].

f. Enter the fax or telephone number using the LCD (up to 20 digits), and then press [OK].

• To store an email address to use with Internet Fax or Scan to Email server, press and enter the

email address and press [OK].

(On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to

Email server feature.)

g. Press [OK].

To store another Address Book number, repeat these steps.

3. Press .

Related Information

•Store Fax Numbers

•Store Address Book Numbers from Outgoing Calls

269

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers > Store Address Book

Numbers > Store Address Book Numbers from Outgoing Calls

Store Address Book Numbers from Outgoing Calls

You can store Address Book numbers from the Outgoing Call history.

1. Press [Fax] > [Call History] > [Outgoing Call].

2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want, and then press it.

3. Press [Edit] > [Add to Address Book] > [Name].

To delete the number, press [Edit] > [Delete]. Press [Yes] to confirm.

4. Enter the name using the LCD (up to 16 characters).

5. Press [OK].

6. Press [OK] to confirm the fax or telephone number you want to store.

7. Press .

Related Information

•Store Address Book Numbers

270

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers > Change or Delete Address

Book Names or Numbers

Change or Delete Address Book Names or Numbers

1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit].

2. Do one of the following:

• Press [Change] to edit the names or fax or telephone numbers.

Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want to change, and then press it.

- To change the name, press [Name]. Enter the new name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and

then press [OK].

- To change the fax or telephone number, press [Address]. Enter the new fax or telephone number

(up to 20 digits) using the LCD, and then press [OK].

Press [OK] to finish.

How to enter text:

To change a character, press d or c to position the cursor to highlight the incorrect character, and then

press .

Enter the new character.

• To delete numbers, press [Delete].

- Select the fax or telephone numbers you want to delete by pressing them to display a red check mark,

and then press [OK].

3. Press .

Related Information

•Store Fax Numbers

271

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Groups for Broadcasting

Set up Groups for Broadcasting

A Group, which can be stored in the Address Book (One Touch Dial or Speed Dial in some models) allows you to

send the same fax message to many fax numbers.

First, you must store each fax number in the Address Book. Then you can include them as numbers in the

Group. Each Group uses up an Address Book (a One Touch Dial, or a Speed Dial in some models) number.

Applicable Models Maximum number of Group Maximum numbers in a large

Group

MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW 20 groups 299 numbers

1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book].

2. Do the following steps:

a. Press [Edit] > [Setup Groups] > [Name].

b. Enter the Group name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK].

c. Press [Add/Delete].

d. Add Address Book numbers to the Group by pressing them to display a red checkmark, and then press

[OK].

e. Read and confirm the displayed list of names and numbers you have chosen, and then press [OK] to

save your Group.

To store another Group for broadcasting, repeat these steps.

3. Press .

Related Information

•Voice Operations and Fax Numbers

•Change a Group Name

•Delete a Group

•Add or Delete Group Members

272

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Groups for Broadcasting > Change a Group

Name

Change a Group Name

1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Change].

2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name.

3. Press [Name].

4. Enter the new Group name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK].

How to change the stored name:

To change a character, press d or c to position the cursor to highlight the incorrect character, and then

press .

Enter the new character.

5. Press [OK].

6. Press .

Related Information

•Set up Groups for Broadcasting

273

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Groups for Broadcasting > Delete a Group

Delete a Group

1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Delete].

2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name.

3. Press [OK].

4. Press .

Related Information

•Set up Groups for Broadcasting

274

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Groups for Broadcasting > Add or Delete

Group Members

Add or Delete Group Members

1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Change].

2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name.

3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Add/Delete] option, and then press [Add/Delete].

4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want to add or delete.

5. Do the following for each number you want to change:

• To add a number to the Group, press the check box of the number to add a check mark.

• To delete a number from the Group, press the check box of the number to remove the check mark.

6. Press [OK].

7. Press [OK].

8. Press .

Related Information

•Set up Groups for Broadcasting

275

Home > Fax > Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Dial Access Codes and Credit Card Numbers

Dial Access Codes and Credit Card Numbers

Sometimes you may want to choose from several long-distance carriers when you send a fax. Rates may vary

depending on the time and destination. To take advantage of low rates, you can store the access codes of long-

distance carriers and credit card numbers as Address Book numbers.

You can store these long dialing sequences by dividing them and setting them up as separate Address Book

numbers in any combination. You can even include manual dialing using the dial pad.

For example: You might have stored '555' and '7000' in your machine as shown in the following table.

Applicable Models '555' stored in '7000' stored in

MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW Address Book: Brother 1 Address Book: Brother 2

You can use them both to dial '555-7000' by using the following procedure.

1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book].

2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number of Brother 1.

3. Press the number.

4. Press [Apply].

5. Press [Address Book].

6. Press [OK].

7. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number of Brother 2.

8. Press the number.

9. Press [Apply].

10. Press [Fax Start].

The machine will dial '555-7000'.

To temporarily change a number, you can substitute part of the number by pressing it using the LCD. For

example, to change the number to '555-7001', you could enter the number (Brother 1: 555) using Address Book,

press [Apply], and then press 7001 using the LCD.

If you must wait for another dial tone or signal at any point in the dialing sequence, create a pause in the

number by pressing [Pause].

Related Information

•Voice Operations and Fax Numbers

276

Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices

Telephone Services and External Devices

•Voice Mail

•Distinctive Ring

•External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)

•External and Extension Telephones

•Multi-line Connections (PBX)

277

Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Voice Mail

Voice Mail

This feature is available only in the USA and Canada.

If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine, Voice Mail and the Brother machine

will conflict with each other when receiving incoming calls.

For example, if your Voice Mail is set to answer after four rings and your Brother machine is set to answer after

two rings, then your Brother machine will answer first. This will prevent callers from being able to leave a

message in your Voice Mail.

Similarly, if your Brother machine is set to answer after four rings and your Voice Mail is set to answer after two

rings, then your Voice Mail will answer first. This will prevent your Brother machine from being able to receive an

incoming fax, since Voice Mail cannot transfer the incoming fax back to the Brother machine.

To avoid conflicts between your Brother machine and your Voice Mail service, do one of the following:

• Get the Distinctive Ring service from your telephone company. Distinctive Ring is a feature of your Brother

machine that allows a person with one line to receive fax and voice calls through two different telephone

numbers on that one line.

Brother uses the term ’Distinctive Ring,’ but telephone companies market the service under a variety of

names, such as Custom Ringing, Personalized Ring, Smart Ring, RingMaster, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call,

Data Ident-A-Call, Teen Ring, and SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number Ringing. This service establishes a

second telephone number on the same line as your existing telephone number, and each number has its own

ring pattern. Typically, the original number rings with the standard ring pattern and is used for receiving voice

calls, and the second number rings with a different ring pattern and is used for receiving faxes.

• Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to "Manual". Manual Mode requires you answer every incoming

call if you want to be able to receive a fax. If the incoming call is a telephone call, then complete the call as

you normally would. If you hear fax sending tones you must transfer the call to the Brother machine.

Unanswered fax and voice calls will go to your Voice Mail.

Related Information

•Telephone Services and External Devices

•Telephone and Fax Problems

278

Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Distinctive Ring

Distinctive Ring

This feature is available only in the USA and Canada.

Distinctive Ring is a function of your Brother machine that allows a person with one line to receive fax and voice

calls through two different phone numbers on that one line. Brother uses the term "Distinctive Ring," but

telephone companies market the service under a variety of names, such as Custom Ringing, Personalized Ring,

Smart Ring, RingMaster, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call, Data Ident-A-Call, Teen Ring, and SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate

Number Ringing. This service establishes a second telephone number on the same line as your existing

telephone number, and each number has its own ring pattern. Typically, the original number rings with the

standard ring pattern and is used for receiving voice calls, and the second number rings with a different ring

pattern and is used for receiving faxes.

• You must pay for your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service before you program the machine to

work with it.

• Contact your telephone company for availability and rates.

What does your telephone company’s ‘Distinctive Ring’ do?

Your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service allows you to have more than one number on the same

telephone line. If you need more than one telephone number, it is cheaper than paying for an extra line.

Each telephone number has its own distinctive ring pattern, so you will know which telephone number is ringing.

This is one way to have a separate telephone number for your machine.

Contact your telephone company for availability and rates.

What does Brother’s ‘Distinctive Ring’ do?

The Brother machine has a Distinctive Ring feature that allows you to use your machine to take full advantage of

the telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service. The new telephone number on your line can only receive

faxes.

You must pay for your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service before you program the machine to

work with it.

Do you have Voice Mail?

If you have Voice Mail on the telephone line where you will install your new machine, there is a strong possibility

that Voice Mail and the machine will conflict with each other while receiving incoming calls. However, the

Distinctive Ring feature allows you to use more than one number on your line, so both Voice Mail and the

machine can work together without any problems. If each one has a separate telephone number, neither will

interfere with the other’s operations.

If you decide to get the Distinctive Ring service from the telephone company, you must register the new

Distinctive Ring pattern they give you. This is so your machine can recognize its incoming calls.

You can change or cancel the Distinctive Ring pattern at any time. You can switch it off temporarily, and turn

it back on later. When you get a new fax number, make sure you reset this feature.

Before you choose the ring pattern to register

You can register only one Distinctive Ring pattern with the machine. Some ring patterns cannot be registered.

The ring patterns below are supported by your Brother machine. Register the one your telephone company gives

you.

Ring Pattern Rings

1 short-short or long-long

2 short-long-short

279

Ring Pattern Rings

3 short-short-long

4 very long

(normal pattern)

• Ring Pattern #1 is often called Short-Short and is the most commonly used.

• If the ring pattern you received is not on this chart, contact your telephone company and ask for one

that is shown.

• The machine will answer only calls to its registered number.

• The first two rings are silent on the machine. This is because the fax must <<listen>> to the ring pattern (to

compare it to the pattern that was ‘registered’). (Other telephones on the same line will ring.)

• If you program the machine correctly, it will recognize the registered ring pattern of the ‘fax number’ within

two ring patterns and then answer with a fax tone. When the ‘voice number’ is called, the machine will not

answer.

Related Information

•Telephone Services and External Devices

•Register the Distinctive Ring Pattern

•Turn Off Distinctive Ring

•Telephone and Fax Problems

280

Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Distinctive Ring > Register the Distinctive Ring

Pattern

This feature is available only in the USA and Canada.

After you set the Distinctive Ring feature to [On], your Distinctive Ring number will receive faxes automatically.

The receive mode is automatically set to [Manual] and you cannot change it to another receive mode while

Distinctive Ring is set to [On]. This ensures the Brother machine will only answer the Distinctive Ring number

and not interfere when your main telephone number is called.

When Distinctive Ring is on, the LCD displays [D/R] as the Receive Mode.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Miscellaneous] > [Distinctive].

2. Do one of the following:

• If you have not registered the Distinctive Ring pattern, press [Distinctive], and then press [On].

• If you have already registered the Distinctive Ring pattern, and want to change the pattern, proceed to

Ring Pattern setting.

3. Press [Ring Pattern].

4. Press the stored ring pattern you want, and then press [OK].

You will hear each pattern as you press the four buttons. Make sure you select the pattern that the telephone

company gave you.

5. Press .

Distinctive Ring is now set to [On].

If you do not want to receive faxes on your Distinctive Ring number, you can turn off Distinctive Ring. The

machine will stay in [Manual] receive mode so you must set the Receive Mode again.

Related Information

•Distinctive Ring

281

Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Distinctive Ring > Turn Off Distinctive Ring

Turn Off Distinctive Ring

This feature is available only in the USA and Canada.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Miscellaneous] > [Distinctive] >

[Distinctive].

2. Press [Off].

3. Press .

If you turn off Distinctive Ring, the machine will stay in Manual Mode. You must set the Receive Mode again.

Related Information

•Distinctive Ring

•Choose the Correct Receive Mode

282

Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)

External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)

You can connect an external Telephone Answering Device (TAD) to the same line as your machine. When the

TAD answers a call, your machine will “listen” for the CNG (fax calling) tones sent by a sending fax machine. If it

hears them it will take over the call and receive the fax. If it does not hear them, it will let your TAD take a voice

message and the LCD will show [Telephone].

The external TAD must answer within four rings (we recommend setting it to two rings). This is because your

machine cannot hear the CNG tones until the external TAD has picked up the call. The sending machine will

send CNG tones for only eight to ten seconds longer. We do not recommend using the toll saver feature on your

external TAD if it needs more than four rings to activate it.

Unless you are using Distinctive Ring, the TAD must be connected to the EXT. jack of the machine.

•If you subscribe to your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service:

You may connect an external TAD to a separate wall jack only if you subscribe to your telephone company’s

Distinctive Ring service, have registered the distinctive ring pattern on your machine, and use that number as

a fax number. The recommended setting is at least four rings on the external TAD when you have the

telephone company’s Distinctive Ring service. You cannot use the Toll Saver setting.

•If You Do Not Subscribe to the Distinctive Ring Service:

You must plug your TAD into the EXT. jack of your machine. If your TAD is plugged into a wall jack, both your

machine and the TAD will try to control the telephone line. (See the illustration.)

1 TAD

2 Protective Cap

IMPORTANT

DO NOT connect a TAD elsewhere on the same telephone line.

If you have problems receiving faxes, reduce the Ring Delay setting on your external TAD.

Related Information

•Telephone Services and External Devices

•Connect an External TAD

•Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD

283

Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External TAD (Telephone Answering

Device) > Connect an External TAD

Connect an External TAD

The external TAD must be plugged into the back of the machine, into the jack labeled EXT. Your machine cannot

work correctly if you plug the TAD into a wall jack (unless you are using Distinctive Ring).

1. Plug the telephone line cord from the telephone wall jack into the back of the machine, in the jack labeled

LINE.

2. Plug the telephone line cord from your external TAD into the back of the machine, in the jack labeled EXT.

(Make sure this cord is connected to the TAD at the TAD’s telephone line jack, and not its handset jack.)

3. Set your external TAD to four rings or less. (The machine’s Ring Delay setting does not apply.)

4. Record an outgoing message on your external TAD.

5. Set the TAD to answer calls.

6. Set the Receive Mode on your machine to [External TAD].

Related Information

•External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)

284

Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External TAD (Telephone Answering

Device) > Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD

Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD

1. Record 5 seconds of silence at the beginning of your message. This allows your machine time to listen for fax

tones.

2. Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.

3. End your 20-second message by giving your Fax Receive Code for people sending manual faxes. For

example: “After the beep, leave a message or press *51 and Start to send a fax.”

NOTE

We recommend beginning your OGM with an initial 5 second silence because the machine cannot hear

fax tones over a loud voice. You may try leaving out this pause, but if your machine has trouble receiving

faxes, then you should re-record the OGM to include it.

Related Information

•External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)

285

Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones

External and Extension Telephones

•Connect an External or Extension Telephone

•Operation from External and Extension Telephones

•If You Use a Non-Brother Cordless External Handset

•Use the Remote Codes

286

Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Connect

an External or Extension Telephone

Connect an External or Extension Telephone

You can connect a separate telephone to your machine as shown in the diagram below.

Connect the telephone line cord to the jack labeled EXT.

Before you connect an external telephone, remove the protective cap (3) from the EXT. jack on the machine.

1 Extension telephone

2 External telephone

3 Protective Cap

Related Information

•External and Extension Telephones

287

Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Operation

from External and Extension Telephones

Operation from External and Extension Telephones

Use extension telephones

If you answer a fax call at an extension telephone, you can make your machine receive the fax by pressing the

Fax Receive Code *51.

If the machine answers a voice call and pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at an

extension telephone by pressing the Telephone Answer Code #51.

Use an external telephone (Connected to the EXT. jack of the machine)

If you answer a fax call at the external telephone connected to the EXT. jack of the machine, you can make the

machine receive the fax by pressing [Fax Start] or Start, and selecting [Receive] or 2.

If the machine answers a voice call and pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at the

external telephone by pressing [Pickup] or Hook.

If you answer a call and no one is on the line:

You should assume that you’re receiving a manual fax.

Press *51 and wait for the chirp or until the LCD displays [Receiving], and then hang up.

You can also use the Easy Receive feature to make your machine automatically take the call.

Related Information

•External and Extension Telephones

•Set Easy Receive

288

Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > If You Use

a Non-Brother Cordless External Handset

If You Use a Non-Brother Cordless External Handset

If your non-Brother cordless telephone is connected to the EXT. jack of the machine and you typically carry the

cordless handset elsewhere, it is easier to answer calls during the Ring Delay.

If you let the machine answer first, you must go to the machine so you can press [Pickup] or Hook to transfer

the call to the cordless handset.

Related Information

•External and Extension Telephones

289

Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Use the

Remote Codes

Use the Remote Codes

Fax Receive Code

If you answer a fax call on an extension telephone, you can tell your machine to receive it by pressing the Fax

Receive Code *51. Wait for the chirping sounds, and then replace the handset.

If you answer a fax call at the external telephone, you can make the machine receive it by pressing the buttons in

the following table:

Applicable Models To make the machine receive the fax

MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW Fax Start and then Receive

Telephone Answer Code

If you receive a voice call and the machine is in F/T mode, it will start to sound the F/T ring (pseudo/double-ring)

after the initial ring delay. If you pick up the call on an extension telephone you can turn the F/T ring off by

pressing #51 (make sure you press this between the rings).

If the machine answers a voice call and pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at the

external telephone by pressing the button in the following table:

Applicable Models To pick up voice call

MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW Pickup

Related Information

•External and Extension Telephones

•Change the Remote Codes

290

Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones > Use the

Remote Codes > Change the Remote Codes

Change the Remote Codes

The preset Fax Receive Code is *51. The preset Telephone Answer Code is #51. If you are always disconnected

when accessing your External TAD remotely, try changing the three-digit remote codes, for example to ### and

999.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Remote Codes].

2. Do one of the following:

• To change the Fax Receive Code, press [Fax Receive Code]. Enter the new code, and then press

[OK].

• To change the Telephone Answer Code, press [Tel Answer]. Enter the new code, and then press

[OK].

• If you do not want to change the Codes, go to the next step.

• To turn off (or turn on) the Remote Codes, press [Remote Codes], and then press [Off] (or [On]).

3. Press .

Related Information

•Use the Remote Codes

291

Home > Fax > Telephone Services and External Devices > Multi-line Connections (PBX)

Multi-line Connections (PBX)

We suggest you ask the company that installed your PBX to connect your machine. If you have a multi line

system we suggest you ask the installer to connect the unit to the last line on the system. This prevents the

machine being activated each time the system receives telephone calls. If all incoming calls will be answered by

a switchboard operator we recommend setting the Receive Mode to [Manual].

We cannot guarantee that your machine will operate correctly under all circumstances when connected to a PBX.

Any difficulties with sending or receiving faxes should be reported first to the company that handles your PBX.

Related Information

•Telephone Services and External Devices

292

Home > Fax > Fax Reports

Fax Reports

The Transmission Verification Report and the Fax Journal are available to confirm the results of fax transmission.

•Print a Transmission Verification Report

•Print a Fax Journal

293

Home > Fax > Fax Reports > Print a Transmission Verification Report

Print a Transmission Verification Report

You can use the Transmission Verification Report as proof that you sent a fax. This report lists the receiving

party's name or fax number, the time and date of transmission, duration of transmission, number of pages sent,

and whether or not the transmission was successful.

There are several settings available for the Transmission Verification Report:

On Prints a report after every fax you send.

On+Image Prints a report after every fax you send.

A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report.

Off Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error.

Off is the factory setting.

Off+Image Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error.

A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report.

No Report Your Brother machine does not print any reports after sending faxes.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Report Setting] > [Transmission].

2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the option you want, and then press it.

If you select [On+Image] or [Off+Image], the image will not appear on the Transmission Verification

Report if Real Time Transmission is set to [On].

3. Press .

If the transmission is successful, OK appears next to RESULT on the Transmission Verification Report. If the

transmission is not successful, NG appears next to RESULT.

Related Information

•Fax Reports

294

Home > Fax > Fax Reports > Print a Fax Journal

Print a Fax Journal

You can set the machine to print a Fax Journal at specific intervals (every 50 faxes, 6, 12 or 24 hours, 2 or 7

days).

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Report Setting] > [Journal Period] >

[Journal Period].

2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select an interval, and then press it.

• Every 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days

The machine will print the report at the selected time and then erase all reception and transmission log

data from its memory. If the machine's memory becomes full with 200 log data before the time you

selected has passed, the machine will print the Journal early and then erase all jobs from the memory. If

you want an extra report before it is due to print, you can print it without erasing the log data from the

memory.

• Every 50 Faxes

The machine will print the Journal when the machine has stored 50 reception and transmission log data.

3. If you selected every 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days, do one of the following to enter the time to start printing:

• If you set [12h Clock] as the format in the [Clock Type] setting, press [Time]. Enter the time (in

12-hour format) using the LCD, and then press [AM] or [PM].

Press [OK].

• If you set [24h Clock] in the [Clock Type] setting, press [Time], and then enter the time (in 24-

hour format) using the LCD.

Press [OK].

(For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)

4. If you selected [Every 7 Days], press [Day].

5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Every Monday], [Every Tuesday], [Every

Wednesday], [Every Thursday], [Every Friday], [Every Saturday] or [Every Sunday] option,

and then press the first day of the 7-day countdown.

6. Press .

Related Information

•Fax Reports

295

Home > Fax > PC-FAX

PC-FAX

•PC-FAX for Windows

•PC-FAX for Mac

296

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows

PC-FAX for Windows

•PC-FAX Overview (Windows)

•Send a Fax Using PC-FAX (Windows)

•Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows)

297

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows)

PC-FAX Overview (Windows)

Reduce paper consumption and save time by using Brother's PC-FAX software to send faxes directly from your

machine.

•Configure PC-FAX (Windows)

•Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)

298

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure PC-FAX

(Windows)

Configure PC-FAX (Windows)

Before sending faxes using PC-FAX, personalize the send options in each tab of the PC-FAX Setup dialog box.

1. Do one of the following:

• (Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7)

Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.

Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left

navigation bar, and then click Setup Sending.

• (Windows 8)

Click (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not

already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Setup Sending.

The PC-FAX Setup dialog box appears.

2. Do one of the following:

• Click the User Information tab, and then type your user information in the fields.

Each Microsoft account can have its own customized User Information screen for custom fax headers and

cover pages.

• Click the Sending tab, and then type the number needed to access an outside line (if needed) in the

Outside line access field. Select the Include header check box to include the header information.

• Click the Address Book tab, and then select the address book you want to use for PC-FAX from the

Select Address Book drop-down list.

3. Click OK.

Related Information

•PC-FAX Overview (Windows)

•Transfer Faxes to Your Computer

299

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax

Address Book (Windows)

Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)

Add, edit and delete members and groups to personalize your Brother Address Book.

•Add a Member to the Address Book (Windows)

•Create a Group in the Address Book (Windows)

•Edit Member or Group Information (Windows)

•Delete a Member or Group (Windows)

•Export the Address Book (Windows)

•Import Information to the Address Book (Windows)

300

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax

Address Book (Windows) > Add a Member to the Address Book (Windows)

Add a Member to the Address Book (Windows)

Add new people and their fax information to the PC-Fax Address Book if you want to send a fax using Brother

PC-Fax software.

1. Do one of the following:

• (Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7)

Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.

Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left

navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).

• (Windows 8)

Click (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not

already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).

The Address Book dialog box appears.

2. Click .

The Address Book Member Setup dialog box appears.

301

3. Type the member's information in the corresponding fields. Only the Name field is required.

4. Click OK.

Related Information

•Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)

302

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax

Address Book (Windows) > Create a Group in the Address Book (Windows)

Create a Group in the Address Book (Windows)

Create a group to broadcast the same PC-FAX to several recipients at one time.

1. Do one of the following:

• (Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7)

Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.

Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left

navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).

• (Windows 8)

Click (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not

already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).

The Address Book dialog box appears.

2. Click .

The Address Book Group Setup dialog box appears.

303

3. Type the name of the new group in the Group Name field.

4. In the Available Names field, select each name you want to include in the group, and then click Add >>.

Members added to the group appear in the Group Members box.

5. When finished, click OK.

Each group can contain up to 50 members.

Related Information

•Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)

304

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax

Address Book (Windows) > Edit Member or Group Information (Windows)

Edit Member or Group Information (Windows)

1. Do one of the following:

• (Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7)

Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.

Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left

navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).

• (Windows 8)

Click (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not

already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).

The Address Book dialog box appears.

2. Select the member or group you want to edit.

3. Click (Properties).

4. Change the member or group information.

5. Click OK.

Related Information

•Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)

305

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax

Address Book (Windows) > Delete a Member or Group (Windows)

Delete a Member or Group (Windows)

1. Do one of the following:

• (Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7)

Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.

Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left

navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).

• (Windows 8)

Click (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not

already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).

The Address Book dialog box appears.

2. Select the member or group you want to delete.

3. Click (Delete).

4. When the confirmation dialog box appears, click OK.

Related Information

•Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)

306

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax

Address Book (Windows) > Export the Address Book (Windows)

Export the Address Book (Windows)

You can export the Address Book as an ASCII text file (*.csv), a vCard (an electronic business card), or Remote

Setup Dial Data and save it on your computer.

• You cannot export the group settings when you export the Address Book data.

1. Do one of the following:

• (Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7)

Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.

Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left

navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).

• (Windows 8)

Click (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not

already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).

The Address Book dialog box appears.

2. Click the File menu, and then select Export.

3. Select one of the following:

•Text

The Select Items dialog box appears. Go to step 4.

•vCard

You must select the member you want to export from your address book before selecting this option.

Browse to the folder where you want to save the vCard, type the vCard name in the File name field,

and then click Save.

•Remote Setup Dial Data

Browse to the folder where you want to save the data, type the file name in the File name field, and

then click Save.

4. In the Available Items field, select the data you want to export, and then click Add >>.

307

Select and add the items in the order you want them listed.

5. If you are exporting to an ASCII file, under the Divide Character section, select the Tab or Comma option to

separate the data fields.

6. Click OK.

7. Browse to the folder on your computer where you want to save the data, type the file name, and then click

Save.

Related Information

•Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)

308

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax

Address Book (Windows) > Import Information to the Address Book (Windows)

Import Information to the Address Book (Windows)

You can import ASCII text files (*.csv), vCards (electronic business cards), or Remote Setup Dial Data into your

Address Book.

1. Do one of the following:

• (Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7)

Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.

Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left

navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).

• (Windows 8)

Click (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not

already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send).

The Address Book dialog box appears.

2. Click the File menu, and then select Import.

3. Select one of the following:

•Text

The Select Items dialog box appears. Go to step 4.

•vCard

Go to step 7.

•Remote Setup Dial Data

Go to step 7.

4. In the Available Items field, select the data you want to import, and then click Add >>.

309

You must select and add fields from the Available Items list in the same order they are listed in the import

text file.

5. If you are importing an ASCII file, under the Divide Character section, select the Tab or Comma option to

separate the data fields.

6. Click OK.

7. Browse to the folder where you want to import the data, type the file name, and then click Open.

Related Information

•Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)

310

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Send a Fax Using PC-FAX (Windows)

Send a Fax Using PC-FAX (Windows)

PC-FAX supports only black and white faxes. A black and white fax will be sent even if the original data is color

and the receiving fax machine supports color faxes.

1. Create a file in any application on your computer.

2. Select the print command in your application.

3. Select Brother PC-FAX as your printer, and then complete your print operation.

The BrotherPC-FAX dialog box appears.

4. Type a fax number using one of the following methods:

• Click the numbers on the dial pad to type the number, and then click Add Send Address.

If you select the Dial Restriction check box, a confirmation dialog box will appear for you to re-type the fax

number using the keyboard. This feature helps to prevent transmissions to the wrong destination.

• Click the Address Book button, and then select a member or group from the Address Book.

If you make a mistake, click All Clear to delete all entries.

5. To include a cover page, select the Add Cover Page check box. You can also click to create or edit a

cover page.

6. Click Start to send the fax.

• To cancel the fax, click Cancel.

• To redial a number, click Redial to show the last five fax numbers, select a number, and then click Start.

Related Information

•PC-FAX for Windows

311

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows)

Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows)

Use Brother's PC-FAX software to receive faxes on your computer, screen them and print only those faxes you

want.

•Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)

312

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive

Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)

Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)

Brother's PC-FAX Receive software lets you view and store faxes on your computer. It is automatically installed

when you install the Brother software and drivers and works on locally or network-connected machines.

• PC-FAX Receive supports only black and white faxes.

When you turn off your computer, your machine will continue to receive and store faxes in your Brother

machine's memory. The machine's LCD will display the number of stored faxes received. When you start this

application, the software will transfer all received faxes to your computer at once. You can enable the Backup

Print option if you want the machine to print a copy of the fax before the fax is sent to your computer, or before

the computer is switched off. You can configure the Backup Print settings from your Brother machine.

Related Information

•Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows)

•Run Brother's PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)

•View Received Messages (Windows)

•Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received Faxes to Your Computer (Windows only)

313

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive

Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) > Run Brother's PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)

Run Brother's PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)

We recommend selecting the Start PC-FAX Receive on computer startup check box so that the software

runs automatically and can transfer any faxes upon computer startup.

1. Do one of the following:

• (Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7)

Click (Start) > All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.

Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left

navigation bar, and then click Receive.

• (Windows 8)

Click (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not

already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Receive.

2. Confirm the message and click Yes.

The PC-FAX Receive window appears. The (PC-Fax Receive (Ready)) icon also appears in your

computer task tray.

Related Information

•Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)

•Set Up Your Computer for PC-FAX Receiving (Windows)

•Add Your Brother Machine to PC-FAX Receiving (Windows)

314

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive

Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) > Run Brother's PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows) >

Set Up Your Computer for PC-FAX Receiving (Windows)

1. Double-click the (PC-Fax Receive (Ready)) icon in your computer task tray.

The PC-FAX Receive window appears.

2. Click Settings.

3. Configure these options as needed:

Preferences

Configure to start PC-FAX Receive automatically when you start Windows.

Save

Configure the path to save PC-FAX files and select the received document format.

Upload to

Configure the path to the SharePoint server and select the option to upload automatically or manually

(available only for Administrators).

Device

Select the Brother machine that you want to receive PC-FAX.

Lock (available only for Administrators)

Restrict users who do not have administrator privileges from configuring the settings options shown above.

4. Click OK.

Related Information

•Run Brother's PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)

315

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive

Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) > Run Brother's PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows) >

Add Your Brother Machine to PC-FAX Receiving (Windows)

• If you installed the machine following the instructions for a network user, then the machine should already

be configured for your network.

1. Double-click the (PC-Fax Receive (Ready)) icon in your computer task tray.

The PC-FAX Receive window appears.

2. Click Settings.

3. Click Device > Add.

4. Select the appropriate connection method.

Select your machine from the automatic search results below.

Connected Brother machines will be displayed. Select a device from the list. Click OK.

Specify your machine by IP address

Type the machine's IP address in the IP Address field, and then click OK.

316

5. To change the computer name that will appear on the machine's LCD, type the new name in the Enter your

PC display name (Max 15 Characters) field.

6. Click OK.

Related Information

•Run Brother's PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)

317

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive

Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) > View Received Messages (Windows)

View Received Messages (Windows)

Receiving Status

Icon Indicated Status

Standby mode

No unread messages

Receiving messages

Messages received

Unread messages

1. Double-click the (PC-Fax Receive (Ready)) icon in your computer task tray.

The PC-FAX Receive window appears.

2. Click any faxes in the list to view them.

3. When finished, click in the right top corner of the window to close it.

318

Even after closing the window, PC-FAX Receive is active and the (PC-Fax Receive (Ready) ) icon will

remain in your computer task tray. To close PC-FAX Receive, click the icon in the computer task tray and

click Close.

Related Information

•Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)

319

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Mac

PC-FAX for Mac

Use Brother's PC-FAX software to send faxes directly from your Mac without printing them. This feature helps

reduce your paper consumption and save time.

•Send Faxes from Your Application (Mac)

320

Home > Fax > PC-FAX > PC-FAX for Mac > Send Faxes from Your Application (Mac)

Send Faxes from Your Application (Mac)

PC-FAX supports only black and white faxes. A black and white fax will be sent even if the original data is color

and the receiving fax machine supports color faxes.

1. Create a document in a Mac application.

2. From an application, such as Apple TextEdit, click the File menu, and then select Print.

3. Click the application pop-up menu, and then select the Send Fax option.

4. Click the Output pop-up menu, and then select the Facsimile option.

5. Type a fax number in the Input Fax Number field, and then click Add.

The fax number is displayed in the Destination Fax Numbers field.

321

To send a fax to more than one number, click the Add button after entering the first fax number and type

the next fax number. The destination fax numbers will be listed in the Destination Fax Numbers field.

6. Click Print to send the fax.

Related Information

•PC-FAX for Mac

322

Home > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive

Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive

You can print photos directly from digital camera media or a USB flash drive, or scan documents and save them

directly to a USB flash drive.

Supported file types are PDF, JPEG, TIFF, XPS, and PRN.

•Compatible USB Flash Drives

•Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage

•Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows)

323

Home > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Compatible USB Flash Drives

Compatible USB Flash Drives

IMPORTANT

The USB direct interface supports only USB flash drives, PictBridge-compatible cameras and digital cameras

that use the USB mass storage standard. Other USB devices are not supported.

Compatible USB Flash Drives

USB Class USB Mass Storage Class

USB Mass Storage Sub Class SCSI or SFF-8070i

Transfer protocol Bulk transfer Only

Format 1 FAT12/FAT16/FAT32/exFAT

Sector size Max. 4096 Byte

Encryption Encrypted devices are not supported.

Related Information

•Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive

1NTFS format is not supported.

324

Home > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital

Camera Supporting Mass Storage

Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting

Mass Storage

• Make sure your digital camera is turned on.

• Your digital camera must be switched from PictBridge mode to mass storage mode.

IMPORTANT

To prevent damage to your machine, DO NOT connect any device other than a digital camera or USB flash

drive to the USB direct interface.

1. Connect your USB flash drive or digital camera to the USB direct interface on the front of the machine. The

touchscreen will automatically display the USB menu to confirm the USB flash drive or digital camera is

correctly connected.

• If an error occurs, the USB menu will not appear on the touchscreen.

• When the machine is in Deep Sleep mode, the touchscreen does not display any information even if

you connect a USB flash drive to the USB direct interface. Press the touchscreen to wake up the

machine.

2. Press [Direct Print].

If your machine has been set to Secure Function Lock On, you may not be able to access Direct Print.

3. Swip up or down, or press a or b to display the file you want to print, and then select the file.

To print an index of the files, press [Index Print] on the touchscreen. Press [Yes] to print the data.

4. Do one of the following:

• To change the settings, press [Print Settings]. Go to the next step.

• If you want to use the default settings, enter the number of copies, and then press [Start].

5. Select the print settings you want to change:

•[Paper Type]

•[Paper Size]

325

•[Multiple Page]

•[Orientation]

•[2-sided]

•[Collate]

•[Tray Use]

•[Print Quality]

•[PDF Option]

NOTE

Depending on the file type, some of these settings may not appear.

6. Press [OK].

7. Enter the number of copies you want.

8. Press [Start] to print the data.

9. Press .

IMPORTANT

DO NOT remove the USB flash drive or digital camera from the USB direct interface until the machine

has finished printing.

Related Information

•Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive

326

Home > Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive > Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows)

Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows)

These instructions may vary depending on your print application and operating system.

1. Select the print command in your application.

2. Select your model, and then select the print to file option.

3. Complete your print operation.

4. Enter the required information to save the file.

If the computer prompts you to enter a file name only, you can also specify the folder where you want to

save the file by typing the directory name (for example: C:\Temp\FileName.prn).

If a USB flash drive is connected to your computer, you can save the file directly to the USB flash drive.

Related Information

•Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive

327

Home > Network

Network

•Get Started

•Network Management Software and Utilities

•Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network

•Advanced Network Features

•Technical Information for Advanced Users

328

Home > Network > Get Started

Get Started

We recommend setting up and connecting to your network using the Brother installation CD-ROM. This section

provides more information about network connection types, introduces various methods to manage your network

and explains some useful network features of your Brother machine.

•Supported Basic Network Features

329

Home > Network > Get Started > Supported Basic Network Features

Supported Basic Network Features

The print server supports various features depending on the operating system. Use this table to see which

network features and connections are supported by each operating system.

Operating Systems Windows XP

Windows Vista

Windows 7

Windows 8

Windows Server

2003/2008/2012/2012 R2

OS X v10.8.5

OS X v10.9.x

OS X v10.10.x

Printing Yes Yes Yes

Scanning Yes Yes

PC Fax Send (Available only

for certain models)

Yes Yes

PC Fax Receive (Available

only for certain models)

Yes

BRAdmin Light Yes Yes

BRAdmin Professional Yes Yes

Web Based Management Yes Yes Yes

Remote Setup (Available only

for certain models)

Yes Yes

Status Monitor Yes Yes

Driver Deployment Wizard Yes Yes

Vertical Pairing (Windows 7

and Windows 8 only)

(Available only for certain

models)

Yes

• Go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to

download the latest version of Brother's BRAdmin Light.

• Go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to

download the latest version of Brother's BRAdmin Professional utility.

Related Information

•Get Started

330

Home > Network > Network Management Software and Utilities

Network Management Software and Utilities

Configure and change your Brother machine's network settings using a management utility.

•Learn about Network Management Software and Utilities

•Change Machine Settings from Your Computer

•Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management

331

Home > Network > Network Management Software and Utilities > Learn about Network Management

Software and Utilities

Learn about Network Management Software and Utilities

Web Based Management

Web Based Management is a utility that uses a standard web browser to manage your machine using the Hyper

Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) or Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS). Type your

machine's IP address into your web browser to access and change your print server settings.

BRAdmin Light (Windows)

BRAdmin Light is a utility for the initial setup of Brother network-connected devices. This utility can search for

Brother products on your network, view the status and configure the basic network settings, such as IP address.

Go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to download

BRAdmin Light.

• If you are using Windows Firewall, or the firewall function of an anti-spyware or antivirus application,

temporarily disable them. When you are sure you can print, configure the software settings following the

instructions.

BRAdmin Professional (Windows)

BRAdmin Professional is a utility for more advanced management of network-connected Brother devices. This

utility can search for Brother products on your network and view the device status from an easy-to-read Windows

Explorer-style screen that changes color to identify the status of each device. You can configure network and

device settings, and update device firmware from a Windows computer on your LAN. BRAdmin Professional can

also log activity of Brother devices on your network and export the log data in an HTML, CSV, TXT, or SQL

format. For users who want to monitor locally-connected machines, install the Print Auditor Client software on the

client computer. This utility allows you to use BRAdmin Professional to monitor machines that are connected to a

client computer via the USB interface.

• Go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to

download the latest version of Brother's BRAdmin Professional utility.

• Node name: The node name appears in the current BRAdmin Professional window. The default node

name is "BRNxxxxxxxxxxxx" for a wired network or "BRWxxxxxxxxxxxx" for a wireless network (where

"xxxxxxxxxxxx" is your machine's MAC Address / Ethernet address).

• If you are using Windows Firewall, or the firewall function of an anti-spyware or antivirus application,

temporarily disable them. When you are sure you can print, configure the software settings following the

instructions.

Remote Setup (Windows and Mac) (Available only for certain models)

Remote Setup is a program for configuring many machine and network settings from either a Windows or a Mac

application. When you start this application, the settings on your machine are automatically downloaded to your

computer and displayed on your computer screen. If you change the settings, you can upload them directly to the

machine.

This utility can be used for either a USB or a network connection.

Related Information

•Network Management Software and Utilities

332

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network

Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless

Network

To connect your machine to your wireless network, we recommend using the Installation CD-ROM.

•Before Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network

•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network

•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi

Protected Setup™ (WPS)

•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected

Setup™ (WPS)

•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network in Ad-Hoc Mode (For IEEE 802.11b/g/n)

•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel

Setup Wizard

•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast

•Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network

•Use Wi-Fi Direct®

333

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless

Network > Before Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network

Before Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network

Before attempting to configure a wireless network, confirm the following:

• Before configuring wireless settings, you must know your Network name (SSID) and Network Key. If you are

using an enterprise wireless network, you must know the User ID and Password.

If you do not know the security information, please consult the router manufacture, your system

administrator, or your Internet provider.

• To achieve optimum results with normal everyday document printing, place the Brother machine as close to

the wireless LAN access point/router as possible with minimal obstructions. Large objects and walls between

the two devices and interference from other electronic devices can affect the data transfer speed of your

documents.

Due to these factors, wireless may not be the best method of connection for all types of documents and

applications. If you are printing large files, such as multi-page documents with mixed text and large graphics,

you may want to consider selecting wired Ethernet for faster data transfer (supported models only), or USB

for the fastest throughput speed.

• Although the Brother machine can be used in both a wired and wireless network (supported models only),

only one connection method can be used at a time. However, a wireless network connection and Wi-Fi Direct

connection, or a wired network connection (supported models only) and Wi-Fi Direct connection can be used

at the same time.

Related Information

•Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network

334

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless

Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network

Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network

1. Turn on your computer and put the Brother Installation CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

• For Windows, follow these instructions.

• For Mac, click Driver Download to go to the Brother Solutions Center. Follow the on-screen instructions

to install printer drivers.

2. The opening screen appears automatically.

Choose your language, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

• (Windows XP)

If the Brother screen does not appear automatically, go to My Computer. Double-click the CD-ROM

icon, and then double-click start.exe.

• (Windows Vista and Windows7)

If the Brother screen does not appear automatically, go to Computer. Double-click the CD-ROM icon,

and then double-click start.exe.

• (Windows 8)

Click the (File Explorer) icon on the taskbar, and then go to Computer (This PC). Double-click

the CD-ROM icon, and then double-click start.exe.

• If the User Account Control screen appears, do one of the following:

- (Windows Vista) Click Allow.

- (Windows 7/Windows 8) Click Yes.

3. Choose Wireless Network Connection (Wi-Fi), and then click Next.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions.

After you have completed the wireless setup, the installer program walks you through installing the drivers and

software necessary for operating your device. Click Next in the installation dialog box and follow the on-screen

instructions.

Related Information

•Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network

335

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless

Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected

Setup™ (WPS)

Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push

Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)

If your wireless access point/router supports WPS (Push Button Configuration), you can use WPS from your

machine's control panel menu to configure your wireless network settings.

Routers or access points that support WPS are marked with this symbol:

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN] > [WPS].

2. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].

This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].

3. When the touchscreen displays [Start WPS on your wireless access point/router, then

press [OK].], press the WPS button on your wireless access point/router. Then press [OK] on your

machine. Your machine will automatically detect your wireless access point/router and try to connect to your

wireless network.

If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].

You have completed the wireless network setup. To install drivers and software necessary for operating your

device, insert the Brother Installation CD-ROM to your computer or go to your model's Downloads page on the

Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.

Related Information

•Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network

•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes

336

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless

Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™

(WPS)

Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method

of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)

If your wireless LAN access point/router supports WPS, you can use the Personal Identification Number (PIN)

Method to configure your wireless network settings.

The PIN Method is one of the connection methods developed by the Wi-Fi Alliance®. By submitting a PIN

created by an Enrollee (your machine) to the Registrar (a device that manages the wireless LAN), you can set up

the wireless network and security settings. For more information on how to access WPS mode, see the

instructions provided with your wireless access point/router.

Type A

Connection when the wireless LAN access point/router (1) doubles as Registrar.

Type B

Connection when another device (2), such as a computer, is used as Registrar.

337

Routers or access points that support WPS are marked with this symbol:

1. Press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN] > [WPS w/ PIN Code].

2. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].

This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].

3. The LCD displays an eight-digit PIN and the machine starts searching for a wireless LAN access point/router.

4. Using a computer that is on the network, type "http://access point's IP address" in your browser (where

"access point's IP address" is the IP address of the device that is being used as the Registrar).

5. Go to the WPS settings page and type the PIN, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

• The Registrar is usually the wireless LAN access point/router.

• The settings page will differ depending on the brand of wireless LAN access point/router. For more

information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router.

If you are using a Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows 8 computer as a Registrar, complete the

following steps:

6. Do one of the following:

• (Windows Vista)

Click (Start) > Network > Add a wireless device.

• (Windows 7)

Click (Start) > Devices and Printers > Add a device.

• (Windows 8)

Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings >

Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers > Add a device.

338

• To use a Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows 8 computer as a Registrar, you must register it to your

network in advance. For more information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access

point/router.

• If you use Windows 7 or Windows 8 as a Registrar, you can install the printer driver after the wireless

configuration by following the on-screen instructions. To install the full driver and software package, use

the Brother installer on the Installer CD-ROM.

7. Select your machine and click Next.

8. Type the PIN displayed on the machine's LCD, and then click Next.

9. Select your network, and then click Next.

10. Click Close.

If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].

You have completed the wireless network setup. To install drivers and software necessary for operating your

device, insert the Brother Installation CD-ROM to your computer or go to your model's Downloads page on the

Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.

Related Information

•Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network

•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes

339

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless

Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network in Ad-Hoc Mode (For IEEE 802.11b/g/n)

Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network in Ad-Hoc Mode (For

IEEE 802.11b/g/n)

•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network in Ad-Hoc Mode Using a New SSID

•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network in Ad-Hoc Mode Using an Existing SSID

340

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless

Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network in Ad-Hoc Mode (For IEEE 802.11b/g/

n) > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network in Ad-Hoc Mode Using a New SSID

Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network in Ad-Hoc Mode Using

a New SSID

You must connect to a new SSID from your computer when it is configured for Ad-Hoc mode.

1. Press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN] > [Setup Wizard].

2. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].

This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].

3. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Swipe up or down or press a

or b to display [<New SSID>]. Press [<New SSID>], and then press [OK].

4. Enter the SSID name, and then press [OK].

5. Press [Ad-hoc] when instructed.

6. Select the Encryption type [None] or [WEP].

7. If you selected the [WEP] option for Encryption type, select and enter the WEP key, and then press [OK].

• Your Brother machine supports the use of the first WEP key only.

8. The machine will attempt to connect to the wireless device you have selected.

If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].

You have completed the wireless network setup. To install drivers and software necessary for operating your

device, insert the Brother Installation CD-ROM to your computer or go to your model's Downloads page on the

Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.

Related Information

•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network in Ad-Hoc Mode (For IEEE 802.11b/g/n)

•How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine

•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes

341

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless

Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network in Ad-Hoc Mode (For IEEE 802.11b/g/

n) > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network in Ad-Hoc Mode Using an Existing SSID

Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network in Ad-Hoc Mode Using

an Existing SSID

If you are trying to pair your Brother machine to a computer that is already in Ad-Hoc mode and has a configured

SSID, use these instructions.

Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need

this information before you continue with the configuration.

1. Check and record the current wireless network settings of the computer to which you are connecting.

The wireless network settings of the computer you are connecting with must be set to Ad-Hoc mode with an

SSID already configured. For more information on how to configure your computer in Ad-Hoc mode, see

the instructions included with your computer or contact your network administrator.

Network Name (SSID)

Communication Mode Encryption Mode Network Key

Ad-Hoc NONE -

WEP

For example:

Network Name (SSID)

HELLO

Communication Mode Encryption Mode Network Key

Ad-Hoc WEP 12345

Your Brother machine supports the use of the first WEP key only.

2. Press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN] > [Setup Wizard].

3. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].

This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].

4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. If a list of SSIDs is displayed,

swipe up or down or press a or b to display the SSID to which you want to connect, and then press the SSID.

5. Press [OK].

6. Enter the WEP key, and then press [OK].

• Your Brother machine supports the use of the first WEP key only.

7. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.

If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].

You have completed the wireless network setup. To install drivers and software necessary for operating your

device, insert the Brother Installation CD-ROM to your computer or go to your model's Downloads page on the

Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.

342

Related Information

•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network in Ad-Hoc Mode (For IEEE 802.11b/g/n)

•How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine

•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes

343

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless

Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard

Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's

Control Panel Setup Wizard

Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need

this information before you continue with the configuration.

1. Check and record the current wireless network settings of the computer to which you are connecting.

Network Name (SSID)

Network Key

For example:

Network Name (SSID)

HELLO

Network Key

12345

• Your access point/router may support the use of multiple WEP keys, however your Brother machine

supports the use of the first WEP key only.

• If you need assistance during setup and want to contact Brother Customer Service, make sure you

have your SSID (Network Name) and Network Key ready. We cannot assist you in locating this

information.

• If you do not know this information (SSID and Network Key), you cannot continue the wireless setup.

How can I find this information?

a. Check the documentation provided with your wireless access point/router.

b. The initial SSID could be the manufacturer's name or the model name.

c. If you do not know the security information, please consult the router manufacturer, your system

administrator, or your Interner provider.

2. On your Brother machine's LCD, press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN] >

[Setup Wizard].

3. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].

This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].

4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs.

If a list of SSIDs is displayed, swipe up or down or press a or b to display the SSID to which you want to

connect, and then press the SSID.

5. Press [OK].

6. Do one of the following:

• If you are using an authentication and encryption method that requires a Network Key, enter the Network

Key you wrote down in the first step.

When you have entered all the characters, press [OK].

• If your authentication method is Open System and your encryption mode is None, go to the next step.

7. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.

344

If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].

You have completed the wireless network setup. To install drivers and software necessary for operating your

device, insert the Brother Installation CD-ROM to your computer or go to your model's Downloads page on the

Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.

Related Information

•Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network

•How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine

•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes

345

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless

Network > Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast

Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not

Broadcast

Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need

this information before you continue with the configuration.

1. Check and record the current wireless network settings.

Network Name (SSID)

Communication Mode Authentication Method Encryption Mode Network Key

Infrastructure Open System NONE -

WEP

Shared Key WEP

WPA/WPA2-PSK AES

TKIP

(TKIP is supported for

WPA-PSK only.)

For example:

Network Name (SSID)

HELLO

Communication Mode Authentication Method Encryption Mode Network Key

Infrastructure WPA2-PSK AES 12345678

If your router uses WEP encryption, enter the key used as the first WEP key. Your Brother machine

supports the use of the first WEP key only.

2. Press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN] > [Setup Wizard].

3. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].

This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].

4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Swipe up or down or press a

or b to display [<New SSID>]. Press [<New SSID>], and then press [OK].

5. Enter the SSID name, and then press [OK].

6. Press [Infrastructure] when instructed.

7. Select the Authentication Method.

8. Do one of the following:

• If you selected the [Open System] option, press the Encryption type [None] or [WEP].

If you selected the [WEP] option for Encryption type, select and enter the WEP key, and then press [OK].

• If you selected the [Shared Key] option, select and enter the WEP key, and then press [OK].

• If you selected the [WPA/WPA2-PSK] option, press the Encryption type [TKIP+AES] or [AES].

Enter the WPA key, and then press [OK].

• Your Brother machine supports the use of the first WEP key only.

9. The machine will attempt to connect to the wireless device you have selected.

346

If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].

You have completed the wireless network setup. To install drivers and software necessary for operating your

device, insert the Brother Installation CD-ROM to your computer or go to your model's Downloads page on the

Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.

Related Information

•Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network

•I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration

•How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine

•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes

347

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless

Network > Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network

Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network

Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need

this information before you continue with the configuration.

1. Check and record the current wireless network settings.

Network Name (SSID)

Communication

Mode

Authentication

Method

Encryption Mode User ID Password

Infrastructure LEAP CKIP

EAP-FAST/NONE AES

TKIP

EAP-FAST/MS-

CHAPv2

AES

TKIP

EAP-FAST/GTC AES

TKIP

PEAP/MS-CHAPv2 AES

TKIP

PEAP/GTC AES

TKIP

EAP-TTLS/CHAP AES

TKIP

EAP-TTLS/MS-

CHAP

AES

TKIP

EAP-TTLS/MS-

CHAPv2

AES

TKIP

EAP-TTLS/PAP AES

TKIP

EAP-TLS AES -

TKIP -

For example:

Network Name (SSID)

HELLO

Communication

Mode

Authentication

Method

Encryption Mode User ID Password

Infrastructure EAP-FAST/MS-

CHAPv2

AES Brother 12345678

348

• If you configure your machine using EAP-TLS authentication, you must install the client certificate

issued by a CA before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the client

certificate. If you have installed more than one certificate, we recommend writing down the certificate

name you want to use.

• If you verify your machine using the common name of the server certificate, we recommend writing

down the common name before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the

common name of the server certificate.

2. Press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN] > [Setup Wizard].

3. When [Enable WLAN?] appears, press [Yes].

This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No].

4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Swipe up or down or press a

or b to display [<New SSID>]. Press [<New SSID>], and then press [OK].

5. Enter the SSID name, and then press [OK].

6. Press [Infrastructure] when instructed.

7. Select the Authentication Method.

8. Do one of the following:

• If you selected the [LEAP] option, enter the user ID, and then press [OK]. Enter the Password, and then

press [OK].

• If you selected the [EAP-FAST], [PEAP] or [EAP-TTLS] option, select the Inner Authentication method

[NONE], [CHAP], [MS-CHAP], [MS-CHAPv2], [GTC] or [PAP].

Depending on your Authentication method, the Inner Authentication method selections differ.

Select the encryption type [TKIP+AES] or [AES].

Select the verification method [No Verification], [CA] or [CA + Server ID].

- If you selected the [CA + Server ID] option, enter the server ID, user ID and password (if

required), and then press [OK] for each option.

- For other selections, enter the user ID and Password, and then press [OK] for each option.

If you have not imported a CA certificate into your machine, the machine displays [No Verification].

• If you selected the [EAP-TLS] option, select the encryption type [TKIP+AES] or [AES].

The machine will display a list of available Client Certificates, and then select the certificate.

Select the verification method [No Verification], [CA] or [CA + Server ID].

- If you selected the [CA + Server ID] option, enter the server ID and user ID, and then press [OK]

for each option.

- For other selections, enter the user ID, and then press [OK].

If you have not imported a CA certificate into your machine, the machine displays [No Verification].

9. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.

If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected].

You have completed the wireless network setup. To install drivers and software necessary for operating your

device, insert the Brother Installation CD-ROM to your computer or go to your model's Downloads page on the

Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.

Related Information

•Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network

•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes

349

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use

Wi-Fi Direct®

Use Wi-Fi Direct®

•Print or Scan from Your Mobile Device Using Wi-Fi Direct

•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network

•I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration

350

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use

Wi-Fi Direct® > Print or Scan from Your Mobile Device Using Wi-Fi Direct

Print or Scan from Your Mobile Device Using Wi-Fi Direct

Wi-Fi Direct is one of the wireless configuration methods developed by the Wi-Fi Alliance®. It allows you to

configure a secured wireless network between your Brother machine and a mobile device, such as an Android™

device, Windows Phone device, iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad, without using an access point. Wi-Fi Direct

supports wireless network configuration using the one-push or PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS).

You can also configure a wireless network by manually setting an SSID and password. Your Brother machine's

Wi-Fi Direct feature supports WPA2™ security with AES encryption.

1. Mobile device

2. Your Brother machine

• Although the Brother machine can be used in both a wired and wireless network, only one connection

method can be used at a time. However, a wireless network connection and Wi-Fi Direct connection, or

a wired network connection (supported models only) and Wi-Fi Direct connection can be used at the

same time.

• The Wi-Fi Direct-supported device can become a Group Owner (G/O). When configuring the Wi-Fi

Direct network, the G/O serves as an access point.

• Ad-hoc mode and Wi-Fi Direct cannot be used at the same time. Disable one function to enable the

other. If you want to use Wi-Fi Direct while you are using Ad-hoc mode, set Network I/F to Wired LAN or

disable Ad-hoc mode and connect your Brother machine to the access point.

Related Information

•Use Wi-Fi Direct®

351

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use

Wi-Fi Direct® > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network

Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network

Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings from your machine's control panel.

•Wi-Fi Direct Network Configuration Overview

•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-Push Method

•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected

Setup™ (WPS)

•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN Method

•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™

(WPS)

•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually

352

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use

Wi-Fi Direct® > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network > Wi-Fi Direct Network Configuration Overview

Wi-Fi Direct Network Configuration Overview

The following instructions offer five methods for configuring your Brother machine in a wireless network

environment. Select the method you prefer for your environment.

Check your mobile device for configuration.

1. Does your mobile device support Wi-Fi Direct?

Option Description

Yes Go to Step 2

No Go to Step 3

2. Does your mobile device support one-push configuration for Wi-Fi Direct?

Option Description

Yes See Related Information: Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-

Push Method.

No See Related Information: Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN

Method.

3. Does your mobile device support Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)?

Option Description

Yes Go to Step 4

No See Related Information: Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually.

4. Does your mobile device support one-push configuration for Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)?

Option Description

Yes See Related Information: Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-

Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS).

No See Related Information: Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN

Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS).

To use Brother iPrint&Scan functionality in a Wi-Fi Direct network configured by one-push configuration using Wi-

Fi Direct or by PIN Method configuration using Wi-Fi Direct, the device you use to configure Wi-Fi Direct must be

running Android™ 4.0 or greater.

Related Information

•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network

•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-Push Method

•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)

•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN Method

•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)

•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually

353

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use

Wi-Fi Direct® > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-

Push Method

Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-Push Method

If your mobile device supports Wi-Fi Direct, follow these steps to configure a Wi-Fi Direct network.

When the machine receives the Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi

Direct connection request received. Press [OK] to connect.] will appear on the LCD.

Press [OK] to connect.

1. Press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Push Button].

2. Activate Wi-Fi Direct on your mobile device (see your mobile device's user's guide for instructions) when

[Activate Wi-Fi Direct on other device. Then Press [OK].] appears on the machine's

LCD. Press [OK] on your machine.

This will start the Wi-Fi Direct setup. To cancel, press .

3. Do one of the following:

• When your Brother machine is the Group Owner (G/O), connect your mobile device to the machine

directly.

• When your Brother machine is not the G/O, it displays available device names with which to configure a

Wi-Fi Direct network. Select the mobile device you want to connect to. Search for available devices again

by pressing [Rescan].

4. If your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. You have completed

the Wi-Fi Direct network setup. For more information on printing from or scanning to your mobile device, go to

your model's Manuals page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to see the Mobile Print/

Scan Guide for Brother iPrint&Scan.

Related Information

•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network

•Wi-Fi Direct Network Configuration Overview

354

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use

Wi-Fi Direct® > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-

Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)

Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the One-Push Method of Wi-

Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)

If your mobile device supports WPS (PBC; Push Button Configuration), follow these steps to configure a Wi-Fi

Direct network.

When the machine receives the Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi

Direct connection request received. Press [OK] to connect.] will appear on the LCD.

Press [OK] to connect.

1. Press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Group Owner].

2. Press [On].

3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the [Push Button] option. Press [Push Button].

4. Activate your mobile device's WPS one-push configuration method (see your mobile device's user's guide for

instructions) when [Activate Wi-Fi Direct on other device. Then Press [OK].] appears on

the machine's LCD. Press [OK] on your Brother machine.

This will start the Wi-Fi Direct setup. To cancel, press .

5. If your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. You have completed

the Wi-Fi Direct network setup. For more information on printing from or scanning to your mobile device, go to

your model's Manuals page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to see the Mobile Print/

Scan Guide for Brother iPrint&Scan.

Related Information

•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network

•Wi-Fi Direct Network Configuration Overview

355

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use

Wi-Fi Direct® > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN

Method

Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN Method

If your mobile device supports the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Direct, follow these steps to configure a Wi-Fi Direct

network:

When the machine receives the Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi

Direct connection request received. Press [OK] to connect.] will appear on the LCD.

Press [OK] to connect.

1. Press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [PIN Code].

2. Activate Wi-Fi Direct on your mobile device (see your mobile device's user's guide for instructions) when

[Activate Wi-Fi Direct on other device. Then Press [OK].] appears on the machine's

LCD. Press [OK] on your machine.

This will start the Wi-Fi Direct setup. To cancel, press .

3. Do one of the following:

• When your Brother machine is the Group Owner (G/O), it will wait for a connection request from your

mobile device. When [PIN Code] appears, enter the PIN displayed on your mobile device in the

machine. Press [OK] to complete the setup.

If the PIN is displayed on your Brother machine, enter the PIN in your mobile device.

• When your Brother machine is not the G/O, it displays available device names with which to configure a

Wi-Fi Direct network. Select the mobile device you want to connect to. Search for available devices again

by pressing [Rescan].

4. Do one of the following:

• Press [Display PIN Code] to display the PIN on your machine and enter the PIN in your mobile

device. Go to the next step.

• Press [Input PIN Code] to enter the PIN displayed on your mobile device in the machine, and then

press [OK]. Go to the next step.

If your mobile device does not display a PIN, press on your Brother machine. Go back to the first

step and try again.

5. If your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. You have completed

the Wi-Fi Direct network setup. For more information on printing from or scanning to your mobile device, go to

your model's Manuals page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to see the Mobile Print/

Scan Guide for Brother iPrint&Scan.

Related Information

•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network

•Wi-Fi Direct Network Configuration Overview

356

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use

Wi-Fi Direct® > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN

Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)

Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi

Protected Setup™ (WPS)

If your mobile device supports the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS), follow these steps to configure

a Wi-Fi Direct network.

When the machine receives the Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi

Direct connection request received. Press [OK] to connect.] will appear on the LCD.

Press [OK] to connect.

1. Press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Group Owner].

2. Press [On].

3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the [PIN Code] option. Press [PIN Code].

4. When [Activate Wi-Fi Direct on other device. Then Press [OK].] appears, activate your

mobile device's WPS PIN configuration method (see your mobile device's user's guide for instructions) and

then press [OK] on your Brother machine.

This will start the Wi-Fi Direct setup. To cancel, press .

5. The machine will wait for a connection request from your mobile device. When [PIN Code] appears, enter

the PIN displayed on your mobile device in to the machine. Press [OK].

6. If your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. You have completed

the Wi-Fi Direct network setup. For more information on printing from or scanning to your mobile device, go to

your model's Manuals page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to see the Mobile Print/

Scan Guide for Brother iPrint&Scan.

Related Information

•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network

•Wi-Fi Direct Network Configuration Overview

357

Home > Network > Additional Methods of Configuring Your Brother Machine for a Wireless Network > Use

Wi-Fi Direct® > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network > Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually

Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually

If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct or WPS, you must configure a Wi-Fi Direct network manually.

When the machine receives the Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi

Direct connection request received. Press [OK] to connect.] will appear on the LCD.

Press [OK] to connect.

1. Press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Manual].

2. The machine will display the SSID name and Password for two minutes. Go to your mobile device's wireless

network settings screen, select the SSID name, and then enter the password.

3. If your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected]. You have completed

the Wi-Fi Direct network setup. For more information on printing from or scanning to your mobile device, go to

your model's Manuals page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to see the Mobile Print/

Scan Guide for Brother iPrint&Scan or the AirPrint Guide.

Related Information

•Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network

•Wi-Fi Direct Network Configuration Overview

358

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features

Advanced Network Features

•Print the Network Configuration Report

•Configure Your Mail Server Settings Using Web Based Management

•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)

•I-Fax Options

•Use the Send Fax to Server Feature

•Print the WLAN Report

•Configure and Operate LDAP Search

•Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management

359

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Print the Network Configuration Report

Print the Network Configuration Report

The Network Configuration Report lists the network configuration, including the network print server settings.

• Node Name: The Node Name appears on the current Network Configuration Report. The default Node

Name is "BRNxxxxxxxxxxxx" for a wired network or "BRWxxxxxxxxxxxx" for a wireless network (where

"xxxxxxxxxxxx" is your machine's MAC Address / Ethernet Address.)

• If the [IP Address] on the Network Configuration Report shows 0.0.0.0, wait for one minute and try

printing it again.

• You can find your machine's settings, such as the IP address, subnet mask, node name, and MAC

Address on the report, for example:

- IP address: 192.168.0.5

- Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

- Node name: BRN000ca0000499

- MAC Address: 00-0c-a0-00-04-99

1. Press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [Network Configuration].

2. Press [Yes].

Related Information

•Advanced Network Features

•Where Can I Find My Brother Machine's Network Settings?

•Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)

•I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly

•Access Web Based Management

•Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management

360

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure Your Mail Server Settings Using Web Based

Management

Configure Your Mail Server Settings Using Web Based Management

Use Web Based Management to configure your Brother machine to connect with your mail server.

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click Protocol in the left navigation bar.

6. In the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP field, click Advanced Settings and make sure the Status is Enabled.

361

362

7. Select the mail server you want to configure.

8. Enter the necessary settings for the mail server.

If you select the IMAP4 option, you must enter the full path of the mail folder using single byte characters

only, and then enter "Inbox" for the root mail folder.

9. When finished, click Submit.

The Test Send/Receive E-mail Configuration dialog box appears.

10. Follow the instructions in the dialog box to test the current settings.

Related Information

•Advanced Network Features

363

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax

(I-Fax)

Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)

Before using I-Fax, configure your Brother machine to communicate with your network and mail server. You can

configure these items using the machine's control panel, Web Based Management, Remote setup, or BRAdmin

Professional. Make sure the following items are configured on your machine:

• IP address (If you are already using your machine on your network, the machine's IP address has been

configured correctly.)

• Email address

• SMTP, POP3, IMAP4 server address/port/Authentication method/Encryption method/Server Certificate

Verification

• Mailbox name and password

If you are unsure of any of these items, contact your system administrator.

Related Information

•Advanced Network Features

•Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)

•Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)

•Send an Internet Fax (I-Fax)

•How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)

•Poll the Server Manually

•How Your Computer Receives an I-Fax

•Forward Received Email and Fax Messages

•Relay Broadcast

•I-Fax Options

364

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax

(I-Fax) > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)

Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)

With Internet Fax (I-Fax), you can send and receive fax documents using the Internet as the transport

mechanism. Documents are transmitted in email messages as attached TIFF-F files. Your computer can send

and receive documents as long as it has an application that can generate and view TIFF-F files. You can use any

TIFF-F viewer application. Documents sent via the machine will be converted into a TIFF‑F format automatically.

If you want to send and receive messages to and from your machine, your computer's email application must

support Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME).

1. Sender

2. Internet

3. Receiver

4. Email server

• I-Fax supports sending and receiving documents in Letter or A4 format and in black and white only.

Related Information

•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)

•Important Information about Internet Fax (I-Fax)

•Forward Received Email and Fax Messages

365

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax

(I-Fax) > Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Important Information about Internet Fax (I-Fax)

Important Information about Internet Fax (I-Fax)

I-Fax communication on a LAN is very similar to communication via email; however, it is different from fax

communication using standard phone lines. The following is important information for using I-Fax:

• Factors such as the receiver's location, structure of the LAN and how busy the circuit (such as the Internet) is

may cause the system to take a longer time than usual to send an error mail.

• When sending confidential documents, we recommend using standard phone lines instead of the Internet

(due to its low level of security).

• If the receiver's mail system is not MIME-compatible, you cannot use I-Fax to send documents. If possible,

find out in advance, and note that some servers will not send an error reply.

• If a document is too large to send via I-Fax, it may not reach the receiver.

• You cannot change the font or size of the text in any Internet mail you receive.

Related Information

•Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)

366

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax

(I-Fax) > Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)

Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)

Before sending your I-Fax, use the control panel, Web Based Management, or Remote Setup to configure the

following optional items:

•E-mail Subject

•E-mail Message

•Size Limit

•Request Delivery Notification (Send)

If you are unsure of any of these items, contact your system administrator.

Related Information

•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)

•Forward Received Email and Fax Messages

367

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax

(I-Fax) > Send an Internet Fax (I-Fax)

Send an Internet Fax (I-Fax)

Sending an I-Fax is like sending a normal fax. Make sure that your recipient's information is saved in your email

address book, and load the document you want to I-Fax into your Brother machine.

• If the computer to which you want to send a document is not running Windows XP, Windows Server

2003/2008/2012/2012 R2, Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows 8, ask the computer's owner to

install software that can view TIFF-F files.

• To send multiple pages, use the ADF.

1. Load your document.

2. Do one of the following:

• If Fax Preview is set to [Off], press [Fax].

• If Fax Preview is set to [On], press [Fax], and then press [Sending Fax(es)].

3. To change the fax-sending settings, press [Options].

4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll through the fax settings. When the setting you want appears, press

it and select your preference. When you have finished changing settings, press [OK].

5. Do one of the following:

• Press , and then enter the email address using the touchscreen.

• Press [Address Book], select the email address of your recipient, and then press [Apply].

6. Press [Fax Start].

The machine starts scanning. After the document is scanned, it is transmitted to the recipient via your SMTP

server. You can cancel the send operation by pressing during scanning.

7. Press .

Related Information

•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)

•How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine

368

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax

(I-Fax) > How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)

How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)

When your Brother machine receives an incoming I-Fax, it will print the I-Fax automatically. To receive an I-

Fax, we recommend using the control panel or Web Based Management to configure the following optional

items:

•Auto Polling

•Polling Frequency

•Print Mail Header

•Delete/Read Receive Error Mail

•Send Delivery Notification (Receive)

There are two ways you can receive email messages:

• POP3/IMAP4 receiving at regular intervals

• POP3/IMAP4 receiving, manually initiated

When using POP3/IMAP4 receiving, the machine polls your email server to receive data. Polling can occur at set

intervals (for example, you can configure the machine to poll the email server every ten minutes) or you can

manually poll the server.

• If your machine starts to receive email data, the LCD displays [Receiving].The email will be printed

automatically.

• If your machine is out of paper when receiving data, the received data will be held in the machine's

memory. This data will be printed automatically after paper is reloaded in the paper tray.

• When the machine's Temporary Fax Backup Function is turned on, received data will be stored for a

certain period of time.

• If the received mail is not in a plain text format, or an attached file is not in the TIFF-F format, the error

message "ATTACHED FILE FORMAT NOT SUPPORTED" will be printed.

• If the received mail is too large, the error message "E-MAIL FILE TOO LARGE" will be printed.

• If Delete/Read Receive Error Mail is On (default), then the error mail will be deleted from the email

server automatically.

369

Related Information

•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)

•Store Incoming Faxes in the Machine's Memory

•How Your Computer Receives an I-Fax

•Forward Received Email and Fax Messages

370

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax

(I-Fax) > Poll the Server Manually

Poll the Server Manually

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail/IFAX] > [Manual POP3

Receive].

2. Press [Yes] to confirm.

3. The LCD displays [Receiving] and your machine will print the data from the email server.

Related Information

•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)

371

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax

(I-Fax) > How Your Computer Receives an I-Fax

How Your Computer Receives an I-Fax

When your computer receives an I-Fax, you will receive an email in your email application. The incoming I-Fax is

attached to an email message that notifies you in its Subject line that your email server has received an I-Fax.

You can either wait for your Brother machine to poll the email server, or you can manually poll the email server to

receive the incoming data.

Related Information

•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)

•How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)

372

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax

(I-Fax) > Forward Received Email and Fax Messages

Forward Received Email and Fax Messages

Use Brother's I-Fax feature to forward email or standard fax messages to another computer, to a fax machine, or

to another I-Fax machine. Enable the Forwarding feature using your machine's control panel.

To enable forwarding using your machine's control panel :

1. Press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive] >

[Fax Forward].

2. Enter the recipient's fax number or email address using the touchscreen.

3. Select the file type you want.

4. Do one of the following:

• Press [Manual] to enter the forwarding fax number (up to 20 characters) using the LCD.

Press [OK].

• Press [Address Book].

Swipe up or down or press a or b to display to scroll until you find the fax number or email address where

you want your faxes to be forwarded.

Press the fax number or email address you want.

Press [Backup Print: On] to print received faxes at your machine so you will have a copy.

5. Press .

Related Information

•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)

•How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine

•Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)

•Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)

•How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)

373

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax

(I-Fax) > Relay Broadcast

Relay Broadcast

A Relay Broadcast is when your Brother machine receives a message over the Internet and then relays it to

another fax machine using conventional telephone lines. If you must fax a document over a long distance or

abroad, use the Relay Broadcast Function to save the communication fee.

1. The Internet

2. Telephone line

3. Email server

Use the Brother machine's control panel or Web Based Management to configure the following items:

•Relay Broadcast Function

Set the Relay Broadcast Function to On.

•Relay Domain

Configure your machine's domain name on the machine that will broadcast the document to the conventional

fax machine. If you wish to use your machine as a relay broadcast device, you must specify the trusted

domain name (the portion of the name after the "@" sign) at the machine. Use care in selecting a trusted

domain: any user on a trusted domain will be able to send a relay broadcast. You can register up to ten

domain names.

•Relay Broadcast Report

Specify whether or not you want a report to print after the machine completes the relay broadcast.

374

Related Information

•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)

•Relay Broadcast from Your Brother Machine

•Relay Broadcast from Your Computer

375

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax

(I-Fax) > Relay Broadcast > Relay Broadcast from Your Brother Machine

Relay Broadcast from Your Brother Machine

Use the Relay Broadcast Function to send email from your machine to a conventional fax machine.

FAX@brother.com UKFAX@brother.co.uk 123456789

UKFAX@brother.co.uk(fax#123456789)

1. The Internet

In this example, your machine's email address is FAX@brother.com and you want to send a document from your

machine to a standard fax machine in England with the email address UKFAX@brother.co.uk, and you want your

machine to send the document using a conventional telephone line.

1. Load your document.

2. Do one of the following:

• If Fax Preview is set to [Off], press [Fax].

• If Fax Preview is set to [On], press [Fax], and then press [Sending Fax(es)].

3. Press [Options].

4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Broadcasting] option.

5. Press [Broadcasting].

6. Press [Add Number].

7. You can add email addresses to the broadcast in the following ways:

• Press [Add Number] and press , enter the email address and press [OK].

• Press [Add from Address book]. Press the check box of the email address you want to add to the

broadcast. After you have selected all the email addresses you want, press [OK].

• Press [Search in Address book]. Enter the name and press [OK]. The search results will be

displayed. Press the name and then press the email address you want to add to the broadcast.

The following is an example of how to enter the email address and phone number:

UKFAX@brother.co.uk(fax#123456789)

email address

Fax Phone Number

The word "fax#" must be

included with the phone

number inside the parenthesis.

After you have entered all of the fax numbers, press [OK].

8. Press [Fax Start].

376

Related Information

•Relay Broadcast

•How to Enter Text on Your Brother Machine

377

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax

(I-Fax) > Relay Broadcast > Relay Broadcast from Your Computer

Relay Broadcast from Your Computer

Use the Relay Broadcast Function to send email from your computer to a conventional fax machine.

Some email applications do not support sending an email to multiple fax numbers. If your email application

cannot support multiple fax numbers, you can relay to only one fax machine at a time.

UKFAX@brother.co.uk 123456789

UKFAX@brother.co.uk(fax#123456789)

1. The Internet

If you are sending an email to a conventional fax machine, the method of entering the fax machine's fax number

will vary, depending on the mail application you are using.

1. In your email application, create a new mail message and type the email address of the relay machine and

fax number of the first fax machine in the "TO" box.

The following is an example of how to enter the email address and fax number:

UKFAX@brother.co.uk(fax#123456789)

email address

Fax Phone Number

The word "fax#" must be

included with the phone

number inside the parenthesis.

For Microsoft Outlook, the address information must be entered into the address book as follows:

Name: fax#123456789

Email address: UKFAX@brother.co.uk

2. Type the email address of the relay machine and fax number of the second fax machine in the "TO" box.

3. Send the email.

Related Information

•Relay Broadcast

378

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > I-Fax Options

I-Fax Options

•Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail

•Error Mail

•Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)

379

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail

Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail

• Verification Mail for sending allows you to request notification from the receiving station where your I-Fax or

email was received and processed.

• Verification Mail for receiving allows you to transmit a default report back to the sending station after

successfully receiving and processing an I-Fax or email.

To use this feature, set the [Notification] options in the [Setup Mail RX] and [Setup Mail TX]

options of your Brother machine's control panel menu.

Related Information

•I-Fax Options

•Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail

•Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail

380

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification

Mail > Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail

Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail

1. Press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail/IFAX] > [Setup Mail TX] >

[Notification].

2. Select [On] or [Off] to enable or disable the Send Notification feature.

When Send Notification is On, the fax includes an additional field, named Message Disposition Notification

(MDN), that contains message delivery information. By default, Send Notification is set to Off.

Your fax recipient's machine must support the MDN field in order to send a notification report.

3. Press .

Related Information

•Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail

381

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification

Mail > Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail

Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail

1. Press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail/IFAX] > [Setup Mail RX] >

[Notification].

2. Press one of the three possible settings:

Option Description

Receive

Notification On

When Receive Notification is On, a template is sent back to the sender to indicate

successful reception and processing of the message.

These templates depend on the operation requested by the sender.

Example:

SUCCESS: Received From <Mail Address>

Receive

Notification MDN

When Receive Notification is MDN, a report to indicate successful reception and

processing is sent back to the sender if the originating station sent a request

confirmation to the MDN (Message Disposition Notification) field.

Receive

Notification Off

When Receive Notification is Off, all forms of receive notification are disabled and no

message is sent back to the sender regardless of the request.

• To send TX Verification Mail, the Sender must configure these settings:

- Switch [Notification] in [Setup Mail TX] to [On].

- Switch [Header] in [Setup Mail RX] to [All] or [Subject+From+To].

• To receive TX Verification Mail, the Receiver must configure these settings:

- Switch [Notification] in [Setup Mail RX] to [On].

3. Press .

Related Information

•Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail

382

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > I-Fax Options > Error Mail

Error Mail

If there is a delivery error while sending an I-Fax, the mail server will send an error message back to the Brother

machine and the error message will be printed.

If there is an error while receiving an I-Fax, an error message will be printed, for example, "The message being

sent to the machine was not in a TIFF-F format."

To receive the error mail and have it print on your machine, in [Setup Mail RX], switch the [Header] option

to [All] or to [Subject+From+To].

Related Information

•I-Fax Options

383

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature

Use the Send Fax to Server Feature

The Fax to Server feature allows the machine to scan a document and send it over the network to a separate fax

server. The document will then be sent from the server as fax data to the destination fax number over standard

phone lines. When the Fax to Server feature is set to On, all automatic fax transmissions from the machine will

be sent to the fax server for fax transmission.

You can send a fax directly from the machine using the manual fax feature when the Send to Server feature is

on.

Related Information

•Advanced Network Features

•Before Sending a Fax to the Fax Server

•Enable Fax to Server

•Operate Fax to Server

384

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Before Sending a

Fax to the Fax Server

Before Sending a Fax to the Fax Server

To send a document to the fax server, the correct syntax for that server must be used. The destination fax

number must be sent with a prefix and a suffix that match the parameters used by the fax server. In most cases,

the syntax for the prefix is “fax=” and the syntax for the suffix would be the domain name of the fax server email

gateway. The suffix must also include the “@” symbol at the beginning of the suffix. The prefix and the suffix

information must be stored in the machine before you can use the Fax to server function. Destination fax

numbers can be saved in the address book or entered using the dial pad (up to 40-digit numbers). For example:

if you wanted to send a document to a destination fax number of 123-555-0001, use the following syntax:

Your fax server application must support an email gateway.

Related Information

•Use the Send Fax to Server Feature

385

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Enable Fax to

Server

Enable Fax to Server

• Store the prefix/suffix address for the fax server in your Brother machine.

1. Press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Fax to Server].

2. Press [Fax to Server].

3. Press [On].

4. Press [Prefix].

5. Enter the prefix using the touchscreen, and then press [OK].

6. Press [Suffix].

7. Enter the suffix using the touchscreen, and then press [OK].

8. Press .

Related Information

•Use the Send Fax to Server Feature

386

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Operate Fax to

Server

Operate Fax to Server

1. Place the document in the ADF or on the scanner glass.

2. Enter the fax number.

3. Press [Fax Start].

The machine will send the message over a TCP/IP network to the fax server.

Related Information

•Use the Send Fax to Server Feature

387

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Print the WLAN Report

Print the WLAN Report

The WLAN Report reflects your machine's wireless status. If the wireless connection fails, check the error code

on the printed report.

1. Press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [WLAN Report].

2. Press [Yes].

The machine will print the WLAN Report.

3. Press .

If the WLAN Report does not print, check your machine for errors. If there are no visible errors, wait for one

minute and then try to print the report again.

Related Information

•Advanced Network Features

•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes

•My Brother Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or PC-FAX Receive over the Network

•I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly

388

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Print the WLAN Report > Wireless LAN Report Error

Codes

Wireless LAN Report Error Codes

If the Wireless LAN Report shows that the connection failed, check the error code on the printed report and see

the corresponding instructions in the table:

Error Code Problem and Recommended Solutions

TS-01 The wireless setting is not activated, change the wireless setting to ON.

If a network cable is connected to your machine, disconnect it and change the wireless setting of

your machine to ON.

TS-02 The wireless access point/router cannot be detected.

1. Check the following two points:

• Unplug the power to your wireless access point/router, wait for 10 seconds, and then plug

it back in.

• If your WLAN access point/router is using MAC address filtering, confirm that the MAC

address of the Brother machine is allowed in the filter.

2. If you manually entered the SSID and security information (SSID/authentication method/

encryption method/Network Key), the information may be incorrect.

Reconfirm the SSID and security information and re-enter the correct information as

necessary.

How to confirm wireless security information (SSID/authentication method/encryption

method/Network Key)

a. The Default security settings may be provided on a label attached to the WLAN access

point/router. Or the manufacturer's name or model no. of the WLAN access point/router

may be used as the default security settings.

b. See the documentation provided with your WLAN access point/router for information on

how to find the security settings.

• If WLAN access point/router is set to not broadcast the SSID, the SSID will not

automatically be detected. You will have to manually enter the SSID name.

• The Network key may also be described as the Password, Security Key or Encryption

Key.

This device does not support a 5GHz SSID/ESSID and you must select a 2.4 GHz SSID/

ESSID. Make sure the access point/router is set to 2.4 GHz or 2.4 GHz/5 GHz mixed mode.

If you do not know the SSID and wireless security settings of your WLAN access point/router

or how to change the configuration, see the documentation provided with your WLAN access

point/router, ask the manufacturer of your access point/router or ask to your Internet provider

or network administrator.

TS-03 The wireless network and security setting you entered may be incorrect. Reconfirm the wireless

network settings.

If you do not know this information, ask your network administrator.

389

Error Code Problem and Recommended Solutions

TS-04 The Authentication/Encryption methods used by the selected wireless access point/router are

not supported by your machine.

For infrastructure mode, change the authentication and encryption methods of the wireless

access point/router. Your machine supports the following authentication methods:

• WPA-Personal

TKIP or AES

• WPA2-Personal

AES

• Open

WEP or None (without encryption)

• Shared key

WEP

If your problem is not solved, the SSID or network settings you entered may be incorrect.

Confirm the wireless network settings.

For Ad-Hoc Mode, change the authentication and encryption methods of your computer for the

wireless setting. Your machine supports Open authentication only, with optional WEP

encryption.

TS-05 The security information (SSID/Network Key) is incorrect.

Confirm the SSID and Network Key. If your router uses WEP encryption, enter the key used as

the first WEP key. Your Brother machine supports the use of the first WEP key only.

TS-06 The wireless security information (Authentication method/Encryption method/Network Key) is

incorrect.

Confirm the wireless security information (Authentication method/Encryption method/Network

Key) listed in TS-04. If your router uses WEP encryption, enter the key used as the first WEP

key. Your Brother machine supports the use of the first WEP key only.

TS-07 The machine cannot detect a WLAN access point/router that has WPS enabled.

If you would like to connect with WPS, you must operate both your machine and the WLAN

access point/router. Confirm the connection method for WPS on WLAN access point/router and

try starting again.

If you do not know how to operate your WLAN access point/router using WPS, see the

documentation provided with your WLAN access point/router, ask the manufacturer of your

WLAN access point/router or ask your network administrator.

TS-08 Two or more WLAN access points that have WPS enabled are detected.

• Confirm that only one WLAN access point/router within range has the WPS method active

and try again.

• Try starting again after few minutes in order to avoid effects from other access points.

Related Information

•Print the WLAN Report

•My Brother Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or PC-FAX Receive over the Network

•I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly

•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™

(WPS)

•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)

•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network in Ad-Hoc Mode Using an Existing SSID

•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network in Ad-Hoc Mode Using a New SSID

•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard

•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast

•Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network

390

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure and Operate LDAP Search

Configure and Operate LDAP Search

MFC-L6750DW/MFC-L6900DW: standard

The LDAP feature allows you to search for information, such as fax numbers and email addresses, on your

server. When you use the Fax, I-Fax, or Scan to Email server feature, you can use the LDAP search to find fax

numbers or email addresses.

• The LDAP feature does not support simplified Chinese, traditional Chinese, or Korean.

• The LDAP feature supports LDAPv3.

• The LDAP feature does not support SSL/TLS.

Related Information

•Advanced Network Features

•Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management

•Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel

391

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure and Operate LDAP Search > Change LDAP

Configuration Using Web Based Management

Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management

Use Web Based Management to configure your LDAP settings in a web browser.

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click Network on the machine's web page.

5. Click Protocol in the left navigation bar.

6. Select the LDAP check box, and then click Submit.

7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.

8. On your computer, in Web Based Management's Address Book tab, select LDAP in the left navigation bar.

•LDAP Search

•LDAP Server Address

•Port (The default port number is 389.)

•Search Root

•Authentication

•Username

This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used.

•Password

This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used.

- If the LDAP server supports Kerberos authentication, we recommend selecting Kerberos for the

Authentication settings. It provides strong authentication between the LDAP server and your machine.

- You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time

zone correctly on the control panel for Kerberos authentication.

•Kerberos Server Address

This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used.

•Timeout for LDAP

•Attribute of Name (Search Key)

•Attribute of E-mail

•Attribute of Fax Number

9. When finished, click Submit. Make sure the Status field reads OK.

Related Information

•Configure and Operate LDAP Search

•Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management

392

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Configure and Operate LDAP Search > Perform an

LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel

Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel

After you configure LDAP settings, you can use the LDAP search feature to find fax numbers or email addresses

to use for:

• Sending a Fax

• Sending an Internet Fax (I-Fax)

• Scanning to Email Server

• The LDAP feature supports LDAPv3.

• The LDAP feature does not support SSL/TLS.

• You may need to use Kerberos Authentication or Simple Authentication to connect to your LDAP server,

depending on the security policy set by your network administrator.

• You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time

zone correctly on the control panel for Kerberos authentication.

1. Press to search.

2. Enter the initial characters for your search using the LCD.

3. Press [OK].

The LDAP search result will be shown on the LCD; the icon appears before the email (local) address

book search results.

• If there is no match on the server or the email (local) address book, the LCD displays [Results cannot

be found.] for about 60 seconds.

4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the name you want.

5. Press the name.

To view the details of the name, press [Detail].

6. If the result includes more than one fax number or email address, the machine will prompt you to select just

one. Press [Apply]. Do one of the following:

• If you are sending a fax or an I-Fax, press [Send a fax].

• If you are scanning to the Email Server, load your document, press [OK], and then press [Start].

Related Information

•Configure and Operate LDAP Search

•Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management

393

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web

Based Management

Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management

The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is used to synchronize the time used by the machine for

authentication with the SNTP time server. (This is not the time displayed on the machine's LCD.) You can

automatically or manually synchronize the machine's time with the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) provided

by the SNTP time server.

•Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management

•Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management

•Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based Management

•Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management

•Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel

394

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web

Based Management > Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management

Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management

Configure date and time to synchronize the time used by the machine with the SNTP time server.

This feature is not available in some countries.

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Administrator tab.

5. Click Date&Time in the left navigation bar.

Select the time difference between your location and UTC from the Time Zone drop-down list. For

example, the time zone for Eastern Time in the USA and Canada is UTC-05:00.

6. Verify the Time Zone settings.

7. Select the Synchronize with SNTP server check box.

8. Click Submit.

Related Information

•Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management

395

Home > Network > Advanced Network Features > Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web

Based Management > Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management

Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management

Configure the SNTP protocol to synchronize the time the machine uses for authentication with the time kept by

the SNTP time server.

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click Protocol in the left navigation bar.

6. Select the SNTP check box to activate the settings.

7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.

8. Next to the SNTP check box, click Advanced Settings and follow the instructions below:

Option Description

Status Displays whether the SNTP protocol is enabled or disabled.

Synchronization Status Confirm the latest synchronization status.

SNTP Server Method Select AUTO or STATIC.

•AUTO

If you have a DHCP server in your network, the SNTP server will obtain

the address from that server automatically.

•STATIC

Type the address you want to use.

396

Option Description

Primary SNTP Server

Address

Secondary SNTP Server

Address

Type the server address (up to 64 characters).

The secondary SNTP server address is used as a backup to the primary

SNTP server address. If the primary server is unavailable, the machine will

contact the secondary SNTP server.

Primary SNTP Server Port

Secondary SNTP Server

Port

Type the port number (1-65535).

The secondary SNTP server port is used as a backup to the primary SNTP

server port. If the primary port is unavailable, the machine will contact the

secondary SNTP port.

Synchronization Interval Type the number of hours between server synchronization attempts (1-168

hours).

9. Click Submit.

Related Information

•Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management

•Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based Management

397

Home > Network > Technical Information for Advanced Users

Technical Information for Advanced Users

•Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)

•Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings

398

Home > Network > Technical Information for Advanced Users > Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)

Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)

Your machine supports 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet. To connect to a 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet Network,

you must set the machine’s Ethernet link mode to Auto from the machine’s control panel or Web Based

Management (web browser).

• Use a straight-through Category 5 (or greater) twisted-pair cable for 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX Fast

Ethernet Network, or 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet Network. When you connect the machine to a

Gigabit Ethernet Network, use the network devices complying with 1000BASE-T.

Related Information

•Technical Information for Advanced Users

•Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management

399

Home > Network > Technical Information for Advanced Users > Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network

Only) > Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management

Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click Wired.

6. Click Ethernet in the left navigation bar.

7. Select Auto from the Ethernet Mode drop-down list.

8. Click Submit.

9. To enable the settings, restart your machine.

You can confirm your settings by printing the Network Configuration Report.

Related Information

•Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)

•Print the Network Configuration Report

400

Home > Network > Technical Information for Advanced Users > Reset the Network Settings to the Factory

Settings

Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings

You can use your machine's control panel to reset the print server to its default factory settings. This resets all

information, such as the password and IP address.

• This feature restores all wired (supported models only) and wireless network settings to the factory

settings.

• You can also reset the print server to its factory settings using BRAdmin Light, BRAdmin Professional,

or Web Based Management.

1. Press [ ] [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Network Reset].

2. [Machine will reboot after resetting. Press [OK] for 2 seconds to confirm.]

appears. Press [OK] for two seconds to confirm.

The machine will restart.

Related Information

•Technical Information for Advanced Users

401

Home > Security

Security

•Lock the Machine Settings

•Network Security Features

402

Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings

Lock the Machine Settings

Before turning on the machine's Access Lock, make a careful note of your password. If you forget the password,

you must reset all passwords stored in the machine by contacting your administrator or Brother Customer

Service.

•About Using Setting Lock

403

Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings > About Using Setting Lock

About Using Setting Lock

Use the Setting Lock feature to block unauthorized access to machine settings.

When Setting Lock is set to [On], you cannot access the machine settings without entering the password.

•Set the Setting Lock Password

•Change the Setting Lock Password

•Turn On Setting Lock

404

Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings > About Using Setting Lock > Set the Setting Lock Password

Set the Setting Lock Password

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock].

2. Enter a four-digit number for the password.

3. Press [OK].

4. When the LCD displays [Verify:], re-enter the password.

5. Press [OK].

6. Press .

Related Information

•About Using Setting Lock

405

Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings > About Using Setting Lock > Change the Setting Lock

Password

Change the Setting Lock Password

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock] > [Set

Password].

2. Enter the current four-digit password.

3. Press [OK].

4. Enter a new four-digit password.

5. Press [OK].

6. When the LCD displays [Verify:], re-enter the password.

7. Press [OK].

8. Press .

Related Information

•About Using Setting Lock

406

Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings > About Using Setting Lock > Turn On Setting Lock

Turn On Setting Lock

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock] > [Lock

Off⇒On].

2. Enter the current four-digit password.

3. Press [OK].

To turn [Off] Setting Lock, press on the LCD, enter the current four-digit password, and then press

[OK].

Related Information

•About Using Setting Lock

407

Home > Security > Network Security Features

Network Security Features

•Before Using Network Security Features

•Secure Function Lock 3.0

•Use Active Directory Authentication

•Use LDAP Authentication

•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS

•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using IPsec

•Send or Receive an Email Securely

•Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network

•Store Print Log to Network

408

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Before Using Network Security Features

Before Using Network Security Features

Your Brother machine employs some of the latest network security and encryption protocols available today.

These network features can be integrated into your overall network security plan to help protect your data and

prevent unauthorized access to the machine.

We recommend disabling the Telnet, FTP server and TFTP protocols. Accessing the machine using these

protocols is not secure.

Related Information

•Network Security Features

409

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Secure Function Lock 3.0

Secure Function Lock 3.0

Brother's Secure Function Lock 3.0 increases security by restricting the functions available on your Brother

machine.

•Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0

•Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management

•Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0

•Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0

•Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features

•Register a new ID Card Using Machine's Control Panel

410

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Before Using Secure Function

Lock 3.0

Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0

Use Secure Function Lock to configure passwords, set specific user page limits, and grant access to some or all

of the functions listed here.

You can configure and change the following Secure Function Lock 3.0 settings using Web Based Management

or BRAdmin Professional (Windows):

•Print

Print includes print jobs sent via AirPrint, Google Cloud Print™ and Brother iPrint&Scan.

If you register users' login names in advance, the users will not need to enter their passwords when they use

the print function.

•Copy

•Scan

Scan includes scan jobs sent via Brother iPrint&Scan.

•Send (supported models only)

•Receive (supported models only)

• USB Direct Print

• Scan to USB (supported models only)

•Web Connect (supported models only)

•Apps (supported models only)

•Page Limits

•Page Counters

•Card ID (NFC ID) (supported models only)

If you register users' Card IDs in advance, a registered user can activate the machine by touching his

registered card to the machine's NFC logo.

Related Information

•Secure Function Lock 3.0

411

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Configure Secure Function

Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management

Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Administrator tab.

5. Click the User Restriction Function menu in the left navigation bar.

6. Select Secure Function Lock.

7. Click Submit.

8. Click the Restricted Functions menu in the left navigation bar.

9. In the User List / Restricted Functions field, type a group name or user name (alphanumeric, up to 15

digits).

10. In the Print and the other columns, select a check box to allow or clear a check box to restrict the function

listed.

11. To configure the maximum page count, select the On check box in the Page Limits column, and then type

the maximum number in the Max. Pages field.

12. Click Submit.

13. Click the User List menu in the left navigation bar.

14. In the User List field, type the user name.

15. In the PIN Number field, type a four-digit password.

16. In the E-mail Address field, type the user's email address (Available only for certain models).

If this option is not available, update your machine's firmware. Go to your model's Downloads page on the

Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.

17. To register the user's Card ID, type the card number in the Card ID (NFC ID) field (Available only for certain

models).

18. Select User List / Restricted Functions from the drop-down list for each user.

19. Click Submit.

Related Information

•Secure Function Lock 3.0

412

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Scan Using Secure Function

Lock 3.0

Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0

Setting Scan restrictions (for administrators)

Secure Function Lock 3.0 allows an administrator to restrict which users are allowed to scan. When the Scan

feature is set to Off for the public user setting, only users who have the Scan check box selected will be able to

scan.

Using the Scan feature (for restricted users)

• To scan using the machine's control panel:

Restricted users must enter their PINs on the machine's control panel to access Scan mode.

• To scan from a computer:

Restricted users must enter their PINs on the machine's control panel before scanning from their computers.

If the PIN is not entered on the machine's control panel, an error message will appear on the user's computer.

Related Information

•Secure Function Lock 3.0

413

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Configure Public Mode for

Secure Function Lock 3.0

Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0

Use the Secure Function Lock screen to set up Public Mode, which limits the functions available to public users.

Public users will not need to enter a password to access the features made available through Public Mode

settings.

Public Mode includes print jobs sent via AirPrint, Google Cloud Print™ and Brother iPrint&Scan.

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Administrator tab.

5. Click the User Restriction Function menu in the left navigation bar.

6. Select Secure Function Lock.

7. Click Submit.

8. Click the Restricted Functions menu.

9. In the Public Mode row, select a check box to allow or clear a check box to restrict the function listed.

10. Click Submit.

Related Information

•Secure Function Lock 3.0

414

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Additional Secure Function

Lock 3.0 Features

Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features

Configure the following features in the Secure Function Lock screen:

All Counter Reset

Click All Counter Reset, in the Page Counters column, to reset the page counter.

Export to CSV file

Click Export to CSV file, to export the current page counter including User List / Restricted Functions

information as a CSV file.

Card ID (NFC ID) (supported models only)

Click the User List menu, and then type a users' Card ID in the Card ID (NFC ID) field. You can use your ID

card for authentication.

Last Counter Record

Click Last Counter Record if you want the machine to retain the page count after the counter has been reset.

Counter Auto Reset

Click Counter Auto Reset to configure the time interval you want between page counter reset. Choose a

daily, weekly, or monthly interval.

Related Information

•Secure Function Lock 3.0

415

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Secure Function Lock 3.0 > Register a new ID Card Using

Machine's Control Panel

Related Models: MFC-L6900DW

1. Touch the NFC logo on the machine's control panel with a registered ID Card.

2. Press [Register Card].

3. Touch a new ID Card to the NFC logo.

The new ID Card's number is registered to the machine.

For the supported ID Card types, go to the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com to see FAQs &

Troubleshooting.

4. Press [OK].

Related Information

•Secure Function Lock 3.0

416

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use Active Directory Authentication

Use Active Directory Authentication

•Introduction to Active Directory Authentication

•Configure Active Directory Authentication Using Web Based Management

•Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (Active

Directory Authentication)

417

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use Active Directory Authentication > Introduction to Active

Directory Authentication

Introduction to Active Directory Authentication

Active Directory Authentication restricts the use of your Brother machine. If Active Directory Authentication is

enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked. You cannot change the machine's settings until you enter a

User ID and password.

Active Directory Authentication offers the following features:

• Stores incoming print data

• Stores incoming fax data

• Obtains the email address from the LDAP server based on your User ID, when sending scanned data to an

email server.

To use this feature, select the On option for the Get Mail Address setting and LDAP + kerberos

authentication method. Your email address will be set as the sender when the machine sends scanned data

to an email server. If the machine cannot locate your email address, the machine's email address will be set

as the sender.

When Active Directory Authentication is enabled, your machine stores all incoming fax data. After you log on, the

machine prints the stored fax data.

You can change the Active Directory Authentication settings using Web Based Management or BRAdmin

Professional (Windows).

Related Information

•Use Active Directory Authentication

418

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use Active Directory Authentication > Configure Active

Directory Authentication Using Web Based Management

Configure Active Directory Authentication Using Web Based

Management

Active Directory authentication supports Kerberos authentication and NTLMv2 authentication. You must

configure the SNTP protocol (network time server) and DNS server configuration for authentication.

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Administrator tab.

5. Click the User Restriction Function menu in the left navigation bar.

6. Select Active Directory Authentication.

7. Click Submit.

8. Select Active Directory Authentication in the left navigation bar.

9. Configure the following settings:

Option Description

Storage PC Print Data Select this option to store incoming print data. After you log on to the

machine, your PC print jobs will be printed automatically. This feature is

available only for print data created by a Brother native printer driver.

Storage Fax RX Data Select this option to store incoming fax data. You can print all incoming fax

data after you log on to the machine.

Remember User ID Select this option to save your User ID.

Active Directory Server

Address

Type the IP address or the server name (for example: ad.example.com) of

the Active Directory Server.

Active Directory Domain

Name

Type the Active Directory domain name.

Protocol & Authentication

Method

Select the protocol and authentication method.

Get Mail Address 1 Select this option to obtain logged on user's email address from the LDAP

server. (available only for LDAP + kerberos authentication method)

Get User's Home Directory

Select this option to obtain your home directory as the Scan to Network

destination. (available only for LDAP + kerberos authentication method)

LDAP Server Port Type the LDAP server port number (available only for LDAP + kerberos

authentication method).

LDAP Search Root Type the LDAP search root (available only for LDAP + kerberos

authentication method).

1If this option is not available, update your machine's firmware. Go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center

at support.brother.com.

10. Click Submit.

419

Related Information

•Use Active Directory Authentication

420

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use Active Directory Authentication > Log On to Change

the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (Active Directory Authentication)

Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control

Panel (Active Directory Authentication)

When Active Directory Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked until you enter

your User ID and password on the machine's control panel.

1. On the machine's control panel, use the touchscreen to enter your User ID and Password.

2. Press [OK].

3. When authentication is successful, the machine's control panel will be unlocked.

Related Information

•Use Active Directory Authentication

421

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use LDAP Authentication

Use LDAP Authentication

•Introduction to LDAP Authentication

•Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based Management

•Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (LDAP

Authentication)

422

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use LDAP Authentication > Introduction to LDAP

Authentication

Introduction to LDAP Authentication

LDAP Authentication restricts the use of your Brother machine. If LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's

control panel will be locked. You cannot change the machine's settings until you enter a User ID and password.

LDAP Authentication offers the following features:

• Stores incoming print data

• Stores incoming fax data

• Obtains the email address from the LDAP server based on your User ID, when sending scanned data to an

email server.

To use this feature, select the On option for the Get Mail Address setting. Your email address will be set as

the sender when the machine sends scanned data to an email server. If the machine cannot locate your

email address, the machine's email address will be set as the sender.

When LDAP Authentication is enabled, your machine stores all incoming fax data. After you log on, the machine

prints the stored fax data.

You can change the LDAP Authentication settings using Web Based Management or BRAdmin Professional

(Windows).

Related Information

•Use LDAP Authentication

423

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use LDAP Authentication > Configure LDAP

Authentication Using Web Based Management

Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based Management

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Administrator tab.

5. Click the User Restriction Function menu in the left navigation bar.

6. Select LDAP Authentication.

7. Click Submit.

8. Click LDAP Authentication in the left navigation bar.

9. Configure the following settings:

Option Description

Storage PC Print Data Select this option to store incoming print data. After you log on to the

machine, your PC print jobs will be printed automatically. This feature is

available only for print data created by a Brother native printer driver.

Storage Fax RX Data Select this option to store incoming fax data. You can print all incoming fax

data after you log on to the machine.

Remember User ID Select this option to save your User ID.

LDAP Server Address Type the IP address or the server name (for example: ad.example.com) of

the LDAP server.

Get Mail Address 1 Select this option to obtain logged on user's email address from the LDAP

server.

Get User's Home

Directory 1

Select this option to obtain your home directory as the Scan to Network

destination.

LDAP Server Port Type the LDAP server port number.

LDAP Search Root Type the LDAP search root directory.

Attribute of Name (Search

Key)

Type the attribute you want to use as a search key.

1If this option is not available, update your machine's firmware. Go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center

at support.brother.com.

10. Click Submit.

Related Information

•Use LDAP Authentication

424

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use LDAP Authentication > Log On to Change the

Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (LDAP Authentication)

Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control

Panel (LDAP Authentication)

When LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked until you enter your User ID

and password on the machine's control panel.

1. On the machine's control panel, use the touchscreen to enter your User ID and Password.

2. Press [OK].

3. When authentication is successful, the machine's control panel will be unlocked.

Related Information

•Use LDAP Authentication

425

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS

Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS

•Introduction to SSL/TLS

•Certificates and Web Based Management

•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using Web Based Management

•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using BRAdmin Professional (Windows)

•Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS

426

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS

Introduction to SSL/TLS

Secure Socket Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) is an effective method of protecting data sent over

a local or wide area network (LAN or WAN). It works by encrypting data, such as a print job, sent over a network,

so anyone trying to capture it will not be able to read it.

SSL/TLS can be configured on both wired and wireless networks and will work with other forms of security such

as WPA keys and firewalls.

Related Information

•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS

•Brief History of SSL/TLS

•Benefits of Using SSL/TLS

427

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS > Brief History of SSL/TLS

Brief History of SSL/TLS

SSL/TLS was originally created to secure web traffic information, particularly data sent between web browsers

and servers. For example, when you use Internet Explorer for Internet Banking and you see https:// and the little

padlock icon in the web browser, you are using SSL. SSL grew to work with additional applications, such as

Telnet, printer, and FTP software, in order to become a universal solution for online security. Its original design

intentions are still being used today by many online retailers and banks to secure sensitive data, such as credit

card numbers, customer records, etc.

SSL/TLS uses extremely high levels of encryption and is trusted by banks all over the world.

Related Information

•Introduction to SSL/TLS

428

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Introduction to SSL/TLS > Benefits of Using SSL/TLS

Benefits of Using SSL/TLS

The primary benefit of using SSL/TLS on Brother machines is to guarantee secure printing over an IP network by

restricting unauthorized users from reading data sent to the machine. SSL's key selling point is that it can be

used to print confidential data securely. For example, an HR department in a large company may be printing

wage slips on a regular basis. Without encryption, the data contained on these wages slips can be read by other

network users. However, with SSL/TLS, anyone trying to capture the data will see a confusing page of code and

not the actual wage slip.

Related Information

•Introduction to SSL/TLS

429

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management

Certificates and Web Based Management

You must configure a certificate to manage your networked Brother machine securely using SSL/TLS. You must

use Web Based Management to configure a certificate.

•Supported Security Certificate Features

•Create and Install a Certificate

•Manage Multiple Certificates

430

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Supported Security Certificate Features

Supported Security Certificate Features

Your Brother machine supports the use of multiple security certificates, which allows secure management,

authentication, and communication with the machine. The following security certificate features can be used with

the machine:

• SSL/TLS communication

• SSL communcation for SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 (only available for certain models)

• IEEE 802.1x authentication

• IPsec

The Brother machine supports the following:

• Pre-installed certificate

Your machine has a pre-installed self-signed certificate. This certificate enables you to use SSL/TLS

communication without creating or installing a different certificate.

The pre-installed self-signed certificate cannot protect your communication from being compromised. We

recommend using a certificate that is issued by a trusted organization for better security.

• Self-signed certificate

This print server issues its own certificate. Using this certificate, you can easily use the SSL/TLS

communication without creating or installing a different certificate from a CA.

• Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)

There are two methods for installing a certificate from a CA. If you already have a certificate from a CA or if

you want to use a certificate from an external trusted CA:

- When using a Certificates Signing Request (CSR) from this print server.

- When importing a certificate and a private key.

• Certificate Authority (CA) Certificate

To use a CA certificate that identifies the CA and owns its private key, you must import that CA certificate

from the CA before configuring the security features of the Network.

• If you are going to use SSL/TLS communication, we recommend contacting your system administrator

first.

• When you reset the print server back to its default factory settings, the certificate and the private key

that are installed will be deleted. If you want to keep the same certificate and the private key after

resetting the print server, export them before resetting, and then reinstall them.

Related Information

•Certificates and Web Based Management

431

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate

Create and Install a Certificate

•Step by Step Guide for Creating and Installing a Certificate

•Create and Install a Self-signed Certificate

•Create and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)

•Import and Export a CA Certificate

432

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Step by Step Guide for

Creating and Installing a Certificate

Step by Step Guide for Creating and Installing a Certificate

There are two options when choosing a security certificate: use a self-signed certificate or use a certificate from a

Certificate Authority (CA).

These are a brief summary of the actions required, based on the option you choose.

Option 1

Self-Signed Certificate

1. Create a self-signed certificate using Web Based Management.

2. Install the self-signed certificate on your computer.

Option 2

Certificate from a CA

1. Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) using Web Based Management.

2. Install the certificate issued by the CA on your Brother machine using Web Based Management.

3. Install the certificate on your computer.

Related Information

•Create and Install a Certificate

433

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a Self-

signed Certificate

Create and Install a Self-signed Certificate

•Create a Self-signed Certificate

•Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows users with Administrator Rights

•Import and Export the Self-signed Certificate on your Brother Machine

434

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a Self-

signed Certificate > Create a Self-signed Certificate

Create a Self-signed Certificate

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such

as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.

- For example:

http://SharedPrinter

If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.

- For example:

http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx

The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.

• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor

screen.

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click the Security tab.

6. Click Certificate.

7. Click Create Self-Signed Certificate.

8. Enter a Common Name and a Valid Date.

• The length of the Common Name is less than 64 bytes. Enter an identifier, such as an IP address, node

name, or domain name to use when accessing this machine through SSL/TLS communication. The node

name is displayed by default.

• A warning will appear if you use the IPPS or HTTPS protocol and enter a different name in the URL than

the Common Name that was used for the self-signed certificate.

9. Select your setting from the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is RSA(2048bit).

10. Select your setting from the Digest Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is SHA256.

11. Click Submit.

12. Click Network.

13. Click Protocol.

14. Click HTTP Server Settings.

15. Select the certificate you want to configure from the Select the Certificate drop-down list.

16. Click Submit.

The following screen appears.

435

17. Click Yes to restart your print server.

The self-signed certificate is created and saved in your machine's memory.

To use SSL/TLS communication, the self-signed certificate must be installed on your computer.

Related Information

•Create and Install a Self-signed Certificate

436

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a Self-

signed Certificate > Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows users with Administrator Rights

Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows users with Administrator

Rights

The following steps are for Microsoft Internet Explorer. If you use another web browser, consult the

documentation for your web browser to get help with installing certificates.

1. Do one of the following:

• (Windows XP and Windows Server 2003)

Start your web browser, and then go to step 3.

• (Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008)

Click (Start) > All Programs.

• (Windows 8)

Right-click the (Internet Explorer) icon on the taskbar.

• (Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2)

Click (Internet Explorer), and then right-click the (Internet Explorer) icon that appears on the

taskbar.

2. Right-click Internet Explorer, and then click Run as administrator.

If the User Account Control screen appears,

• (Windows Vista) Click Continue (Allow).

• (Windows 7/Windows 8) Click Yes.

3. Type "https://machine's IP address/" in your browser's address bar to access your machine (where

"machine's IP address" is the machine's IP address or the node name that you assigned for the certificate).

437

4. Click Continue to this website (not recommended).

(Windows XP and Windows Server 2003)

When the following dialog box appears, click View Certificate, and then go to step 6.

5. Click Certificate Error, and then click View certificates.

438

6. Click Install Certificate....

7. When the Certificate Import Wizard appears, click Next.

8. Select Place all certificates in the following store, and then click Browse....

439

9. Select Trusted Root Certification Authorities, and then click OK.

10. Click Next.

11. Click Finish.

12. Click Yes, if the fingerprint (thumbprint) is correct.

The fingerprint (thumbprint) is printed on the Network Configuration Report.

13. Click OK.

The self-signed certificate is now installed on your computer, and SSL/TLS communication is available.

Related Information

•Create and Install a Self-signed Certificate

440

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a Self-

signed Certificate > Import and Export the Self-signed Certificate on your Brother Machine

Import and Export the Self-signed Certificate on your Brother Machine

You can store the self-signed certificates on your Brother machine and manage them by importing and exporting.

•Import the Self-signed Certificate

•Export the Self-signed Certificate

441

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a Self-

signed Certificate > Import and Export the Self-signed Certificate on your Brother Machine > Import the Self-

signed Certificate

Import the Self-signed Certificate

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such

as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.

- For example:

http://SharedPrinter

If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.

- For example:

http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx

The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.

• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor

screen.

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click the Security tab.

6. Click Certificate.

7. Click Import Certificate and Private Key.

8. Browse to the file you want to import.

9. Type the password if the file is encrypted, and then click Submit.

The self-signed certificate is imported to your machine.

To use SSL/TLS communication, the self-signed certificate must also be installed on your computer. Contact your

network administrator.

Related Information

•Import and Export the Self-signed Certificate on your Brother Machine

442

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a Self-

signed Certificate > Import and Export the Self-signed Certificate on your Brother Machine > Export the Self-

signed Certificate

Export the Self-signed Certificate

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such

as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.

- For example:

http://SharedPrinter

If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.

- For example:

http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx

The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.

• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor

screen.

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click the Security tab.

6. Click Certificate.

7. Click Export shown with Certificate List.

8. If you want to encrypt the file, type a password in the Enter password field.

If the Enter password field is blank, your output file will not be encrypted.

9. Type the password again in the Retype password field, and then click Submit.

10. Click Save.

11. Specify the location where you want to save the file.

The self-signed certificate is exported to your computer.

You can also import the self-signed certificate to your computer.

Related Information

•Import and Export the Self-signed Certificate on your Brother Machine

443

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a

Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)

Create and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)

If you already have a certificate from an external trusted CA, you can store the certificate and private key on the

machine and manage them by importing and exporting. If you do not have a certificate from an external trusted

CA, create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR), send it to a CA for authentication, and install the returned

certificate on your machine.

•Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)

•Install a Certificate on Your Brother Machine

•Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key

444

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a

Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)

Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)

A Certificate Signing Request (CSR) is a request sent to a Certificate Authority (CA) to authenticate the

credentials contained within the certificate.

We recommend installing a Root Certificate from the CA on your computer before creating the CSR.

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such

as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.

- For example:

http://SharedPrinter

If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.

- For example:

http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx

The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.

• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor

screen.

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click the Security tab.

6. Click Certificate.

7. Click Create CSR.

8. Type a Common Name (required) and add other information about your Organization (optional).

• Your company details are required so that a CA can confirm your identity and verify it to the outside

world.

• The length of the Common Name must be less than 64 bytes. Enter an identifier, such as an IP

address, node name, or domain name to use when accessing this printer through SSL/TLS

communication. The node name is displayed by default. The Common Name is required.

• A warning will appear if you type a different name in the URL than the Common Name that was used for

the certificate.

• The length of the Organization, the Organization Unit, the City/Locality and the State/Province must

be less than 64 bytes.

• The Country/Region should be a two character ISO 3166 country code.

• If you are configuring an X.509v3 certificate extension, select the Configure extended partition check

box, and then select Auto (Register IPv4) or Manual.

9. Select your setting from the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is RSA(2048bit).

10. Select your setting from the Digest Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is SHA256.

11. Click Submit.

The CSR appears on your screen. Save the CSR as a file or copy and paste it into an online CSR form

offered by a Certificate Authority.

445

12. Click Save.

• Follow your CA's policy regarding the method to send a CSR to your CA.

• If you are using the Enterprise root CA of Windows Server 2003/2008/2012/2012 R2, we recommend

using the Web Server for the certificate template to securely create the Client Certificate. If you are

creating a Client Certificate for an IEEE 802.1x environment with EAP-TLS authentication, we

recommend using User for the certificate template. For more information, go to your model's page on

the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.

Related Information

•Create and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)

446

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a

Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Install a Certificate on Your Brother Machine

Install a Certificate on Your Brother Machine

When you receive a certificate from a CA, follow the steps below to install it into the print server:

Only a certificate issued with your machine's CSR can be installed onto the machine. When you want to create

another CSR, make sure that the certificate is installed before creating another CSR. Create another CSR only

after installing the certificate on the machine. If you do not, the CSR you create before installing will be invalid.

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such

as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.

- For example:

http://SharedPrinter

If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.

- For example:

http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx

The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.

• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor

screen.

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click the Security tab.

6. Click Certificate.

7. Click Install Certificate.

8. Browse to the file that contains the certificate issued by the CA, and then click Submit.

The certificate has been created successfully and saved in your machine's memory successfully.

To use SSL/TLS communication, the Root Certificate from the CA must be installed on your computer. Contact

your network administrator.

Related Information

•Create and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)

447

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a

Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key

Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key

Store the certificate and private key on your machine and manage them by importing and exporting them.

•Import a Certificate and Private Key

•Export the Certificate and Private Key

448

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a

Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key > Import a

Certificate and Private Key

Import a Certificate and Private Key

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such

as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.

- For example:

http://SharedPrinter

If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.

- For example:

http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx

The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.

• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor

screen.

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click the Security tab.

6. Click Certificate.

7. Click Import Certificate and Private Key.

8. Browse to the file you want to import.

9. Type the password if the file is encrypted, and then click Submit.

The certificate and private key are imported to your machine.

To use SSL/TLS communication, the Root Certificate from the CA must also be installed on your computer.

Contact your network administrator.

Related Information

•Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key

449

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Create and Install a

Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA) > Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key > Export the

Certificate and Private Key

Export the Certificate and Private Key

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such

as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.

- For example:

http://SharedPrinter

If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.

- For example:

http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx

The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.

• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor

screen.

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click the Security tab.

6. Click Certificate.

7. Click Export shown with Certificate List.

8. Enter the password if you want to encrypt the file.

If a blank password is used, the output is not encrypted.

9. Enter the password again for confirmation, and then click Submit.

10. Click Save.

11. Specify the location where you want to save the file.

The certificate and private key are exported to your computer.

You can also import the certificate to your computer.

Related Information

•Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key

450

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Import and Export a CA

Certificate

Import and Export a CA Certificate

You can import, export and store CA certificates on your Brother machine.

•Import a CA Certificate

•Export a CA Certificate

451

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Import and Export a CA

Certificate > Import a CA Certificate

Import a CA Certificate

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such

as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.

- For example:

http://SharedPrinter

If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.

- For example:

http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx

The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.

• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor

screen.

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click the Security tab.

6. Click CA Certificate.

7. Click Import CA Certificate.

8. Browse to the file you want to import.

9. Click Submit.

Related Information

•Import and Export a CA Certificate

452

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Create and Install a Certificate > Import and Export a CA

Certificate > Export a CA Certificate

Export a CA Certificate

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such

as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.

- For example:

http://SharedPrinter

If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.

- For example:

http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx

The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.

• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor

screen.

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click the Security tab.

6. Click CA Certificate.

7. Select the certificate you want to export and click Export.

8. Click Submit.

9. Click Save.

10. Specify where on your computer you want to save the exported certificate, and save it.

Related Information

•Import and Export a CA Certificate

453

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Certificates and Web Based Management > Manage Multiple Certificates

Manage Multiple Certificates

The multiple certificate feature allows you to use Web Based Management to manage each certificate installed

on your machine. In Web Based Management, navigate to the Certificate or CA Certificate screen to view

certificate content, delete, or export your certificates.

Maximum Number of Certificates Stored UP on Brother Machine

Self-signed Certificate or

Certificate Issued by a CA

CA Certificate 9

We recommend storing one less certificate than allowed, reserving an empty spot in case of certificate expiration.

When a certificate expires, import a new certificate into the reserved spot, and then delete the expired certificate.

This ensures that you avoid configuration failure.

• When you use HTTPS/IPPS, IEEE 802.1x, or Signed PDF, you must select which certificate you are

using.

• When you use SSL for SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 communications (only available for certain models), you do

not have to choose the certificate. The necessary certificate will be chosen automatically.

Related Information

•Certificates and Web Based Management

454

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using Web Based Management

Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using Web Based Management

To manage your network machine securely, you must use management utilities with security protocols.

We recommend using the HTTPS protocol for secure management. To use this protocol, HTTPS must be

enabled on your machine.

• The HTTPS protocol is enabled by default.

• You can change the HTTPS protocol settings using the Web Based Management screen.

1. Click the Network tab.

2. Click the Protocol menu in the left navigation bar.

3. Click HTTP Server Settings.

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "https://Common Name" in your browser's address bar (where "Common Name" is the Common Name

that you assigned to the certificate; this could be your IP address, node name, or domain name).

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. You can now access the machine using HTTPS.

• If you use the SNMPv3 protocol, follow the steps below.

• You can also change the SNMP settings by using BRAdmin Professional.

5. Click the Network tab.

6. Click Protocol.

7. Make sure the SNMP setting is enabled, and then click Advanced Settings.

8. Configure the SNMP settings.

There are three options for SNMP Mode of Operation.

•SNMP v1/v2c read-write access

455

In this mode, the print server uses version 1 and version 2c of the SNMP protocol. You can use all

Brother applications in this mode. However, it is not secure since it will not authenticate the user, and data

will not be encrypted.

•SNMPv3 read-write access and v1/v2c read-only access

In this mode, the print server uses the read-write access of version 3 and the read-only access of version

1 and version 2c of the SNMP protocol.

When you use SNMPv3 read-write access and v1/v2c read-only access mode, some Brother

applications (such as BRAdmin Light) that access the print server do not work correctly since they authorize

the read-only access of version 1 and version 2c. If you want to use all applications, we recommend using

SNMP v1/v2c read-write access mode.

•SNMPv3 read-write access

In this mode, the print sever uses version 3 of the SNMP protocol. If you want to manage the print server

securely, use this mode.

When you use SNMPv3 read-write access mode, note the following:

- You can use only BRAdmin Professional or Web Based Management to manage the print server.

- Except for BRAdmin Professional, all applications that use SNMPv1/v2c will be restricted. To allow the

use of SNMPv1/v2c applications, use SNMPv3 read-write access and v1/v2c read-only access or

SNMP v1/v2c read-write access mode.

Related Information

•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS

456

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using BRAdmin Professional (Windows)

Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using BRAdmin Professional

(Windows)

To use BRAdmin Professional utility, you must:

• Use the latest version of BRAdmin Professional. Go to your model's Downloads page on the Brother

Solutions Center at support.brother.com. If you use an older version of BRAdmin to manage your Brother

machines, the user authentication will not be secure.

• Use Web Based Management with the HTTPS protocol if you use BRAdmin Professional and Web Based

Management together.

• Use a different password in each group if you are managing a mixed group of older and newer print servers

with BRAdmin Professional. This will ensure security is maintained on the newer print servers.

• "Older versions of BRAdmin" refer to BRAdmin Professional older than Ver. 2.80 and BRAdmin Light for

Mac older than Ver.1.10.

• "Older print servers" refer to NC-2000 series, NC-2100p, NC-3100h, NC-3100s, NC-4100h, NC-5100h,

NC-5200h, NC-6100h, NC-6200h, NC-6300h, NC-6400h, NC-8000, NC-100h, NC-110h, NC-120w,

NC-130h, NC-140w, NC-8100h, NC-9100h, NC-7100w, NC-7200w and NC-2200w.

Related Information

•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS

457

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/

TLS > Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS

Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS

To print documents securely with IPP protocol, use the IPPS protocol.

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such

as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.

- For example:

http://SharedPrinter

If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.

- For example:

http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx

The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.

• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor

screen.

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click Protocol. Make sure the IPP check box is selected.

If the IPP check box is not selected, select the IPP check box, and then click Submit.

Restart your machine to activate the configuration.

After the machine restarts, return to the machine's web page, click the Network tab, and then click

Protocol.

6. Click HTTP Server Settings.

7. Select the HTTPS(Port443) check box in the IPP, and then click Submit.

8. Restart your machine to activate the configuration.

Communication using IPPS cannot prevent unauthorized access to the print server.

Related Information

•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS

458

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using IPsec

Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using IPsec

•Introduction to IPsec

•Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management

•Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management

•Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management

459

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using

IPsec > Introduction to IPsec

Introduction to IPsec

IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) is a security protocol that uses an optional Internet Protocol function to prevent

manipulation and ensure the confidentiality of data transmitted as IP packets. IPsec encrypts data carried over

the network, such as print data sent from computers to a printer. Because the data is encrypted at the network

layer, applications that employ a higher-level protocol use IPsec even if the user is not aware of its use.

IPsec supports the following functions:

• IPsec transmissions

According to the IPsec setting conditions, the network-connected computer sends data to and receives data

from the specified device using IPsec. When the devices start communicating using IPsec, keys are

exchanged using Internet Key Exchange (IKE) first, and then the encrypted data is transmitted using the

keys.

In addition, IPsec has two operation modes: the Transport mode and Tunnel mode. The Transport mode is

used mainly for communication between devices and the Tunnel mode is used in environments such as a

Virtual Private Network (VPN).

For IPsec transmissions, the following conditions are necessary:

- A computer that can communicate using IPsec is connected to the network.

- Your Brother machine is configured for IPsec communication.

- The computer connected to your Brother machine is configured for IPsec connections.

• IPsec settings

The settings that are necessary for connections using IPsec. These settings can be configured using Web

Based Management.

To configure the IPsec settings, you must use the browser on a computer that is connected to the network.

Related Information

•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using IPsec

460

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using

IPsec > Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management

Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management

The IPsec connection conditions are comprised of two Template types: Address and IPsec. You can configure

up to 10 connection conditions.

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click the Security tab.

6. Click the IPsec menu in the left navigation bar.

7. In the Status field, enable or disable IPsec.

8. Select Negotiation Mode for IKE Phase 1.

IKE is a protocol that is used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted communication

using IPsec.

461

In Main mode, the processing speed is slow, but the security is high. In Aggressive mode, the processing

speed is faster than Main mode, but the security is lower.

9. In the All Non-IPsec Traffic field, select the action to be taken for non-IPsec packets.

When using Web Services, you must select Allow for All Non-IPsec Traffic. If you select Drop, Web

Services cannot be used.

10. In the Broadcast/Multicast Bypass field, select Enabled or Disabled.

11. In the Protocol Bypass field, select the check box for the option or options you want.

12. In the Rules table, select the Enabled check box to activate the template.

When you select multiple check boxes, the lower numbered check boxes have priority if the settings for the

selected check boxes conflict.

13. Click on the corresponding drop-down list to select the Address Template that is used for the IPsec

connection conditions.

To add an Address Template, click Add Template.

14. Click on the corresponding drop-down list to select the IPsec Template that is used for the IPsec connection

conditions.

To add an IPsec Template, click Add Template.

15. Click Submit.

If the machine must be restarted to register the new settings, the restart confirmation screen will appear.

If there is a blank item in the template you enabled in the Rules table, an error message appears. Confirm

your choices and submit again.

Related Information

•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using IPsec

462

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using

IPsec > Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management

Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click the Security tab.

6. Click the IPsec Address Template menu in the left navigation bar.

The Template List appears, displaying 10 Address Templates.

Click the Delete button to delete an Address Template. When an Address Template is in use, it cannot be

deleted.

7. Click the Address Template that you want to create. The IPsec Address Template appears.

8. In the Template Name field, type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).

9. Select a Local IP Address option to specify the IP address conditions for the sender:

•IP Address

Specify the IP address. Select ALL IPv4 Address, ALL IPv6 Address, ALL Link Local IPv6, or Custom

from the drop-down list.

If you select Custom from the drop-down list, type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) in the text box.

•IP Address Range

Type the starting and ending IP addresses for the IP address range in the text boxes. If the starting and

ending IP addresses are not standardized to IPv4 or IPv6, or the ending IP address is smaller than the

starting address, an error will occur.

•IP Address / Prefix

Specify the IP address using CIDR notation.

463

For example: 192.168.1.1/24

Because the prefix is specified in the form of a 24-bit subnet mask (255.255.255.0) for 192.168.1.1, the

addresses 192.168.1.xxx are valid.

10. Select a Remote IP Address option to specify the IP address conditions for the recipient:

•Any

If you select Any, all IP addresses are enabled.

•IP Address

Type the specified IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) in the text box.

•IP Address Range

Type the starting and ending IP addresses for the IP address range. If the starting and ending IP

addresses are not standardized to IPv4 or IPv6, or the ending IP address is smaller than the starting

address, an error will occur.

•IP Address / Prefix

Specify the IP address using CIDR notation.

For example: 192.168.1.1/24

Because the prefix is specified in the form of a 24-bit subnet mask (255.255.255.0) for 192.168.1.1, the

addresses 192.168.1.xxx are valid.

11. Click Submit.

When you change the settings for the template currently in use, restart your machine to active the

configuration.

Related Information

•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using IPsec

464

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using

IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management

Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click the Security tab.

6. Click IPsec Template in the left navigation bar.

The Template List appears, displaying 10 IPsec Templates.

Click the Delete button to delete an IPsec Template. When an IPsec Template is in use, it cannot be

deleted.

7. Click IPsec Template that you want to create. The IPsec Template screen appears. The configuration fields

differ based on the Use Prefixed Template and Internet Key Exchange (IKE) you select.

8. In the Template Name field, type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).

9. If you selected Custom in the Use Prefixed Template drop-down list, select the Internet Key Exchange

(IKE) options, and then change the settings if needed.

10. Click Submit.

465

Related Information

•Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using IPsec

•IKEv1 Settings for an IPsec Template

•IKEv2 Settings for an IPsec Template

•Manual Settings for an IPsec Template

466

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using

IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > IKEv1 Settings for an IPsec Template

IKEv1 Settings for an IPsec Template

Template Name

Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).

467

Use Prefixed Template

Select Custom, IKEv1 High Security or IKEv1 Medium Security. The setting items are different depending

on the selected template.

The default template differs depending on whether you chose Main or Aggressive for Negotiation Mode

on the IPsec configuration screen.

Internet Key Exchange (IKE)

IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted

communication using IPsec. To carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption algorithm

that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are

exchanged using the Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication that is limited to

IKE is carried out.

If you selected Custom in Use Prefixed Template, select IKEv1.

Authentication Type

Configure the IKE authentication and encryption.

•Diffie-Hellman Group

This key exchange method allows secret keys to be securely exchanged over an unprotected network.

The Diffie-Hellman key exchange method uses a discrete logarithm problem, not the secret key, to send

and receive open information that was generated using a random number and the secret key.

Select Group1, Group2, Group5, or Group14.

•Encryption

Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.

•Hash

Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384 or SHA512.

•SA Lifetime

Specify the IKE SA lifetime.

Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).

Encapsulating Security

•Protocol

Select ESP, AH or AH+ESP.

- ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload

(communicated contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet is comprised of the header

and the encrypted payload, which follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP packet

also includes information regarding the encryption method and encryption key, the authentication data,

and so on.

- AH is part of the IPsec protocol that authenticates the sender and prevents manipulation (ensures the

completeness) of the data. In the IP packet, the data is inserted immediately after the header. In

addition, the packets include hash values, which are calculated using an equation from the

communicated contents, secret key, and so on, in order to prevent the falsification of the sender and

manipulation of the data. Unlike ESP, the communicated contents are not encrypted, and the data is

sent and received as plain text.

•Encryption

Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256. The encryption can be selected only when ESP

is selected in Protocol.

•Hash

Select None, MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512.

When AH+ESP is selected in Protocol, select each protocol for Hash(ESP) and Hash(AH).

•SA Lifetime

Specify the IPsec SA lifetime.

468

Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte) before the IPsec SA will expire.

•Encapsulation Mode

Select Transport or Tunnel.

•Remote Router IP-Address

Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this information only when the Tunnel

mode is selected.

SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and

shares information, such as the encryption method and encryption key, in order to establish a secure

communication channel before communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted

communication channel that has been established. The SA used for IPsec establishes the encryption

method, exchanges the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the IKE (Internet Key

Exchange) standard procedure. In addition, the SA is updated periodically.

Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)

PFS does not derive keys from previous keys that were used to encrypt messages. In addition, if a key that is

used to encrypt a message was derived from a parent key, that parent key is not used to derive other keys.

Therefore, even if a key is compromised, the damage will be limited only to the messages that were encrypted

using that key.

Select Enabled or Disabled.

Authentication Method

Select the authentication method. Select Pre-Shared Key or Certificates.

Pre-Shared Key

When encrypting communication, the encryption key is exchanged and shared beforehand using another

channel.

If you selected Pre-Shared Key for the Authentication Method, type the Pre-Shared Key (up to 32

characters).

•Local/ID Type/ID

Select the sender's ID type, and then type the ID.

Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or Certificate for the type.

If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate in the ID field.

•Remote/ID Type/ID

Select the recipient's ID type, and then type the ID.

Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or Certificate for the type.

If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate in the ID field.

Certificate

If you selected Certificates for Authentication Method, select the certificate.

You can select only the certificates that were created using the Certificate page of Web Based

Management's Security configuration screen.

Related Information

•Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management

469

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using

IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > IKEv2 Settings for an IPsec Template

IKEv2 Settings for an IPsec Template

Template Name

Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).

470

Use Prefixed Template

Select Custom, IKEv2 High Security, or IKEv2 Medium Security. The setting items are different depending

on the selected template.

Internet Key Exchange (IKE)

IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted

communication using IPsec. To carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption algorithm

that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are

exchanged using the Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication that is limited to

IKE is carried out.

If you selected Custom in Use Prefixed Template, select IKEv2.

Authentication Type

Configure the IKE authentication and encryption.

•Diffie-Hellman Group

This key exchange method allows secret keys to be securely exchanged over an unprotected network.

The Diffie-Hellman key exchange method uses a discrete logarithm problem, not the secret key, to send

and receive open information that was generated using a random number and the secret key.

Select Group1, Group2, Group5, or Group14.

•Encryption

Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.

•Hash

Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384 or SHA512.

•SA Lifetime

Specify the IKE SA lifetime.

Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).

Encapsulating Security

•Protocol

Select ESP.

ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload

(communicated contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet is comprised of the header and

the encrypted payload, which follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP packet also

includes information regarding the encryption method and encryption key, the authentication data, and so

on.

•Encryption

Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256.

•Hash

Select MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512.

•SA Lifetime

Specify the IPsec SA lifetime.

Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte) before the IPsec SA will expire.

•Encapsulation Mode

Select Transport or Tunnel.

•Remote Router IP-Address

Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this information only when the Tunnel

mode is selected.

471

SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and

shares information, such as the encryption method and encryption key, in order to establish a secure

communication channel before communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted

communication channel that has been established. The SA used for IPsec establishes the encryption

method, exchanges the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the IKE (Internet Key

Exchange) standard procedure. In addition, the SA is updated periodically.

Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)

PFS does not derive keys from previous keys that were used to encrypt messages. In addition, if a key that is

used to encrypt a message was derived from a parent key, that parent key is not used to derive other keys.

Therefore, even if a key is compromised, the damage will be limited only to the messages that were encrypted

using that key.

Select Enabled or Disabled.

Authentication Method

Select the authentication method. Select Pre-Shared Key, Certificates, EAP - MD5, or EAP - MS-CHAPv2.

Pre-Shared Key

When encrypting communication, the encryption key is exchanged and shared beforehand using another

channel.

If you selected Pre-Shared Key for the Authentication Method, type the Pre-Shared Key (up to 32

characters).

•Local/ID Type/ID

Select the sender's ID type, and then type the ID.

Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or Certificate for the type.

If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate in the ID field.

•Remote/ID Type/ID

Select the recipient's ID type, and then type the ID.

Select IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, FQDN, E-mail Address, or Certificate for the type.

If you select Certificate, type the common name of the certificate in the ID field.

Certificate

If you selected Certificates for Authentication Method, select the certificate.

You can select only the certificates that were created using the Certificate page of Web Based

Management's Security configuration screen.

EAP

EAP is an authentication protocol that is an extension of PPP. By using EAP with IEEE802.1x, a different key

is used for user authentication during each session.

The following settings are necessary only when EAP - MD5 or EAP - MS-CHAPv2 is selected in

Authentication Method:

•Mode

Select Server-Mode or Client-Mode.

•Certificate

Select the certificate.

•User Name

Type the user name (up to 32 characters).

•Password

Type the password (up to 32 characters). The password must be entered two times for confirmation.

472

Related Information

•Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management

473

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using

IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management > Manual Settings for an IPsec

Template

Manual Settings for an IPsec Template

Template Name

Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).

Use Prefixed Template

Select Custom.

Internet Key Exchange (IKE)

IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted

communication using IPsec. To carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption algorithm

that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are

exchanged using the Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication that is limited to

IKE is carried out.

474

Select Manual.

Authentication Key (ESP,AH)

Specify the key to use for authentication. Type the In/Out values.

These settings are necessary when Custom is selected for Use Prefixed Template, Manual is selected for

Internet Key Exchange (IKE), and a setting other than None is selected for Hash for Encapsulating

Security section.

The number of characters you can set differs depending on the setting you chose for Hash in the

Encapsulating Security section.

If the length of the specified authentication key is different than the selected hash algorithm, an error will

occur.

•MD5: 128 bits (16 bytes)

•SHA1: 160 bits (20 bytes)

•SHA256: 256 bits (32 bytes)

•SHA384: 384 bits (48 bytes)

•SHA512: 512 bits (64 bytes)

When you specify the key in ASCII Code, enclose the characters in double quotation marks (").

Code key (ESP)

Specify the key to use for encryption. Type the In/Out values.

These settings are necessary when Custom is selected in Use Prefixed Template, Manual is selected in

Internet Key Exchange (IKE), and ESP is selected in Protocol in Encapsulating Security.

The number of characters you can set differs depending on the setting you chose for Encryption in the

Encapsulating Security section.

If the length of the specified code key is different than the selected encryption algorithm, an error will occur.

•DES: 64 bits (8 bytes)

•3DES: 192 bits (24 bytes)

•AES-CBC 128: 128 bits (16 bytes)

•AES-CBC 256: 256 bits (32 bytes)

When you specify the key in ASCII Code, enclose the characters in double quotation marks (").

SPI

These parameters are used to identify security information. Generally, a host has multiple Security

Associations (SAs) for several types of IPsec communication. Therefore, it is necessary to identify the

applicable SA when an IPsec packet is received. The SPI parameter, which identifies the SA, is included in

the Authentication Header (AH) and Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) header.

These settings are necessary when Custom is selected for Use Prefixed Template, and Manual is selected

for Internet Key Exchange (IKE).

Enter the In/Out values. (3-10 characters)

Encapsulating Security

•Protocol

Select ESP or AH.

475

- ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload

(communicated contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet is comprised of the header

and the encrypted payload, which follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP packet

also includes information regarding the encryption method and encryption key, the authentication data,

and so on.

- AH is part of the IPsec protocol that authenticates the sender and prevents manipulation of the data

(ensures the completeness of the data). In the IP packet, the data is inserted immediately after the

header. In addition, the packets include hash values, which are calculated using an equation from the

communicated contents, secret key, and so on, in order to prevent the falsification of the sender and

manipulation of the data. Unlike ESP, the communicated contents are not encrypted, and the data is

sent and received as plain text.

•Encryption

Select DES, 3DES, AES-CBC 128, or AES-CBC 256. The encryption can be selected only when ESP

is selected in Protocol.

•Hash

Select None, MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, or SHA512. None can be selected only when ESP is

selected in Protocol.

•SA Lifetime

Specify the IKE SA lifetime.

Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte) before the IPsec SA will expire.

•Encapsulation Mode

Select Transport or Tunnel.

•Remote Router IP-Address

Specify the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the connection destination. Enter this information only when the

Tunnel mode is selected.

SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and

shares information, such as the encryption method and encryption key, in order to establish a secure

communication channel before communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted

communication channel that has been established. The SA used for IPsec establishes the encryption

method, exchanges the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the IKE (Internet Key

Exchange) standard procedure. In addition, the SA is updated periodically.

Related Information

•Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management

476

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Send or Receive an Email Securely

Send or Receive an Email Securely

•Configure Email Sending or Receiving Using Web Based Management

•Send an Email with User Authentication

•Send or Receive an Email Securely Using SSL TLS

477

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Send or Receive an Email Securely > Configure Email

Sending or Receiving Using Web Based Management

Configure Email Sending or Receiving Using Web Based Management

We recommend using Web Based Management to configure secured email sending with user authentication,

or email sending and receiving using SSL/TLS.

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such

as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.

- For example:

http://SharedPrinter

If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.

- For example:

http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx

The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.

• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor

screen.

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Click Protocol in the left navigation bar.

6. In the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP field, click Advanced Settings and make sure the status of POP3/IMAP4/SMTP

is Enabled.

7. Configure the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP settings.

• Confirm that the email settings are correct after configuration by sending a test email.

• If you do not know the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP server settings, contact your network administrator or Internet

Service Provider (ISP).

8. When finished, click Submit.

The Test Send/Receive E-mail Configuration dialog box appears.

9. Follow the instructions in the dialog box to test the current settings.

Related Information

•Send or Receive an Email Securely

478

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Send or Receive an Email Securely > Send an Email with

User Authentication

Send an Email with User Authentication

Your Brother machine supports the SMTP-AUTH method to send email via an email server that requires user

authentication. This method prevents unauthorized users from accessing the email server.

You can use SMTP-AUTH for email notification, email reports and I-Fax.

We recommend using Web Based Management to configure the SMTP authentication.

Email Server Settings

You must configure your machine's SMTP authentication method to match the method used by your email server.

For details about your email server settings, contact your network administrator or Internet Service Provider

(ISP).

To enable SMTP server authentication: in the Web Based Management POP3/IMAP4/SMTP screen, under

Server Authentication Method, you must select SMTP-AUTH.

Related Information

•Send or Receive an Email Securely

479

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Send or Receive an Email Securely > Send or Receive an

Email Securely Using SSL TLS

Send or Receive an Email Securely Using SSL TLS

Your Brother machine supports SSL/TLS methods to send or receive an email via an email server that requires

secure SSL/TLS communication. To send or receive email via an email server that is using SSL/TLS

communication, you must configure SMTP over SSL/TLS, POP3 over SSL/TLS, or IMAP4 over SSL/TLS.

We recommend using Web Based Management to configure SSL/TLS.

Verify Server Certificate

Under SSL/TLS, if you choose SSL or TLS, the Verify Server Certificate check box will be selected

automatically.

480

481

• Before you verify the server certificate, you must import the CA certificate issued by the CA that signed

the server certificate. Contact your network administrator or your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to

confirm if importing a CA certificate is necessary.

• If you do not need to verify the server certificate, clear the Verify Server Certificate check box.

Port Number

If you select SSL or TLS for SMTP, POP3, or IMAP4, the Port value will be changed to match the protocol. To

change the port number manually, type the port number after you choose SSL or TLS for the SSL/TLS settings.

You must configure your machine's POP3/IMAP4/SMTP communication method to match the method used by

your email server. For details about your email server settings, contact your network administrator or your ISP.

In most cases, the secured webmail services require the following settings:

SMTP Port 25

Server Authentication Method SMTP-AUTH

SSL/TLS TLS

POP3 Port 995

SSL/TLS SSL

IMAP4 Port 993

SSL/TLS SSL

Related Information

•Send or Receive an Email Securely

482

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless

Network

Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network

•What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication?

•Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network Using Web

Based Management (Web Browser)

•IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods

483

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless

Network > What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication?

What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication?

IEEE 802.1x is an IEEE standard for wired and wireless networks that limits access from unauthorized network

devices. Your Brother machine (supplicant) sends an authentication request to a RADIUS server (Authentication

server) through your access point or HUB. After your request has been verified by the RADIUS server, your

machine can access the network.

Related Information

•Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network

484

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless

Network > Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network Using Web Based

Management (Web Browser)

Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network

Using Web Based Management (Web Browser)

• If you configure your machine using EAP-TLS authentication, you must install the client certificate issued

by a CA before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the client certificate. If

you have installed more than one certificate, we recommend writing down the certificate name you want to

use.

• Before you verify the server certificate, you must import the CA certificate that has been issued by the CA

that signed the server certificate. Contact your network administrator or your Internet Service Provider

(ISP) to confirm whether a CA certificate import is necessary.

You can also configure IEEE 802.1x authentication using:

• BRAdmin Professional (Wired and wireless network)

• Wireless setup wizard from the control panel (Wireless network)

• Wireless setup wizard on the CD-ROM (Wireless network)

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such

as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.

- For example:

http://SharedPrinter

If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.

- For example:

http://brnxxxxxxxxxxxx

The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.

• For Mac, access Web Based Management by clicking the machine's icon on the Status Monitor

screen.

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Network tab.

5. Do one of the following:

Option Description

Wired network Click the Wired tab in the left navigation bar, and then select Wired 802.1x

Authentication.

Wireless network Click the Wireless tab in the left navigation bar, and then select Wireless (Enterprise).

6. Configure the IEEE 802.1x authentication settings.

485

• To enable IEEE 802.1x authentication for wired networks, select Enabled for Wired 802.1x status on

the Wired 802.1x Authentication page.

• If you are using EAP-TLS authentication, you must select the client certificate that has been installed

(shown with certificate name) for verification from the Client Certificate drop-down list.

• If you select EAP-FAST, PEAP, EAP-TTLS, or EAP-TLS authentication, select the verification method

from the Server Certificate Verification drop-down list. Verify the server certificate using the CA

certificate, imported to the machine in advance, that has been issued by the CA that signed the server

certificate.

Select one of the following verification methods from the Server Certificate Verification drop-down list:

Option Description

No Verification The server certificate can always be trusted. The verification is not performed.

CA Cert. The verification method to check the CA reliability of the server certificate, using the

CA certificate that has been issued by the CA that signed the server certificate.

CA Cert. + ServerID The verification method to check the common name 1 value of the server certificate,

in addition to the CA reliability of the server certificate.

7. When finished with configuration, click Submit.

For wired networks: After configuring, connect your machine to the IEEE 802.1x supported network. After a

few minutes, print the Network Configuration Report to check the <Wired IEEE 802.1x> Status.

Option Description

Success The wired IEEE 802.1x function is enabled and the authentication was successful.

Failed The wired IEEE 802.1x function is enabled; however, the authentication failed.

Off The wired IEEE 802.1x function is not available.

Related Information

•Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network

1The common name verification compares the common name of the server certificate to the character string configured for the Server ID.

Before you use this method, contact your system administrator about the server certificate's common name and then configure Server ID.

486

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless

Network > IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods

IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods

LEAP (Wireless network)

Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol (LEAP) is a proprietary EAP method developed by Cisco

Systems, Inc., which uses a user ID and password for authentication.

EAP-FAST

Extensible Authentication Protocol-Flexible Authentication via Secured Tunneling (EAP-FAST) has been

developed by Cisco Systems, Inc., which uses a user ID and password for authentication, and symmetric key

algorithms to achieve a tunneled authentication process.

The Brother machine supports the following inner authentication methods:

• EAP-FAST/NONE

• EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2

• EAP-FAST/GTC

EAP-MD5 (Wired network)

Extensible Authentication Protocol-Message Digest Algorithm 5 (EAP-MD5) uses a user ID and password for

challenge-response authentication.

PEAP

Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) is a version of EAP method developed by Cisco

Systems, Inc., Microsoft Corporation and RSA Security. PEAP creates an encrypted Secure Sockets Layer

(SSL)/Transport Layer Security (TLS) tunnel between a client and an authentication server, for sending a user

ID and password. PEAP provides mutual authentication between the server and the client.

The Brother machine supports the following inner authentications:

• PEAP/MS-CHAPv2

• PEAP/GTC

EAP-TTLS

Extensible Authentication Protocol-Tunneled Transport Layer Security (EAP-TTLS) has been developed by

Funk Software and Certicom. EAP-TTLS creates a similar encrypted SSL tunnel to PEAP, between a client

and an authentication server, for sending a user ID and password. EAP-TTLS provides mutual authentication

between the server and the client.

The Brother machine supports the following inner authentications:

• EAP-TTLS/CHAP

• EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAP

• EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAPv2

• EAP-TTLS/PAP

EAP-TLS

Extensible Authentication Protocol-Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS) requires digital certificate

authentication both at a client and an authentication server.

Related Information

•Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network

487

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Store Print Log to Network

Store Print Log to Network

•Store Log to Network Overview

•Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based Management

•Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting

•Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0

488

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Store Print Log to Network > Store Log to Network

Overview

Store Log to Network Overview

The Store Print Log to Network feature allows you to save the print log file from your Brother machine to a

network server using the Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol. You can record the ID, type of print job,

job name, user name, date, time and the number of printed pages for every print job. CIFS is a protocol that runs

over TCP/IP, allowing computers on a network to share files over an intranet or the Internet.

The following print functions are recorded in the print log:

• Print jobs from your computer

• USB Direct Print (supported models only)

• Copy

• Received Fax (supported models only)

• Web Connect Print

• The Store Print Log to Network feature supports Kerberos authentication and NTLMv2 authentication.

You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time

zone correctly on the control panel for authentication.

• You can set the file type to TXT or CSV when storing a file to the server.

Related Information

•Store Print Log to Network

489

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Store Print Log to Network > Configure the Store Print Log

to Network Settings Using Web Based Management

Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based

Management

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Administrator tab.

5. Click the Store Print Log to Network menu.

6. In the Print Log field, click On.

7. Configure the following settings:

Option Description

Network Folder

Path

Type the destination folder where your log will be stored on the CIFS server (for

example: brother\abc).

File Name Type the file name you want to use for the print log (up to 32 characters).

File Type Select the TXT or CSV option for the Print Log file type.

Auth. Method Select the authentication method required for access to the CIFS server: Auto,

Kerberos, or NTLMv2. Kerberos is an authentication protocol which allows devices or

individuals to securely prove their identity to network servers using a single sign-on.

NTLMv2 is the authentication method used by Windows to log into servers.

•Auto: If you select Auto, NTLMv2 will be used to the authentication method.

•Kerberos: Select the Kerberos option to use Kerberos authentication only.

•NTLMv2: Select the NTLMv2 option to use NTLMv2 authentication only.

• For the Kerberos and NTLMv2 authentication, you must also configure the

Date&Time settings or the SNTP protocol (network time server) and DNS

server.

• You can also configure the Date & Time settings from the machine's

control panel.

Username Type the user name for the authentication (up to 96 characters).

If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of the

following styles: user@domain or domain\user.

Password Type the password for the authentication (up to 32 characters).

Kerberos

Server

Address (if

needed)

Type the KDC host address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters) or

the IP address (for example: 192.168.56.189).

Error Detection

Setting

Choose what action should be taken when the Print Log cannot be stored to the server

due to a network error.

8. In the Connection Status field, confirm the last log status.

490

You can also confirm the error status on the LCD of your machine.

9. Click Submit to display the Test Print Log to Network page.

To test your settings, click Yes and then go to the next step.

To skip the test, click No. Your settings will be submitted automatically.

10. The machine will test your settings.

11. If your settings are accepted, Test OK appears on the screen.

If Test Error appears, check all settings, and then click Submit to display the Test page again.

Related Information

•Store Print Log to Network

•Synchronize Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management

•Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management

491

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Store Print Log to Network > Use the Store Print Log to

Network's Error Detection Setting

Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting

Use Error Detection Settings to determine the action that is taken when the print log cannot be stored to the

server due to a network error.

1. Start your web browser.

2. Type "http://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is the

machine's IP address).

For example:

http://192.168.1.2

3. No password is required by default. Type a password if you have set one, and then click .

4. Click the Administrator tab.

5. Click the Store Print Log to Network menu in the left navigation bar.

6. In the Error Detection Setting section, select the Cancel Print or Ignore Log & Print option.

Option Description

Cancel

If you select the Cancel Print option, the print jobs are canceled when the print log cannot be

stored to the server.

Even if you select the Cancel Print option, your machine will print a received fax.

Ignore

Log &

If you select the Ignore Log & Print option, the machine prints the documentation even if the

print log cannot be stored to the server.

When the store print log function has recovered, the print log is recorded as follows:

a. If the log cannot be stored at the end of printing, the print log except the number of printed

pages will be recorded.

b. If the print log cannot be stored at the beginning and the end of printing, the print log of the

job will not be recorded. When the function has recovered, the error is reflected in the log.

7. Click Submit to display the Test Print Log to Network page.

To test your settings, click Yes and then go to the next step.

To skip the test, click No. Your settings will be submitted automatically.

8. The machine will test your settings.

9. If your settings are accepted, Test OK appears on the screen.

If Test Error appears, check all settings, and then click Submit to display the Test page again.

Related Information

•Store Print Log to Network

492

Home > Security > Network Security Features > Store Print Log to Network > Use Store Print Log to

Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0

Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0

When Secure Function Lock 3.0 is active, the names of the registered users for copy, Fax RX, Web Connect

Print and USB Direct Print (if available) are recorded in the Store Print Log to Network report. When the Active

Directory Authentication is enabled, logged on user name will be recorded in the Store Print Log to Network

report:

Related Information

•Store Print Log to Network

493

Home > Mobile/Web Connect

Mobile/Web Connect

•Use Web Services from Your Brother Machine

•Use Brother Web Services

•Print with Google Cloud Print™

•Print with AirPrint

•Print with Mopria™

•Print and Scan from a Mobile Device

•Print and Scan Using Near-Field Communication (NFC)

494

Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Use Web Services from Your Brother Machine

Use Web Services from Your Brother Machine

Certain websites provide services that allow users to upload and view images and files on the website. Your

Brother machine can scan images and upload them to these services, and also download from and print images

that are already uploaded to these services.

1. Printing

2. Scanning

3. Photos, images, documents and other files

4. Web Service

The following services can be accessed from your Brother machine: Picasa Web Albums™, Google Drive™,

Flickr®, Facebook, Evernote®, Dropbox, OneNote, OneDrive and Box.

For more detailed information, see the Web Connect Guide. Go to your model's Manuals page on the Brother

Solutions Center at support.brother.com.

Related Information

•Mobile/Web Connect

495

Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Use Brother Web Services

Use Brother Web Services

Brother Web Services allow you to scan, print, and manage your files in the cloud or other online file

management services. Brother Web Services also manages cloud servers, so you can transfer received faxes.

• Outline and Scan

Use a red pen to outline sections of your document, and then scan the document. The red outlined areas are

captured and processed based on your settings: save the areas to a cloud service.

1. Web Service

• Copy Outlined Area

Use a red pen to outline sections of your document, and then scan the document. The red outlined areas are

extracted and printed together.

• Cut Outlined Area

Use a red pen to outline sections of your document, and then scan the document. The red outlined areas are

deleted and the remaining information is printed.

• NotePrint and NoteScan

Print different types of note sheets and the folders designed to hold them. After writing your notes, scan the note

sheets and save them to a cloud service.

1. Web Service

For more detailed information, see the Web Connect Guide. Go to your model's Manuals page on the Brother

Solutions Center at support.brother.com.

496

Related Information

•Mobile/Web Connect

497

Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Print with Google Cloud Print™

Print with Google Cloud Print™

Google Cloud Print™ is a Google-provided service that allows you to print to a printer registered to your Google

account using a network-compatible device (such as a mobile phone or computer) without installing the printer

driver on the device.

1. Print request

2. Internet

3. Google Cloud Print™

4. Printing

Related Information

•Mobile/Web Connect

498

Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Print with AirPrint

Print with AirPrint

Use Brother AirPrint to wirelessly print photos, emails, web pages, and documents from your iPad, iPhone and

iPod touch without installing a printer driver on the device.

1. Print request

2. Printed photos, emails, web pages, and documents

• AirPrint also lets you send faxes directly from your Mac computer without printing them (requires OS X 10.8.5

or later).

1 2

1. Wired or wireless network

2. Telephone line

3. Your Brother machine

• AirPrint also lets you scan documents to your Mac computer without installing a driver on the device (requires

OS X 10.9 or later).

For more detailed information, see the AirPrint Guide. Go to your model's Manuals page on the Brother

Solutions Center at support.brother.com.

Related Information

•Mobile/Web Connect

499

Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Print with Mopria™

Print with Mopria™

Mopria™ Print Service is a print feature on Android™ mobile devices (Android™ version 4.4 or later) developed

by the Mopria™ Alliance. With this service, you can connect to the same network as your machine and print

without additional setup. Many native Android™ apps, including Google Chrome™, Gmail, and Gallery, support

printing.

1. Android™ 4.4 or later

2. Wi-Fi® Connection

3. Your Brother machine

You must download the Mopria™ Print Service from the Google Play™ Store and install it on your Android™

device. Be sure to turn the service on before using this feature.

Related Information

•Mobile/Web Connect

500

Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Print and Scan from a Mobile Device

Print and Scan from a Mobile Device

Use Brother iPrint&Scan to print and scan from various mobile devices.

• For Android™ Devices

Brother iPrint&Scan allows you to use features of your Brother machine directly from your Android™ device,

without using a computer.

Download and install Brother iPrint&Scan from the Google Play™ Store.

• For iOS Devices

Brother iPrint&Scan allows you to use features of your Brother machine directly from your iPhone, iPod

touch, iPad, and iPad mini.

Download and install Brother iPrint&Scan from the App Store.

• For Windows Phone Devices

Brother iPrint&Scan allows you to use features of your Brother machine directly from your Windows Phone,

without using a computer.

Download and install Brother iPrint&Scan from the Windows Phone Store (Windows Phone Marketplace).

For more detailed information, see the Mobile Print/Scan Guide for Brother iPrint&Scan. Go to your model's

Manuals page on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.

Related Information

•Mobile/Web Connect

501

Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Print and Scan Using Near-Field Communication (NFC)

Print and Scan Using Near-Field Communication (NFC)

Related Models: MFC-L6900DW

Near-Field Communication (NFC) allows for simple transactions, data exchange, and wireless connections

between two devices that are in close range of each other.

If your Android™ device is NFC-enabled, you can print data (photos, PDF files, text files, web pages and email

messages) from the device or scan photos and documents to the device by touching it to the NFC logo on the

left side of your machine's control panel.

You must download and install Brother iPrint&Scan on your Android™ device to use this feature. For more

detailed information, see the Mobile Print/Scan Guide for Brother iPrint&Scan. Go to your model's Manuals page

on the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.

Related Information

•Mobile/Web Connect

502

Home > ControlCenter

ControlCenter

Use Brother's ControlCenter software utility to quickly access your frequently-used applications. Using

ControlCenter gives you direct access to specific applications.

•ControlCenter4 (Windows)

•ControlCenter2 (Mac)

503

Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter4 (Windows)

ControlCenter4 (Windows)

•Change the Operation Mode in ControlCenter4 (Windows)

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

•Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter4 (Windows)

•Create a Custom Tab Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

504

Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter4 (Windows) > Change the Operation Mode in ControlCenter4

(Windows)

Change the Operation Mode in ControlCenter4 (Windows)

ControlCenter4 has two operation modes: Home Mode and Advanced Mode. You can change modes at any

time.

Home Mode

Advanced Mode

•Home Mode

ControlCenter4 Home Mode lets you access your machine's main features easily.

•Advanced Mode

505

ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode gives you more control over the details of your machine's features and

allows you to customize one-button scan actions.

To change operation mode:

1. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then select Open.

2. Click the Configuration button, and then select Mode Select.

3. The mode selection dialog box appears. Select either the Home Mode or Advanced Mode option.

4. Click OK.

Related Information

•ControlCenter4 (Windows)

506

Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter4 (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

Use ControlCenter4 Home Mode to access your machine's main features.

•Scan Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode

(Windows)

•Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter4 Home Mode

(Windows)

•Scan Settings for ControlCenter4 Home Mode (Windows)

507

Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter4 (Windows) > Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode

(Windows)

Scan Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode gives you more control over the details of your machine's features and allows

you to customize one-button scan actions.

•Scan Photos and Graphics Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode

(Windows)

•Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode

(Windows)

•Scan Both Sides of an ID Card Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

•Scan to Email Attachment Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

•Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

•Scan Settings for ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

508

Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter4 (Windows) > Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter4

(Windows)

Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter4 (Windows)

If Secure Function Lock is set to On, you cannot use Remote Setup.

1. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.

2. Click the Device Settings tab.

3. Click the Remote Setup button.

4. Configure the settings as needed.

Export

Click to save the current configuration settings to a file.

Click Export to save your address book or all settings for your machine.

Import

Click to import a file and read its settings.

509

Click to print the selected items on the machine. You cannot print the data until it is uploaded to the

machine. Click Apply to upload the new data to the machine, and then click Print.

Click to start uploading data to the machine, and then exit the Remote Setup Program. If an error message

appears, confirm that your data is correct, and then click OK.

Cancel

Click to exit the Remote Setup Program without uploading data to the machine.

Apply

Click to upload data to the machine without exiting the Remote Setup Program.

5. Click OK.

• If your computer is protected by a firewall and is unable to use Remote Setup, you may need to configure the

firewall settings to allow communication through port numbers 137 and 161.

• If you are using Windows Firewall and you installed the Brother software and drivers from the CD-ROM, the

necessary firewall settings have already been set.

Related Information

•ControlCenter4 (Windows)

•Remote Setup (Windows)

510

Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter4 (Windows) > Create a Custom Tab Using ControlCenter4

Advanced Mode (Windows)

Create a Custom Tab Using ControlCenter4 Advanced Mode (Windows)

You can create up to three customized tabs, each including up to five customized buttons, with your preferred

settings.

Select Advanced Mode as the mode setting for ControlCenter4.

1. Click the (ControlCenter4) icon in the task tray, and then click Open.

2. Click the Configuration button, and then select Create custom tab.

A custom tab is created.

3. To change the name of a custom tab, right-click the custom tab, and then select Rename custom tab.

4. Click the Configuration button, select Create custom button, and then select the button you want to create.

The settings dialog box appears.

5. Type the button name, and then change the settings, if needed. Click OK.

The setting options vary depending on the button you select.

You can change or remove the created tab, button, or settings. Click the Configuration button, and then

follow the menu.

511

Related Information

•ControlCenter4 (Windows)

512

Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter2 (Mac)

ControlCenter2 (Mac)

•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

•Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

513

Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter2 (Mac) > Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

Use Brother's ControlCenter software to scan photos and save them as JPEGs, PDFs, or other file formats.

•Scan Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

•Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

•Scan Both Sides of a Document Automatically Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

•Scan Both Sides of an ID Card Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

•Scan to Email Attachment Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

•Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR) Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

514

Home > ControlCenter > ControlCenter2 (Mac) > Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

Set Up the Brother Machine Using ControlCenter2 (Mac)

If Secure Function Lock is set to On, you cannot use Remote Setup.

1. In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications > Brother, and then double-click the

(ControlCenter) icon.

The ControlCenter2 screen appears.

2. Click the DEVICE SETTINGS tab.

3. Click the Remote Setup button.

The Remote Setup Program screen appears.

4. Configure the settings as needed.

Export

Click to save the current configuration settings to a file.

Click Export to save your address book or all settings for your machine.

Import

Click to import a file and read its settings.

515

Click to print the selected items on the machine. You cannot print the data until it is uploaded to the

machine. Click Apply to upload the new data to the machine, and then click Print.

Click to start uploading data to the machine, and then exit the Remote Setup Program. If an error message

appears, enter the correct data again, and then click OK.

Cancel

Click to exit the Remote Setup Program without uploading data to the machine.

Apply

Click to upload data to the machine without exiting the Remote Setup Program.

5. When finished, click OK.

Related Information

•ControlCenter2 (Mac)

•Remote Setup (Mac)

516

Home > Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Use this section to resolve typical problems you may encounter when using your Brother machine. You can

correct most problems yourself.

IMPORTANT

For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be made from within

that country.

Using non-Brother supplies may affect the print quality, hardware performance, and machine reliability.

If you need additional help, go to the Brother Solutions Center at support.brother.com.

First, check the following:

• The machine's power cord is connected correctly and the machine's power is on. See the Quick Setup Guide.

• All of the protective materials have been removed. See the Quick Setup Guide.

• Paper is loaded correctly in the paper tray.

• The interface cables are securely connected to the machine and the computer, or the wireless connection is

set up on both the machine and your computer.

• Error and maintenance messages

If you did not solve the problem with the checks, identify the problem and then see Related Information.

Related Information

•Error and Maintenance Messages

•Document Jams

•Paper Jams

•Printing Problems

•Improve the Print Quality

•Telephone and Fax Problems

•Network Problems

•Other Problems

•Check the Machine Information

•Reset Your Brother Machine

517

Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages

Error and Maintenance Messages

(MFC-L6900DW)

If the LCD displays errors and your Android™ device supports the NFC feature, touch your device to the

NFC logo on your Brother machine to access the Brother Solutions Center and browse the latest FAQs

from your device. (Your mobile telephone provider's message and data rates may apply.)

Make sure the NFC settings of both your Brother machine and your Android™ device are set to On.

As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur and supply items may have to be replaced. If this

happens, your machine identifies the error or required routine maintenance and shows the appropriate message.

The most common error and maintenance messages are shown in the table.

Follow the instructions in the Action column to solve the error and remove the message.

You can correct most errors and perform routine maintenance by yourself. If you need more tips: Visit

support.brother.com, and click FAQs & Troubleshooting.

Error Message Cause Action

2-sided Disabled The back cover of the machine

is not closed completely.

Close the back cover of the machine until it locks

in the closed position.

The 2-sided tray is not installed

completely.

Install the 2-sided tray firmly in the machine.

Access Denied The function you want to use is

restricted by Secure Function

Lock 3.0.

Call your administrator to check your Secure

Function Lock Settings.

Cartridge Error The toner cartridge is not

installed correctly.

Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit

assembly. Take out the toner cartridge, and put it

back in the drum unit again. Reinstall the toner

cartridge and drum unit assembly in the machine.

If the problem continues, contact Brother

Customer Service or your local Brother dealer.

Comm.Error Poor telephone line quality

caused a communication error.

Send the fax again or connect the machine to

another telephone line. If the problem continues,

contact the telephone company and ask them to

check your telephone line.

Cooling Down The temperature of the inside of

the machine is too hot. The

machine will pause its current

print job and go into cooling

down mode.

Make sure you can hear the fan in the machine

spinning and that the exhaust outlet is not

blocked.

If the fan is spinning, remove any obstacles that

surround the exhaust outlet, and then leave the

machine turned on but do not use it for several

minutes.

If the fan is not spinning, disconnect the machine

from the power for several minutes, then

reconnect it.

Cover is Open The front cover is not

completely closed.

Open and then firmly close the front cover of the

machine.

Cover is Open. The fuser cover is not

completely closed or paper was

jammed in the back of the

machine when you turned on

the power.

Close the fuser cover located inside the back

cover of the machine.

Make sure paper is not jammed inside the back of

the machine, and then close the fuser cover.

Cover is Open. The ADF cover is not

completely closed.

Close the ADF cover.

If the error message remains, press .

518

Error Message Cause Action

Disconnected The other person or other

person's fax machine stopped

the call.

Try to send or receive again.

If calls are stopped repeatedly and you are using

a VoIP (Voice over IP) system, try changing the

Compatibility to Basic (for VoIP).

Document Jam The document was not inserted

or fed correctly, or the

document scanned from the

ADF was too long.

Remove the jammed paper from the ADF unit.

Clear any debris or scraps of paper from the ADF

unit paper path.

Press .

DR Mode in Use The machine is set to

Distinctive Ring mode. You

cannot change the Receive

Mode from Manual to another

mode.

Set Distinctive Ring to Off.

Drum ! The corona wire on the drum

unit must be cleaned.

Clean the corona wire on the drum unit.

See Related Information: Clean the Corona Wire.

If the problem continues, replace the drum unit

with a new one.

The drum unit or the toner

cartridge and drum unit

assembly is not installed

correctly.

Remove the drum unit, remove the toner cartridge

from the drum unit, and put the toner cartridge

back into the drum unit. Reinstall the drum unit in

the machine.

Jam 2-sided The paper is jammed in the 2-

sided tray or inside the back

cover.

Remove the 2-sided tray and open the back cover

to pull out all jammed paper.

Jam Inside The paper is jammed inside the

machine.

Open the front cover, remove the toner cartridge

and drum unit assembly, and pull out all jammed

paper. Close the front cover.

Jam MP Tray The paper is jammed in the MP

tray.

Remove all jammed paper from in and around the

MP tray. Press Retry.

Jam Rear The paper is jammed in the

back of the machine.

Open the fuser cover and remove all jammed

paper. Close the fuser cover.

Jam Tray 1

Jam Tray 2

Jam Tray 3

The paper is jammed in the

indicated paper tray.

Pull out the paper tray and remove all jammed

paper as shown in the animation on the LCD.

Limit Exceeded The print limit set in Secure

Function Lock 3.0 was reached.

Call your administrator to check your Secure

Function Lock Settings.

Media Type Mismatch The media type specified in the

printer driver differs from the

paper type specified in the

machine's menu.

Load the correct type of paper in the tray

indicated on the LCD, and then select the correct

media type in the Paper Type setting on the

machine.

No Drum Unit The drum unit is not installed

correctly.

Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit

assembly.

519

Error Message Cause Action

No HUB Support A USB hub device is connected

to the USB direct interface.

Disconnect the USB hub device from the USB

direct interface.

No Paper The machine is out of paper, or

paper is not loaded correctly in

the paper tray.

• Refill paper in the paper tray. Make sure the

paper guides are set to the correct size.

• If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it

again. Make sure the paper guides are set to

the correct size.

• Do not overfill the paper tray.

No Paper Fed T1

No Paper Fed T2

No Paper Fed T3

The machine failed to feed

paper from the indicated paper

tray.

Pull out the paper tray indicated on the LCD and

remove all jammed paper.

No Paper MP The MP tray is out of paper, or

paper is not loaded correctly in

the MP tray.

Do one of the following:

• Refill paper in the MP tray. Make sure the

paper guides are set to the correct size.

• If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it

again. Make sure the paper guides are set to

the correct size.

No Paper

No Paper T1

No Paper T2

No Paper T3

The machine failed to feed

paper from the indicated paper

tray.

Do one of the following:

• Refill paper in the paper tray indicated on the

LCD. Make sure the paper guides are set to

the correct size.

• If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it

again. Make sure the paper guides are set to

the correct size.

Do not overfill the paper tray.

No Response/Busy The number you dialed does

not answer or is busy.

Verify the number and try again.

No Toner The toner cartridge or the toner

cartridge and drum unit

assembly is not installed

correctly.

Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit

assembly. Remove the toner cartridge from the

drum unit, and reinstall the toner cartridge back in

the drum unit. Reinstall the toner cartridge and

drum unit assembly back in the machine. If the

problem continues, replace the toner cartridge

with a new one.

No Tray T1

No Tray T2

No Tray T3

The paper tray is not installed

or not installed correctly.

Reinstall the paper tray indicated on the LCD.

Out of Fax Memory The machine's fax memory is

full.

If you are using Fax Preview function, delete

unwanted received fax data.

If you are using Memory Receive function and are

not using fax preview function, print received fax

data. To print fax data, press Settings >

All Settings > Fax > Print Fax.

520

Error Message Cause Action

Out of Memory The machine's memory is full. If a fax-sending or copy operation is in

process

Do one of the following:

• Press Send Now to send the pages scanned

so far.

• Press Partial Print to copy the pages

scanned so far.

• Press Quit or and wait until the other

operations that are in progress finish, and then

try again.

If a scan operation is in process

• Split the document into multiple parts.

• Reduce the Resolution.

• Reduce the File Size.

• Select the high compression PDF file type.

• Clear faxes from the memory.

If a print operation is in process

Press and reduce the print resolution.

Output Tray Full The output paper tray is full. Remove printed paper from output tray indicated

on the LCD.

Paper Low

Paper Low T1

Paper Low T2

Paper Low T3

The paper tray is nearly empty. Refill the paper in the paper tray indicated on the

LCD.

Print Data Full The machine’s memory is full. Press and delete the previously stored

secure print data.

Print Unable ## The machine has a mechanical

problem. • Press and hold to turn off the machine,

wait a few minutes, and then turn it on again.

• If the problem continues, contact Brother

Customer Service.

Contact Brother Customer Service at:

1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in USA)

www.brother.ca/support (in Canada)

or to locate a Brother Authorized Service

Center, visit:

http://www.brother-usa.com/service

Received Fax ## An unprinted received fax is

waiting to print on the correct

size paper.

To print the received fax, load the correct size of

paper in the tray indicated on the LCD. Paper

sizes available for fax printing are Letter, Legal,

Folio, Mexico Legal, India Legal and A4.

Replace Toner The toner cartridge is at the end

of its life. The machine stops all

print operations.

While memory is available,

faxes are stored in the memory.

Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.

Scan Unable The document is too long for

2‑sided scanning. Press . For 2-sided scanning, use Letter,

Legal, or Folio size paper. Other paper must be

within the following size:

Length: 5.8 to 14.0 in. (147.3 to 355.6 mm)

Width: 4.1 to 8.5 in. (105 to 215.9 mm)

521

Error Message Cause Action

Scan Unable ## The machine has a mechanical

problem. • Press and hold to turn off the machine,

and then turn it on again.

• If the problem continues, contact Brother

Customer Service.

Contact Brother Customer Service at:

1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in USA)

www.brother.ca/support (in Canada)

or to locate a Brother Authorized Service

Center, visit:

http://www.brother-usa.com/service

Self-Diagnostic The temperature of the fuser

unit does not rise to a specified

temperature within the specified

time.

Press and hold to turn off the machine, wait a

few seconds, and then turn it on again. Leave the

machine idle for 15 minutes with the power on.

The fuser unit is too hot.

Service Error ## Machine's firmware has a

problem.

• Contact Brother Customer Service.

Contact Brother Customer Service at:

1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in USA)

www.brother.ca/support (in Canada)

or to locate a Brother Authorized Service

Center, visit:

http://www.brother-usa.com/service

Size Error The paper size defined in the

printer driver is not supported

by the defined tray.

Choose a paper size supported by the defined

tray.

Size Error 2-sided The paper size specified in the

machine's paper size setting is

not available for automatic 2-

sided printing.

Press (if required).

Load the correct size of paper in the tray and set

the tray for that paper size.

Choose a paper size supported by 2-sided

printing.

Paper sizes available for automatic 2-sided

printing are Letter, Legal, Mexico Legal, India

Legal and Folio.

The paper in the tray is not the

correct size and is not available

for automatic 2-sided printing.

Size Mismatch The paper in the tray is not the

correct size.

Load the correct size of paper in the tray

indicated on the LCD and set the size of paper for

the tray.

Supplies

Drum End Soon

The drum unit is near the end of

its life.

Order a new drum unit before the LCD displays

Replace Drum.

Supplies

Prepare New Toner

Cartridge.

If the LCD displays this

message, you can still print.

The toner cartridge is near the

end of its life.

Order a new toner cartridge now so a

replacement toner cartridge is available when the

LCD displays Replace Toner.

Supplies

Replace Drum

It is time to replace the drum

unit.

Replace the drum unit with a new one.

The drum unit counter was not

reset when a new drum was

installed.

Reset the drum unit counter.

See the instructions included with the new drum

unit.

Too Many Trays The number of installed

Optional Trays exceeds the

maximum number.

Reduce the number of Optional Trays.

522

Error Message Cause Action

Touchscreen

Initialization Failed

The touchscreen was pressed

before the power on

initialization was completed.

Make sure nothing is touching the touchscreen.

Debris may be stuck between

the lower part of the

touchscreen and its frame.

Insert a piece of stiff paper between the lower part

of the touchscreen and its frame and slide it back

and forth to push out any debris.

Unusable Device A USB device or USB Flash

memory drive that is encrypted

or not supported has been

connected to the USB direct

interface.

Unplug the device from the USB direct interface.

Unusable Device

Remove the Device. Turn

the power off and back

on again.

A defective USB device or a

high power consumption USB

device has been connected to

the USB direct interface.

• Unplug the device from the USB direct

interface.

• Press and hold to turn off the machine,

and then turn it on again.

Wrong Paper Size MP

Wrong Paper Size T1

Wrong Paper Size T2

Wrong Paper Size T3

The specified tray ran out of

paper during copying and the

machine could not feed the

same size paper from the next

priority tray.

Refill the paper in the paper tray.

Related Information

•Troubleshooting

•Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal Report

•Replace Supplies

•Load and Print Using the Paper Tray

•Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)

•Clean the Corona Wire

523

Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal Report

Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal Report

If the LCD displays:

•[Print Unable] ##

•[Scan Unable] ##

We recommend transferring your faxes to another fax machine or to your computer.

You can also transfer the Fax Journal report to see if there are any faxes you must transfer.

If there is an error message on the LCD after you transfer the faxes, disconnect your Brother machine from

the power source for several minutes, and then reconnect it.

Related Information

•Error and Maintenance Messages

•Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine

•Transfer Faxes to Your Computer

•Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine

524

Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal

Report > Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine

Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine

If you have not set up your Station ID, you cannot enter Fax Transfer mode.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Service] > [Data Transfer] > [Fax Transfer].

2. Do one of the following:

• If the LCD displays [No Data], there are no faxes left in the machine’s memory. Press [Close].

• Enter the fax number to which faxes will be forwarded.

3. Press [Fax Start].

Related Information

•Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal Report

•Set Your Station ID

525

Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal

Report > Transfer Faxes to Your Computer

Transfer Faxes to Your Computer

1. Make sure you have installed the software and drivers on your computer, and then turn on PC-FAX Receive

on the computer.

DO one of the following:

• (Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7)

From the (Start) menu, select All Programs > Brother > Brother Utilities.

Click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left

navigation bar, and then click Receive.

• (Windows 8)

Click (Brother Utilities), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not

already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Receive.

2. Make sure you have set [PC Fax Receive] on the machine.

If faxes are in the machine’s memory when you set up PC-Fax Receive, the LCD displays [Send Fax to

PC?].

3. Do one of the following:

• To transfer all faxes to your computer, press [Yes].

• To exit and leave the faxes in the memory, press [No].

4. Press .

Related Information

•Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal Report

•Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received Faxes to Your Computer (Windows only)

•Configure PC-FAX (Windows)

526

Home > Troubleshooting > Error and Maintenance Messages > Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal

Report > Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine

Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine

If you have not set up your Station ID, you cannot enter fax transfer mode.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Service] > [Data Transfer] > [Report

Transfer].

2. Enter the fax number to which the Fax Journal will be forwarded.

3. Press [Fax Start].

Related Information

•Transfer Your Faxes or Fax Journal Report

•Set Your Station ID

527

Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams

Document Jams

•Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit

•Document is Jammed under the Document Cover

•Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF

528

Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams > Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit

Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit

1. Remove any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.

2. Open the ADF cover.

3. Pull the jammed document out to the left. If the document rips or tears, be sure you remove any debris or

scraps to prevent future jams.

4. Close the ADF cover.

5. Press .

Related Information

•Document Jams

529

Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams > Document is Jammed under the Document Cover

Document is Jammed under the Document Cover

1. Remove any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.

2. Lift the document cover.

3. Pull the jammed document out to the right. If the document rips or tears, be sure you remove any debris or

scraps to prevent future jams.

4. Close the document cover.

5. Press .

Related Information

•Document Jams

530

Home > Troubleshooting > Document Jams > Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF

Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF

1. Lift the document cover.

2. Insert a piece of stiff paper, such as cardstock, into the ADF to push any small paper scraps through.

3. Close the document cover.

4. Press .

Related Information

•Document Jams

531

Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams

Paper Jams

Always remove the remaining paper from the paper tray and straighten the stack when you are adding new

paper. This helps prevent multiple sheets of paper from feeding through the machine at one time and prevents

paper jams.

•Paper is Jammed in the MP tray

•Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray

•Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine

•Paper is Jammed inside the Machine

•Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray

532

Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the MP tray

Paper is Jammed in the MP tray

If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the machine's MP tray, follow

these steps:

1. Remove the paper from the MP tray.

2. Remove any jammed paper from in and around the MP tray.

3. Fan the paper stack, and then put it back in the MP tray.

4. Reload paper in the MP tray and make sure the paper stays under the maximum paper height guides (1) on

both sides of the tray.

5. Press [Retry] to resume printing.

Related Information

•Paper Jams

533

Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray

Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray

If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the paper tray, follow these

steps:

1. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.

2. Slowly pull out the jammed paper.

Pulling the jammed paper downward using both hands allows you to remove the paper more easily.

3. Fan the stack of paper to prevent further jams, and slide the paper guides to fit the paper size.

4. Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (b b b).

534

5. Put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.

Related Information

•Paper Jams

535

Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine

Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine

If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the back (Rear) of the

machine, follow these steps:

1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the

machine.

2. Open the back cover.

3. Pull the green levers at the left and right sides toward you to release the fuser cover.

WARNING

HOT SURFACE

The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching

them.

4. Use both hands to gently pull the jammed paper out of the fuser unit.

536

5. Close the fuser cover.

6. Close the back cover until it locks in the closed position.

Related Information

•Paper Jams

537

Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed inside the Machine

Paper is Jammed inside the Machine

If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam inside the machine, follow these

steps:

1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the

machine.

2. Open the front cover.

3. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly.

WARNING

HOT SURFACE

The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching

them.

4. Pull out the jammed paper slowly.

538

5. Install the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine.

6. Close the front cover.

Related Information

•Paper Jams

539

Home > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray

Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray

If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the 2-sided paper tray, follow

these steps:

1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the

machine.

2. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.

3. At the back of the machine, pull the 2‑sided tray completely out of the machine.

4. Pull the jammed paper out of the machine or out of the 2‑sided tray.

540

5. Remove paper that may have jammed under the machine due to static electricity.

6. If paper is not caught inside the 2-sided tray, open the back cover.

WARNING

HOT SURFACE

The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching

them.

7. Use both hands to gently pull the jammed paper out of the back of the machine.

8. Close the back cover until it locks in the closed position.

9. Put the 2-sided tray firmly back in the rear of the machine.

10. Put the paper tray firmly back in the front of the machine.

541

Related Information

•Paper Jams

542

Home > Troubleshooting > Printing Problems

Printing Problems

Difficulties Suggestions

No printout Check that the correct printer driver has been installed

and selected.

Check to see if the Status Monitor or the machine's

control panel displays an error status.

Check that the machine is online:

• Windows7 and Windows Server 2008 R2

Click /Start > Devices and Printers . Right-click

Brother XXX-XXXX and click See what's printing.

Click Printer in the menu bar. Make sure Use Printer

Offline is not selected.

• Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008

Click /Start > Control Panel > Hardware and

Sound > Printers. Right-click Brother XXX-XXXX.

Make sure Use Printer Online is not listed. If it is

listed, click this option to set the driver Online.

• Windows XP and Windows Server 2003

Click the Start > Printers and Faxes. Right-click

Brother XXX-XXXX. Make sure Use Printer Online is

not listed. If it is listed, click this option to set the driver

Online.

• Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012

Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your

desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings

> Control Panel. In the Hardware and Sound group,

click View devices and printers. Right-click the

Brother XXX-XXXX. Click See what's printing. If

printer driver options appear, select your printer driver.

Click Printer in the menu bar and make sure that Use

Printer Offline is not selected.

• Windows Server 2012 R2

Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the

Hardware group, click View devices and printers.

Right-click the Brother XXX-XXXX. Click See what’s

printing. If printer driver options appear, select your

printer driver. Click Printer in the menu bar and make

sure Use Printer Offline is not selected.

Check the machine is not in Power Off mode.

If the machine is in Power Off mode, press on the

control panel, and then send the print data again.

The machine is not printing or has stopped printing. Press .

The machine will cancel the print job and clear it from the

machine's memory. The printout may be incomplete.

Send the print data again.

The machine prints unexpectedly or it prints garbage.

The headers or footers appear when the document

displays on the screen but they do not show up when it is

printed.

There is an unprintable area on the top and bottom of the

page. Adjust the top and bottom margins in your

document to allow for this.

Press .

Check the settings in your application to make sure they

are set up to work with your machine.

543

Difficulties Suggestions

Confirm that the Brother printer driver is selected in your

application's Print window.

The machine prints the first couple of pages correctly,

then some pages have missing text.

Check the settings in your application to make sure they

are set up to work with your machine.

Your computer is not recognizing the full signal of the

machine’s input buffer. Make sure you connected the

interface cable correctly.

The machine does not print on both sides of the paper

even though the printer driver setting is 2-sided and the

machine supports automatic 2-sided printing.

Check the paper size setting in the printer driver. You

must select Letter, Legal, Folio, Mexico Legal and India

Legal paper that is 16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)

Print speed is too slow. Try changing the printer driver setting. The highest

resolution needs longer data processing, sending and

printing time.

The machine does not feed paper. If there is paper in the paper tray, make sure it is straight.

If the paper is curled, straighten it. Sometimes it is helpful

to remove the paper, turn the stack over and put it back in

the paper tray.

Reduce the amount of paper in the paper tray, and then

try again.

Make sure MP Tray is not selected for Paper Source in

the printer driver.

Clean the paper pick-up rollers.

The machine does not feed paper from the MP tray. Fan the paper well and put it back in the MP tray firmly.

Make sure MP Tray is selected as Paper Source in the

printer driver.

The machine does not feed envelopes. Load envelopes in the MP tray. Your application must be

set to print the envelope size you are using. This is

usually done in the Page Setup or Document Setup menu

of your application.

Related Information

•Troubleshooting

•Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows)

•Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Mac)

•Unscannable and Unprintable Areas

•Cancel a Print Job

•Load and Print Using the Paper Tray

•Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers

•Load and Print Using the Multi‑purpose Tray (MP Tray)

544

Home > Troubleshooting > Improve the Print Quality

Improve the Print Quality

If you have a print quality problem, print a test page first. If the printout looks good, the problem is probably not

the machine. Check the interface cable connections and try printing a different document. If the printout or test

page printed from the machine has a quality problem, check the examples of poor print quality in the table and

follow the recommendations.

IMPORTANT

Using non-Brother supplies may affect the print quality, hardware performance, and machine reliability.

1. To get the best print quality, we suggest using recommended print media. Make sure you use paper that

meets our specifications.

2. Check that the toner cartridge and drum unit are installed correctly.

Examples of poor print quality Recommendation

Faint

• If the machine indicates Replace Toner status, install a

new toner cartridge.

• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as

humidity, high temperatures, and so on, may cause

this print fault.

• If the whole page is too light, Toner Save may be

turned on. Turn off Toner Save mode in the machine's

menu settings or the printer driver.

• Clean the drum unit.

• Clean the corona wire on the drum unit.

• Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge.

• Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.

Gray background

• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as

high temperatures and high humidity can increase the

amount of background shading.

• Clean the drum unit.

• Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge.

• Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.

Ghost

• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as

low humidity and low temperatures may cause this

print quality problem.

• Select the appropriate media type in the printer driver.

• Clean the drum unit.

• Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.

• Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge.

• The fuser unit may be contaminated.

Contact Brother Customer Service.

In USA: 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)

In Canada: www.brother.ca/support

• Make sure the media type setting in the driver

matches the type of paper you are using.

• Clean the drum unit.

• The toner cartridge may be damaged.

Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge.

• The drum unit may be damaged.

545

Examples of poor print quality Recommendation

Toner specks Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.

• The fuser unit may be contaminated.

Contact Brother Customer Service.

In USA: 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)

In Canada: www.brother.ca/support

Hollow print

• Select Thick Paper mode in the printer driver or use

thinner paper than you are currently using.

• Select the appropriate media type in the menu setting.

• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as

high humidity can cause hollow print.

• The drum unit may be damaged.

Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.

All black

• Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit.

• The drum unit may be damaged.

Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.

White lines across the page

• Select the appropriate media type in the printer driver.

• Select the appropriate media type in the menu setting.

• The problem may disappear by itself. Print multiple

blank pages to clear this problem, especially if the

machine has not been used for a long time.

• Clean the drum unit.

• The drum unit may be damaged.

Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.

Lines across the page

• Clean the drum unit.

• The drum unit may be damaged.

Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.

White lines, bands or ribbing across the page

• Check the machine's environment. Conditions such as

high humidity and high temperatures may cause this

print quality problem.

• Clean the drum unit.

• If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages,

replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.

White Spots on black text and graphics at 3.7 in. (94 mm)

intervals

• Make 10-15 copies of a blank, white sheet of paper. If

the problem is not solved after printing the blank

pages, the drum unit may have foreign material, such

as glue from a label, stuck on the drum. Clean the

drum unit.

See Related Information:Clean the Drum Unit.

• The drum unit may be damaged.

Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.

546

Examples of poor print quality Recommendation

Black spots at 3.7 in. (94 mm) intervals

Black toner marks across the page

• If you use label sheets for laser printers, the glue from

the sheets may sometimes stick to the drum surface.

Clean the drum unit.

See Related Information:Clean the Drum Unit.

• If you used paper that has clips or staples, the drum

unit may be damaged.

• If the unpacked drum unit is in direct sunlight (or room

light for long periods of time), the unit may be

damaged.

• Clean the drum unit.

• The toner cartridge may be damaged.

Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge.

• The drum unit may be damaged.

Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.

Black lines down the page

Printed pages have toner stains down the page

• Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by sliding

the green tab.

Make sure that the green tab on the drum unit is in the

Home position.

• The toner cartridge may be damaged.

Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge.

• The drum unit may be damaged.

Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.

• The fuser unit may be contaminated.

Contact Brother Customer Service.

In USA: 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)

In Canada: www.brother.ca/support

White lines down the page

• Make sure foreign material such as a torn piece of

paper, sticky notes or dust is not inside the machine

and around the toner cartridge and drum unit.

• The toner cartridge may be damaged.

Replace the toner cartridge with a new toner cartridge.

• The drum unit may be damaged.

Replace the drum unit with a new drum unit.

Image skewed

• Set the document correctly in the ADF or on the

scanner glass if the skew only occurs when making

copies.

• Make sure the paper or other print media is loaded

correctly in the paper tray and the guides are not too

tight or too loose against the paper stack.

• Set the paper guides correctly.

• The paper tray may be too full.

• Check the paper type and quality.

• Check for loose objects such as torn paper inside the

machine.

547

Examples of poor print quality Recommendation

• If the problem only occurs during automatic 2-sided

printing, check for torn paper in the 2-sided tray. Verify

the 2-sided tray is inserted completely and the back

cover is closed completely.

Curled or wavy

• Check the paper type and quality. High temperatures

and high humidity will cause paper to curl.

• If you do not use the machine often, the paper may

have been in the paper tray too long. Turn over the

stack of paper in the paper tray. Also, fan the paper

stack, and then rotate the paper 180° in the paper

tray.

• Open the back cover (face up output tray) to let the

printed paper exit onto the face up output tray.

• Choose Reduce Paper Curl mode in the printer driver

when you do not use our recommended print media.

Wrinkles or creases

• Make sure paper is loaded correctly.

• Check the paper type and quality.

• Turn over the stack of paper in the tray or rotate the

paper 180° in the input tray.

Poor fixing

• Make sure the media type setting in the driver

matches the type of paper you are using.

• Choose Improve Toner Fixing mode in the printer

driver.

If this selection does not provide enough

improvement, change the printer driver setting in

Media Type to a thick setting. If you are printing an

envelope, choose Env. Thick in the media type

setting.

Envelope creases

• Make sure envelopes are printed with the back cover

(face up output tray) opened.

• Make sure envelopes are fed only from the MP tray.

Related Information

•Troubleshooting

•Test Print

•Clean the Drum Unit

548

Home > Troubleshooting > Telephone and Fax Problems

Telephone and Fax Problems

Telephone Line or Connections

Difficulties Suggestions

Dialing does not work. (No

dial tone)

Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the

telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine. Make sure your machine has a dial

tone by pressing the Hook button in Fax mode. If you subscribe to DSL, VoIP or

MagicJack services, call your service provider for connection instructions.

(Available only for some countries.)

Change the Tone/Pulse setting.

Send a manual fax by pressing Hook button, and dialing the number. Wait to hear fax-

receiving tones before pressing Start button.

If there is no dial tone, connect a known working telephone and telephone line cord to the

jack. Then lift the external telephone’s handset and listen for a dial tone. If there is still no

dial tone, ask your telephone company to check the line and/or wall jack.

The machine does not

answer when called.

Make sure the machine is in the correct receive mode for your setup.

Check for a dial tone. If possible, call your machine to hear it answer. If there is still no

answer, check that the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall jack and the

LINE jack of the machine. Make sure your machine has a dial tone by pressing the Hook

button in Fax mode. If there is no ringing when you call your machine, ask your telephone

company to check the line.

Handling Incoming Calls

Difficulties Suggestions

Sending a Fax

Call to the

machine.

If you answered on an extension telephone, press your Fax Receive Code (the factory setting is

*51). If you answered on the external telephone (connected to the EXT. jack), press the Start

button to receive the fax.

When your machine answers, hang up.

Custom features

on a single line.

If you have Call Waiting, RingMaster, Voice Mail, an answering machine, an alarm system or

other custom feature on a single telephone line with your machine, it may create a problem

sending or receiving faxes.

For Example: If you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and its signal comes

through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax, the signal can temporarily

interrupt or disrupt the faxes. Brother’s ECM (Error Correction Mode) feature should help

overcome this problem. This condition is related to the telephone system industry and is common

to all devices that send and receive information on a single, shared line with custom features. If

avoiding a slight interruption is crucial to your business, we recommend using a separate

telephone line with no custom features.

Receiving Faxes

Difficulties Suggestions

Cannot receive

a fax.

Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone

wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL, VoIP, or MagicJack services,

call your service provider for connection instructions. If you are using a VoIP system, try changing

the VoIP setting to Basic (for VoIP). This will lower modem speed and turn off Error Correction

Mode (ECM).

Make sure your machine has a dial tone by pressing the Hook button in Fax mode. If you hear

static or interference on your fax line, contact your local telephone provider.

549

Difficulties Suggestions

Cannot receive

a fax.

Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode. This is determined by the external devices

and telephone subscriber services you have on the same line as the Brother machine.

• If you have a dedicated fax line and want your Brother machine to automatically answer all

incoming faxes, you should select Fax only mode.

• If your Brother machine shares a line with an external answering machine, you should select the

External TAD mode. In External TAD mode, your Brother machine will receive incoming faxes

automatically and voice callers will be able to leave a message on your answering machine.

• If your Brother machine shares the line with a Voice Mail subscriber service, see Related

Information: Voice Mail.

• If your Brother machine is on a line with the Distinctive Ring subscriber service, see Related

Information: Distinctive Ring.

• If your Brother machine shares a line with other telephones and you want it to automatically

answer all incoming faxes, you should select the Fax/Tel mode. In Fax/Tel mode, your Brother

machine will receive faxes automatically and produce a pseudo/double-ring to alert you to

answer voice calls.

• If you do not want your Brother machine to answer any incoming faxes automatically, you

should select the Manual mode. In Manual mode, you must answer every incoming call and

activate the machine to receive faxes.

Another device or service at your location may be answering the call before your Brother machine

answers. To test this, lower the Ring Delay setting:

• If the Receive Mode is set to Fax Only or Fax/Tel, reduce the Ring Delay to one ring.

See Related Information: Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay).

• If the Receive Mode is set to External TAD, reduce the number of rings programmed on your

answering machine to two.

• If the Receive Mode is set to Manual, DO NOT adjust the Ring Delay setting.

Have someone send you a test fax:

• If you received the test fax successfully, your machine is operating correctly. Remember to reset

your Ring Delay or answering machine setting back to your original setting. If receiving

problems recur after resetting the Ring Delay, then a person, device, or subscriber service is

answering the fax call before the machine has a chance to answer.

• If you were not able to receive the fax, then another device or subscriber service may be

interfering with your fax reception or there may be a problem with your fax line.

If you are using a telephone answering machine (External TAD mode) on the same line as the

Brother machine, make sure your answering machine is set up correctly.

1. Plug the telephone line cord directly from the wall telephone jack to your Brother machine’s

LINE jack.

2. Remove the protective cap from your Brother machine’s EXT jack, and then plug the telephone

line cord from your answering machine into the EXT jack.

3. Set your answering machine to answer within 4 rings.

If you are having problems receiving faxes or voice messages, set your answering machine to

answer within 2 or 3 rings.

4. Record the outgoing message on your answering machine.

• Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your outgoing message.

• Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.

• End your outgoing message with your Fax Receive Code for people sending manual faxes.

For example: “After the beep, leave a message or press *51 and Start to send a fax.”

5. Set your answering machine to answer calls.

6. Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to External TAD.

See Related Information: Choose the Correct Receive Mode.

Make sure your Brother machine’s Easy Receive feature is turned On. Easy Receive is a feature

that allows you to receive a fax even if you answered the call on an external or extension

telephone.

If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line or if you are

using a VoIP system, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP).

550

Difficulties Suggestions

Cannot receive

a fax.

Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock Settings.

Sending Faxes

Difficulties Suggestions

Cannot send a fax. Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the

telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine. Make sure your machine has a dial

tone by pressing the Hook button in Fax mode. If you subscribe to DSL, VoIP, or

MagicJack services, call your service provider for connection instructions.

Make sure you pressed Fax and the machine is in Fax mode.

Print the Transmission Verification Report and check for an error.

Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock Settings.

Ask the other party to check that the receiving machine has paper.

Poor sending quality. Try changing your resolution to Fine or S.Fine. Make a copy to check your machine’s

scanner operation. If the copy quality is poor, clean the scanner.

Transmission

Verification Report says

RESULT:NG.

There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again. If you

are sending a PC-Fax message and get RESULT:NG on the Transmission Verification

Report, your machine may be out of memory. To free up extra memory, you can turn off

Fax Storage, print fax messages in memory or cancel a delayed fax. If the problem

continues, ask the telephone company to check your telephone line.

If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line or if

you are using a VoIP system, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP).

Sent faxes are blank. Make sure you are loading the document correctly. When using the ADF, the document

should be face up. When using the scanner glass, the document should be face down.

Vertical black lines when

sending.

Black vertical lines on faxes you send are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid on the

glass strip. Clean the glass strip.

Printing received faxes

Difficulties Suggestions

• Condensed print

• Horizontal streaks

• Top and bottom sentences are cut

off

• Missing lines

This is usually caused by a poor telephone connection. Make a copy; if your

copy looks good, you probably had a bad connection, with static or

interference on the telephone line. Ask the other party to send the fax again.

Vertical black lines when receiving The corona wire for printing may be dirty.

Clean the corona wire in the drum unit.

The sender’s scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if

the problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax

machine.

Received faxes appear as split or

blank pages.

Left and right margins are cut off or a single page is printed on two pages.

Turn on Auto Reduction.

Related Information

•Troubleshooting

551

•Set Dial Tone Detection

•Set Telephone Line Compatibility for Interference and VoIP Systems

•Clean the Scanner

•Voice Mail

•Distinctive Ring

•Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay)

•Choose the Correct Receive Mode

552

Home > Troubleshooting > Telephone and Fax Problems > Set Dial Tone Detection

Set Dial Tone Detection

Setting the Dial Tone to [Detection] will shorten the Dial Tone detect pause.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Dial Tone].

2. Press [Detection] or [No Detection]

3. Press .

Related Information

•Telephone and Fax Problems

553

Home > Troubleshooting > Telephone and Fax Problems > Set Telephone Line Compatibility for

Interference and VoIP Systems

Set Telephone Line Compatibility for Interference and VoIP Systems

Problems sending and receiving faxes due to possible interference on the telephone line may be solved by

reducing the modem speed to minimize errors in fax transmission. If you are using a Voice over IP (VoIP)

service, Brother recommends changing the compatibility to Basic (for VoIP).

• VoIP is a type of phone system that uses an Internet connection, rather than a traditional phone line.

• Telephone providers frequently bundle VoIP together with Internet and cable services.

1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Compatibility].

2. Press the option you want.

• Select [High] to set the modem speed to 33600 bps.

• Select [Normal] to set the modem speed to 14400 bps.

• Select [Basic(for VoIP)] to reduce the modem speed to 9600 bps and turn off Error Correction

Mode (ECM). Unless interference is a recurring problem on your telephone line, you may prefer to use

this option only when needed.

3. Press .

Related Information

•Telephone and Fax Problems

554

Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems

Network Problems

•Error Messages

•Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)

•Where Can I Find My Brother Machine's Network Settings?

•I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration

•My Brother Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or PC-FAX Receive over the Network

•I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly

555

Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > Error Messages

Error Messages

Your Brother machine will display an error message if an error occurs. The most common error messages are

shown in the table.

Error Messages Cause Action

The maximum number

of devices are

already connected

using Wi-Fi

Direct.

Two mobile devices are

already connected to the Wi-Fi

Direct network when the

Brother machine is the Group

Owner (G/O).

After the current connection between your Brother

machine and another mobile device has shut down, try to

configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings again. You can confirm

the connection status by printing the Network

Configuration Report.

Authentication

Error, contact

your

administrator.

Your authentication setting for

the Store Print Log to Network

feature is not correct.

• Make sure the Username and Password in

Authentication Setting are correct. If the username is

part of a domain, enter the username in one of the

following styles: user@domain or domain\user.

• Make sure the time of the log file server matches the

time from the SNTP server, or the Date&Time settings.

• Make sure the SNTP time server settings are

configured correctly so the time matches the time used

for authentication by Kerberos or NTLMv2. If there is

no SNTP server, make sure the Date&Time and Time

Zone settings are set correctly using Web Based

Management or the control panel so the machine

matches the time being used by the server providing

the authentication.

Check User ID and

Password.

The Kerberos Authentication

error.

Make sure you have entered a correct user name and a

password for the Kerberos server. For more information on

the Kerberos server settings, contact your network

administrator.

The date, time and time zone

settings of the Brother

machine are not correct.

Confirm your machine's date, time and time zone settings.

The DNS server configuration

is not correct.

Contact your network administrator for the information on

the DNS server settings.

The Brother machine cannot

connect to the Kerberos

server.

Contact your network administrator for the information on

the Kerberos server settings.

Connection Error Other devices are trying to

connect to the Wi-Fi Direct

network at the same time.

• Make sure there are no other devices trying to connect

to the Wi-Fi Direct network, and then try to configure

the Wi-Fi Direct settings again.

Connection Failed The Brother machine and your

mobile device cannot

communicate during the Wi-Fi

Direct network configuration.

• Move the mobile device closer to your Brother

machine.

• Move your Brother machine and the mobile device to

an obstruction-free area.

• If you are using the PIN Method of WPS, make sure

you have entered the correct PIN.

File Access Error,

contact your

administrator.

The Brother machine cannot

access the destination folder

for the Store Print Log to

Network feature.

• Make sure the stored directory name is correct.

• Make sure the stored directory is write-enabled.

• Make sure the file is not locked.

In Web Based Management,

you have selected the Cancel

Print option in the Error

Detection Setting of Store

Print Log to Network.

Wait for about 120 seconds until this message disappears

from the LCD.

556

Error Messages Cause Action

No Device When configuring the Wi-Fi

Direct network, the Brother

machine cannot find your

mobile device.

• Make sure your machine and mobile device are in the

Wi-Fi Direct mode.

• Move the mobile device closer to your Brother

machine.

• Move your Brother machine and the mobile device to

an obstruction-free area.

• If you are manually configuring the Wi-Fi Direct

network, make sure you have entered the correct

password.

• If your mobile device has a configuration page for how

to obtain an IP address, make sure the IP address of

your mobile device has been configured via DHCP.

Server Timeout,

contact your

administrator.

The Brother machine cannot

connect to the server for the

Store Print Log to Network

feature.

• Make sure your server address is correct.

• Make sure your server is connected to the network.

• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.

Server Timeout The Brother machine cannot

connect to the LDAP server.

• Make sure your server address is correct.

• Make sure your server is connected to the network.

• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.

The Brother machine cannot

connect to the Active Directory

server.

• Make sure your server address is correct.

• Make sure your server is connected to the network.

• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.

Wrong Date&Time,

contact your

administrator.

The Brother machine does not

obtain the time from the SNTP

time server or you have not

configured the Date&Time for

the machine.

• Make sure the settings to access the SNTP time server

are configured correctly in Web Based Management.

• Confirm the Date&Time settings of your machine are

correct in Web Based Management.

Internal Error The Brother machine's LDAP

protocol is disabled.

Confirm your authentication method, and then enable the

necessary protocol setting in the Web Based

Management.

The Brother machine's CIFS

protocol is disabled.

Related Information

•Network Problems

557

Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)

Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)

Use the Network Connection Repair Tool to fix the Brother machine's network settings. It will assign the correct

IP address and Subnet Mask.

• (Windows XP/XP Professional x64 Edition/Windows Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8)

You must log on with Administrator rights.

• Make sure the Brother machine is turned on and is connected to the same network as your computer.

1. Do one of the following:

Option Description

Windows XP Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Windows Explorer > My

Computer.

Windows Vista/

Windows 7

Click (Start) > Computer.

Windows 8 Click the (File Explorer) icon on the taskbar, and then click Computer (This

PC) in the left navigation bar.

2. Double-click XXX(C:) (where XXX is the name of your local disk drive) > Program Files > Browny02 >

Brother > BrotherNetTool.exe.

• For 64-bit OS users, double-click XXX(C:) (where XXX is the name of your local disk drive) > Program

Files (x86) > Browny02 > Brother > BrotherNetTool.exe.

• If the User Account Control screen appears, do one of the following:

- (Windows Vista) Click Allow.

- (Windows 7/Windows 8) Click Yes.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions.

4. Check the diagnosis by printing the Network Configuration Report.

The Network Connection Repair Tool will start automatically if you select the Enable Connection Repair

Tool option in the Status Monitor. Right-click the Status Monitor screen, and then click Other Settings >

Enable Connection Repair Tool. This is not recommended when your network administrator has set the

IP address to Static, since it will automatically change the IP address.

If the correct IP address and the Subnet Mask are still not assigned even after using the Network Connection

Repair Tool, ask your network administrator for this information.

Related Information

•Network Problems

•Print the Network Configuration Report

•My Brother Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or PC-FAX Receive over the Network

•I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly

558

Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > Where Can I Find My Brother Machine's Network Settings?

Where Can I Find My Brother Machine's Network Settings?

•Print the Network Configuration Report

•Change Machine Settings from Your Computer

559

Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup

Configuration

I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration

Turn your wireless router off and back on. Then try to configure the wireless settings again. If you are unable to

resolve the problem, follow the instructions below:

Investigate the problem using the WLAN Report.

Cause Action Interface

Your security settings (SSID/

Network Key) are not

correct.

• Confirm the security settings using the Wireless Setup Helper

utility. For more information and to download the utility, go to your

model's Downloads page on the Brother Solutions Center at

support.brother.com.

• Select and confirm that you are using the correct security

settings.

- See the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access

point/router for information on how to find the security

settings.

- The manufacturer's name or model number of the wireless

LAN access point/router may be used as the default security

settings.

- Consult with the access point/router manufacturer, your

Internet provider, or network administrator.

• For definitions of SSID and Network Key, see the entries SSID,

Network Key and Channels in the Glossary.

Wireless

Your Brother machine's MAC

address is not allowed.

Confirm that the Brother machine's MAC Address is allowed in the

filter. You can find the MAC Address on your Brother machine's

control panel.

Wireless

Your wireless LAN access

point/router is in stealth

mode (not broadcasting the

SSID).

• Enter the correct SSID name or Network Key manually.

• Check the SSID name or the Network Key in the instructions

supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router and

reconfigure the wireless network setup.

Wireless

Your security settings (SSID/

password) are not correct.

• Confirm the SSID and password.

- When you are configuring the network manually, the SSID

and password are displayed on your Brother machine. If your

mobile device supports the manual configuration, the SSID

and password will be displayed on your mobile device’s

screen.

• For the definition of SSID, see the Glossary.

Wi-Fi Direct

You are using Android™ 4.0. If your mobile device disconnects (approximately six minutes after

using Wi-Fi Direct), try the one-push configuration using WPS

(recommended) and set the Brother machine as a G/O.

Wi-Fi Direct

Your Brother machine is

placed too far from your

mobile device.

Move your Brother machine within about 3.3 feet (1 meter) of the

mobile device when you configure the Wi-Fi Direct network settings.

Wi-Fi Direct

There are some obstructions

(walls or furniture, for

example) between your

machine and the mobile

device.

Move your Brother machine to an obstruction-free area. Wi-Fi Direct

There is a wireless

computer, Bluetooth-

supported device,

microwave oven, or digital

cordless phone near the

Brother machine or the

mobile device.

Move other devices away from the Brother machine or the mobile

device.

Wi-Fi Direct

560

Cause Action Interface

If you have checked and

tried all of the above, but still

cannot complete the Wi-Fi

Direct configuration, do the

following:

• Turn your Brother machine off and back on. Then try to configure

the Wi-Fi Direct settings again.

• If you are using your Brother machine as a client, confirm how

many devices are allowed in the current Wi-Fi Direct network,

and then check how many devices are connected.

Wi-Fi Direct

For Windows

If your wireless connection has been interrupted, and you have checked and tried all of the above, we

recommend using the Network Connection Repair Tool.

Related Information

•Network Problems

•Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast

•Use Wi-Fi Direct®

561

Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > My Brother Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or PC-FAX

Receive over the Network

My Brother Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or PC-FAX Receive over the

Network

Cause Action Interface

Your security software

blocks your machine's

access to the network.

(The Network scanning

feature does not work. )

• (Windows)

Configure the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow

Network scanning. To add port 54925 for Network scanning, type

the information below:

- In Name:

Type any description, for example Brother NetScan.

- In Port number:

Type 54925.

- In Protocol:

UDP is selected.

See the instruction manual that came with your third-party

Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.

• (Mac)

Launch ControlCenter2. Click the Model pop-up menu, and then

select Other.... The Device Selector window appears. Reselect

your network machine, make sure Status is idle, and then click

OK.

Wired/Wireless

Your security software

blocks your machine's

access to the network.

(The network PC-Fax

Receive feature does not

work.)

(Windows)

Set the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow PC-FAX Rx. To

add port 54926 for Network PC-FAX Rx, type the information below:

• In Name:

Type any description, for example Brother PC-FAX Rx.

• In Port number:

Type 54926.

• In Protocol:

UDP is selected.

See the instruction manual that came with your third-party Security/

Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.

Wired/Wireless

Your security software

blocks your machine's

access to the network.

Some security software might block access without showing a security

alert dialog box even after successful installation.

To allow access, see the instructions for your security software or ask

the software manufacturer.

Wired/Wireless

Your Brother machine was

not assigned an available

IP address.

• Confirm the IP address and the Subnet Mask.

Verify that both the IP addresses and Subnet Masks of your

computer and the Brother machine are correct and located on the

same network.

For more information about how to verify the IP address and the

Subnet Mask, ask your network administrator.

• (Windows)

Confirm the IP address and the Subnet Mask using the Network

Connection Repair Tool.

Wired/Wireless

The failed print job is still

in your computer's print

queue.

• If the failed print job is still in your computer's print queue, delete it.

• Otherwise, double-click the printer icon in the following folder and

cancel all documents:

- (Windows XP/Windows Server 2003)

Click Start > Printers and Faxes.

- (Windows Vista)

Wired/Wireless

562

Cause Action Interface

Click (Start) > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >

Printers.

- (Windows 7)

Click (Start) > Devices and Printers > Printers and

Faxes.

- (Windows 8)

Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop.

When the menu bar appears, click Settings > Control Panel.

In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and

printers > Printers.

- (Windows Server 2008)

Click Start > Control Panel > Printers.

- (Windows Server 2012)

Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop.

When the menu bar appears, click Settings > Control Panel.

In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers >

Printers.

- (Windows Server 2012 R2)

Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware

group, click View devices and printers.

- (OS X v10.8.5)

Click System Preferences > Print & Scan.

- (OS X v10.9.x, 10.10.x)

Click System Preferences > Printers & Scanners.

Your Brother machine is

not connected to the

wireless network.

Print the WLAN Report to check the error code on the printed report. Wireless

If you have checked and tried all of the above, but your Brother machine still cannot print and scan, uninstall the

Brother software and drivers and reinstall them.

Related Information

•Network Problems

•Print the WLAN Report

•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes

•Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)

•I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly

563

Home > Troubleshooting > Network Problems > I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working

Correctly

I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly

Check Action Interface

Check that your Brother

machine, access point/

router, or network hub is

turned on.

Check the following:

• The power cord is connected correctly and the Brother machine is

turned on.

• The access point/router or hub is turned on and its link button is

blinking.

• All protective packaging has been removed from the machine.

• The toner cartridge and drum unit are installed correctly.

• The front and back covers are fully closed.

• Paper is inserted correctly in the paper tray.

• (For wired networks) A network cable is securely connected to the

Brother machine and to the router or hub.

Wired/Wireless

Check the Link Status

in the Network

Configuration Report.

Print the Network Configuration Report and check that Ethernet Link

Status or Wireless Link Status is Link OK.

Wired/Wireless

Check that you can

"ping" the Brother

machine from your

computer.

Ping the Brother machine from your computer using the IP address or

the node name in the Windows command prompt or Mac Terminal

application:

ping <ipaddress> or <nodename>.

• Successful: Your Brother machine is working correctly and

connected to the same network as your computer.

• Unsuccessful: Your Brother machine is not connected to the same

network as your computer.

(Windows)

Ask the network administrator and use the Network Connection Repair

Tool to fix the IP address and the subnet mask.

(Mac)

Confirm that the IP address and the Subnet Mask are set correctly.

Wired/Wireless

Check that your Brother

machine is connected to

the wireless network.

Print the WLAN Report to check the error code on the printed report. Wireless

If you have checked and tried all of the above but you are still having problems, see the instructions supplied with

your wireless LAN access point/router to find the SSID and the Network Key information and set them correctly.

Related Information

•Network Problems

•Print the Network Configuration Report

•Print the WLAN Report

•Wireless LAN Report Error Codes

•Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)

•My Brother Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or PC-FAX Receive over the Network

564

Home > Troubleshooting > Other Problems